JP2022009880A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for enhancing interest in a game.

SOLUTION: A first rotor and a second rotor are configured so as to be variable to a first position where a player can easily and visually recognize figures and a second position where the user cannot easily and visually recognize the figures, relative to the first position. Rotation control means rotates the first rotor and the second rotor to the second position by a predetermined amount each, and then varies the first rotor and the second rotor to the first position each when displaying a combination of the figures for indicating performance contents determined by performance content determination means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port on which a gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening, the game is played. A lottery is executed, and an effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect of showing the lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel showing a plurality of symbols is rotated a plurality of times and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-160759

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display with a predetermined combination of symbols, the rotation time of the reel (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is positioned in the front position depending on the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.) There was a problem that the time) became longer, the time until the lottery result was displayed became longer, and the interest of the game was lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is rotated by a driving means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and is rotated on an outer peripheral surface. The effect is achieved by controlling the rotation of the first and second rotating bodies on which a plurality of figures are drawn, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first and second rotating bodies, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are each provided with at least a rotation control means for controlling the rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the content determining means. Is variably configured into a first position where the figure is easy to see and a second position where the figure is harder to see than the first position, and the rotation control means is determined by the effect content determining means. When displaying the combination of the figures showing the contents of the effect, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to a predetermined amount at the second position, and then the first rotation is performed at the first position. The body and the second rotating body are each variable.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the rotation control means has the first rotating body and the second rotating body opposite to the first direction and the first direction, respectively. It is configured so that the rotation can be controlled in the second direction, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively in the first direction and based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. It has a rotation direction determining means for determining which direction to rotate in the second direction.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a driving means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface while being rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means. The first rotating body and the second rotating body, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated and controlled, respectively, and determined by the effect content determining means. At least a rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the effect content is provided, and the player visually recognizes the figure in each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The rotation control means is configured to be variably configured into a first position that is easy to perform and a second position that makes it harder to visually recognize the figure than the first position, and the rotation control means indicates the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. When displaying a combination of figures, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are displayed at the first position. It is to make each of the rotating body variable. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rotation control means is configured to be capable of controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Rotation that determines whether to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction or the second direction, respectively, based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. It has a direction-determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the rotation time can be shortened.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. Therefore, there is an effect that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be displayed in various and efficient manners.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the containment body. (A) is a side view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st member. It is a front view of the left-right rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left-right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit arranged in the descending position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit arranged in the descending position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit, and (c) is an XLIc-XLIc of FIG. 41 (b). It is sectional drawing rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit in a line. (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in line XLIIb-XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of FIG. 43 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in the XLIVb-XLIVb line of FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged top views of the flat glass of the glass unit. (A) is a side view of the containment body in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the containment body in the direction of arrow XLVIIb of FIG. 47 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. (A) is a side view of the containment body in the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the containment body in the direction of arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit in the direction of arrow LVb of FIG. 55 (a), and (c) is a rear view. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit. (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a frame button, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection switch. It is a figure which shows schematically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. be. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the judgment value of the jackpot of the special symbol, and (b) is the first hit type counter CS2 and the jackpot type. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 at the time of disconnection (normal) and the variation type, and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of disconnection (probability variation). It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between a variation type and a variation type. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table A in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table B in the first control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern selection table C in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking operation table in the first control example. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the right-and-left selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the shaking control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special SW effect control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the reel control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 3rd control example. It is a timing chart which showed the timing to execute the time effect in the 3rd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing an effect screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the period A1 of FIG. 119. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing an effect screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the period B of FIG. 119. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the effect screen of the shaking effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the rotating body operation table in the 3rd control example schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the dog species selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the shaking operation table 2 in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect change processing at the time of a prize executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead reel display effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the shaking control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the contents of the reel scenario table in the third control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 has won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. And the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easier to win a prize in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 as compared with the case of. Therefore, during the probabilistic change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or is opened during the probability change or the time reduction. In addition to changing the time, the change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened at one time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is possible to change at least one of the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per time and one time. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, or the first per hit. The electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 may not be opened the number of times, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing, and a sphere of a first through gate 66 and a second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol with passing as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 overhangs into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It is visible through the part.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device has a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. It is a variable display that lights and alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment). The 1 electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82.

It should be noted that during the probability change or the time reduction, the probability of the hit is increased, and the probability of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are increased for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the time reduction, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol. It is also lit and displayed on the hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). May be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. Further, a third winning opening 82 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. , But the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. May be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the second symbol is displayed. 1 The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

Further, a second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the second symbol is displayed. 2 The electric accessory 82a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a is also longer than during the normal period. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is high even in a low probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is the same in the state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball goes to the first winning opening 64 when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is set higher than when you win a prize. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win a prize. It is in a state.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning opening 64 without an electric accessory (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery and aim to be a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning opening 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to open the second electric accessory 82a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

In addition, not limited to the above-mentioned form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may draw a winning lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol when the ball passes through. The second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state by the lottery of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the ball passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric accessory that the ball passes through and opens the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. Will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit to the right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, the first electric accessory 640a can be in a gaming state.

Therefore, if the game state is such that the lottery of the second symbol is easy to win during the probability change, and the game state is such that a symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time reduction, right-handed during the probability change to the second through gate 67. In a game state where it is easy to win a ball by opening the second electric accessory 82a, and during a short time, hit left to pass through the first through gate 66 and open the first electric accessory to win the ball. You can make the game state easy to play. Therefore, since the gaming states during normal, time-saving, and probable change can be set to different gaming states, it is possible to entertain the player in each gaming state.

In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit to the right and passed through the second through gate 67, it is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is drawn and a lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol is selected, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is passed. Is drawn, and when a hit is selected for the second symbol, the second electric accessory 82a can be opened in a gaming state.

In this case, regardless of the probability change or the time reduction, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by hitting right, the first electric accessory is released and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by hitting left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened and the ball can be easily put into the third winning opening 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way of hitting the player at any time, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to any of the winning of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 64, or the third winning opening 82 becomes a big hit, the predetermined time (variable time) is set. After the lapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the jackpot. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 has a switch (sensor) for detecting the winning of the ball to each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that the ball has passed through various gates, and a switch (sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity. Various switches such as 208 and the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 is based on the signal output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. And execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a switch (sensor) group used for various effects, and various variable members (movable accessories). Various switches consisting of a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the operation of the above, motors consisting of drive motors 420, 530, 630 and the like for driving various variable members (movable accessories) are connected. The other device 228 includes a drive motor.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

It should be noted that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the descending position, the central floating unit 400 in the ascending position, and the left and right rotating unit 500 in the retracting position. The state in which the unit 300 is arranged in the ascending position, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, and the left-right rotating unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operating unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, a rotating body elevating unit 300 and a central floating unit 300 are provided above and below the rear case 210. Each unit 400 is arranged, and a pair of left-right rotating units 500 and left-right sensor device 600 are arranged on the left and right sides of the central floating unit 400.

The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of these wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a box-shaped accommodating body 330 in which a plurality of units (three in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality of units (two in the present embodiment) housed in each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) (1st rotating body 340a and 2nd rotating body 340b) are mainly provided.

The plurality of housings 330 are independently formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, at the ascending position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Will be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the accommodating body 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let me. The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

In the present embodiment, the drive sources of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are shared by the drive motor 350 of 1, and the parts cost can be reduced, while the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body are able to be reduced. The combination of the figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

The central floating unit 400 has a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the base body 410, and a tip side opposite to the base end side of the pair of arm bodies 430. Each is provided with a first member 440 that is connected so as to be relatively displaceable (see FIG. 23).

The pair of arm bodies 430 are driven by separate drive motors 450, and are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. As a result, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear ascending / descending direction along the vertical direction but also in a mode in which a linear motion and a rotational motion are combined, and can be moved up and down while incorporating the floating motion. The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). The details will be described later.

The left-right rotation unit 500 is attached to a base (rear base 511 and front base 512) arranged in front of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300 and the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410 thereof. A displacement member 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported is provided (see FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 has a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that retracts to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player, and an overhanging position (overhanging position) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacement member 530 abuts on the first member 440 and is formed so as to be able to regulate its movement by arranging the displacement member 530 at the overhanging position (see FIG. 41). The details will be described later.

The left-right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting portion that irradiates light and a light receiving portion that receives light emitted from the light emitting portion and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). , The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 can be detected.

The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. To. In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward. Therefore, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at a position deeper in the width direction (a position outside the width direction) than the inner edge of the opening, and can be visually recognized by the player. It can be difficult to do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 46, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, the left-right rotating unit 500, and the left-right sensor device 600 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central accommodating body 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for elevating and lowering the left and right accommodating bodies 330, respectively. It is formed from 3 units of. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three housings 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C is provided on the front side of the front base 311 having an L-shape in front view, the front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the back base 311 and the front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 to be arranged, the accommodating body 330 which is raised and lowered with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the first rotating body 340a and the first rotating body 340a accommodated in the accommodating body 330. It mainly includes a two-rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and cut on the side surface of a flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 are arranged on one side and an accommodating body 330 is arranged on the other side. It is provided with a connecting member 325 to be provided.

A pair of shafts are projected from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Further, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the slide guides 351 and 352 are used to connect members 325 (rack gear 324). ) And the housing 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion in which the accommodating body 330 is arranged by connecting the lower end sides thereof with the horizontally elongated portion. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the left housing 330 is placed in the lowered position and the central housing 330 is placed in the rising position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the rear base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the accommodating body 330, and the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left accommodating body 330 is juxtaposed on the side of the central accommodating body 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 12) is correspondingly large. ) The dimensions become longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid visibility from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central containment body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central accommodating body 330, the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position. However, the extended slide guide 352 regulates the swing in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central accommodation body 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central accommodation body 330 is arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L is a rear base 313 formed vertically in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313 thereof. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 arranged on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing body 330 that is moved up and down with respect to each base 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330, and the housing between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 thereof, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and having a gear cut on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and a connecting member 326 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and rotatably supported.

A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the accommodating body 330 is provided in the guide groove 353a via the collar C. It is inserted. Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear motion of the rack gear 324. It is converted, and the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 with the linear motion of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L-shape on the front surface and connected to the right end portion of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and a rear base 316 thereof. The front base 317 overlapped on the front side of the rear base 313, the drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 raises and lowers the rear base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330 is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodating the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly comprises a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface, and a connecting member 327 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a which is an elongated hole-shaped opening is extended along the vertical direction, and in the guide groove 316a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the accommodating body 330 is collared (FIG. It is inserted via (not shown). Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324 is performed. Along with this, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the lateral width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central accommodating body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surfaces of the left accommodating body 330 and the right accommodating body 330, the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). (Left and right direction) The dimensions can be shortened to increase the rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the left and right accommodating bodies 330 (to make it difficult to shake in the left-right direction).

Along with this, it is not necessary to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right accommodating bodies 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide plate 353. Therefore, the posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the accommodating body 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the housing body 330. 18 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). Is. In addition, in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the substrate 331 are provided, and the respective parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The substrate 331 is a member forming the back surface (back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (upper side and lower side in FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Is formed integrally. A reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged on the front surface of the portion forming the back surface of the housing 330.

The reflecting portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects at least in the vertical direction from the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18 (b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the accommodating body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are bored at two positions, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which the fixed shaft 341 described later of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is inserted, and holds the fixed shaft 341 non-rotatably. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which one of the inner peripheral surfaces thereof is defined by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line from a circular shape.

The partition wall 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall 332, and the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the side wall 332. Further, the partition wall 334 is provided with insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 at two places.

The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in the shape of a front view frame by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The housing body 330 formed in this way is driven by a drive motor 350 arranged on the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the second rotating body 340b. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 is a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed with the drive gear 351 in this order. It is equipped with a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a representative example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported at both ends in the axial direction (shaft portion 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair thereof. It mainly includes three display plates (first display plate 343A, second display plate 343B, and third display plate 343C) erected between the end face plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and a shaft portion 341b connected to both ends of the body portion 341a in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall body 332, 333 (see FIG. 17) of the accommodating body 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft portions 341a. A body portion 341b is provided.

The shaft portion 341b has a shape in which the cross-sectional shape of the shaft is obtained by removing one of the circular shapes obtained by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered by a plane). The shape is slightly smaller than that of the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332 and 333. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341b into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the accommodating body 330 (side wall body 332,333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

In this case, the body portion 341b has the irradiation direction of the LED 344 in the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (decorative body 335) in a state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held non-rotatably. The opening 335a and FIG. 18B are arranged in a posture (rotational position) toward the front side of the paper surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate arranged on the front surface (“viewing position” described later) of the housing body 330 in the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. can.

Since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends open in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed by utilizing the internal space. It can be pulled out of the housing 330 through the opening at the directional end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 is made non-rotatable with respect to the accommodating body 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force of twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center thereof. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end face plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing body 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end face plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the accommodating body 330 and the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. In the second rotating body 340b, the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, but the mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are plate-shaped members having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and are paired by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342. It is erected between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plate 342.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the display plates 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed by being curved in an arc shape which is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotation position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display board 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In the present embodiment, in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise end portions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward. The central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arcuate portion formed by being curved is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display plate 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times). It is set to (below).

Here, in the following, the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the housing 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visible position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged in the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular columnar body is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343B or the third display plate is displayed. The other side of the plate 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at a shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transparent portions PN through which light can be transmitted. Is formed in preparation for a part. Further, on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display plate arranged at the visual recognition position among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmission portion PN of each display board 343B, 343C and directly viewed by the player. Can be made to.

On the other hand, in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331 of the accommodating body 330 after being reflected by the reflecting portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331. It can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotating position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the substrate 331 of the accommodating body 330 is visually recognized. It is possible to remind the player of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. Thereby, it is possible to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the figure of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied by the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical spacing in FIG. 18B), or. The apparent diameters of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical dimensions in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b face each other with respect to the reflecting plate RF. The angle can be changed. That is, the reflected light of the reflected light is visually recognized as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 441, which is emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN as the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate. The aspect (eg, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 17 and 18. The detection mechanism is a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detected plate 363a projecting outward in the direction and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the substrate 331 with the detection region arranged on the movement locus of the detected plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position) based on the detection result of the sensor device 364.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite directions to those described above.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three sets in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven synchronously by the drive motor of 1, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display plate 343A and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. The first combination for arranging the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340a at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340a at the display position. There were only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a to be arranged at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotated and driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, since two drive motors are required, the component cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while limiting the number of drive motors 350 to only one, it is possible to form nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of 9 sets is promptly displayed by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotation position without requiring perfect matching of the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can get it out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 21 From (a) to FIG. 21 (e), No. 20 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) show No. 20 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 10.

In FIG. 20, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is indicated by the reference numeral "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display board 343B is arranged is represented by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display board 343C is arranged in the viewing position is represented by the code "C" or "C'". Will be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 In the state represented by "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, respectively, and the first rotating body. From 340a, the figure drawn on the first display board 343A and from the second rotating body 340b, the figure drawn on the third display board 343C correspond to a state in which the player can visually recognize them.

Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by reference numerals “A to C” to be second. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotating body 340a are illustrated with reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each is set to different values. In the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a having the number of teeth of the first gear 353 being 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 being 20 is rotated by 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 108 degrees. Is formed to do.

No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 21 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 20 in FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 21 (b), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees, there is a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees between the two rotating positions, but each rotating body 340a , 340b is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees from the direction perpendicular to the axis, and as a result, each second display plate of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are each arranged at the viewing position (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341. (That is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the rotation direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , It can be difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, since a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 4 and FIG. 21 (d), No. 20 in FIG. In the rotation in the section up to the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C in the visible position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body. The 340b is arranged at a position where its rotation position is displaced with respect to the first rotating body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. 9 and from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, FIG. No. 20 As shown in 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even in the section where the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed, the second rotation is performed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure will be combined in the third combination.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21 (a) of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22 (e) of FIG. 20). By repeating the embodiment two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. B "), a fifth combination (No. 12" B', C "in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, No. 20 in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. A "C"), an eighth combination (No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20) and a ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a plurality of gears (drive gears 351 to 355). It is formed as a gear train composed of the five gears), and is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

As a result, the rotation cycle of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified to reduce component costs and improve durability and reliability, but each gear is always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction.

Therefore, for example, the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which the table in FIG. 20 is advanced in the positive direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established) is formed. Then, after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. It is possible to repeat a series of operations of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20), whereby it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. When it is necessary to move the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), in addition to revealing the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is moved in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated once. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, when it is set to "1 / integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), but in the remaining 6 combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body It is allowed that a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of possible combinations of figures can be set to 9.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the drive motor 350 of 1, the number of possible combinations of the figures is set to 9, so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotating body 340a. And it is not achievable only by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotating body 340b as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, at the rotating position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of the effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) in which a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), FIG. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b to make them inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 22 (e), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotation position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b to make them inconspicuous.

As described above, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, each of the accommodating bodies 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are mounted on the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b can be promptly displayed at a required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the combination of nine sets of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1-rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging each accommodating body 300 in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. Can be done. As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotation position in advance without being recognized by the player, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing arrives, each accommodating body 300 is placed in an ascending position (see FIG. 8) and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are performed to promptly obtain the desired combination. Can be made to appear in.

It should be noted that the arrangement of each of the housing bodies 300 in the descending position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each of the contained bodies 300 is not arranged in the descending position, and each of them is not arranged. While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the descending position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. This makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated, so even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the descending position and become invisible to the player, at the time of the rotation. There is a possibility that the player may be made to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the time of the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to mix in the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

As the operating means, for example, a payout device 133, a voice output device 226, or a ball launching unit 112a (all of which see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is exemplified. In the state where these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated due to the payout of the ball, the output of voice, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

In addition, instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b You may try to rotate in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, so that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation can be made accordingly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in front of the base body 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210 and the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base end side is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the cover body 420 and the base body 410, and which are arranged in a posture facing the tip side, and them. It mainly includes a first member 440 in which the tip ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

The base body 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the cover body 420 is partially arranged (covered) at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the facing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotational shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are recessed at positions coaxial with each other. Will be set up.

Further, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 453, which will be described later, of the transmission mechanism is projected from the front surface of the base body 410. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming out of the shaft 412. ..

A notch 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 to secure a space for allowing the rotation of the arm body 430. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 over a predetermined angle can be regulated by bringing the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430. Is formed in. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to exert a function as a stopper that restricts the rotation of the arm member 420 by a predetermined angle or more.

A rotating body 413 is arranged at the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotating body 413 is a member rotatably formed by a driving force of a drive motor (not shown), and when the first member 440 is arranged in an ascending position (see FIG. 31 (a)), the first member 440 becomes a member. When the first member 440 is placed in the descending position (FIG. 31 (c)) while being shielded and invisible to the player, the game is arranged vertically above the first member 440. It is visible to the person.

The arm body 430 is a long rod-shaped body formed by bending in a substantially square shape in front view, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotary shaft 431 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and is coaxially projected from the front surface and the back surface of the arm body 430 on the base end side, respectively. Will be done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in a manner in which the tip end side is moved up and down in the vertical direction with the rotation shaft 431 as the rotation center.

The driven groove 432 is a portion through which the eccentric pin 454 described later of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is a linear (front view long hole) extending from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotation shaft 431. Shape) formed as an opening. As will be described later, the eccentric pin 454 is slid along the driven groove 432 with the rotation of the crank gear 453, so that the arm body 430 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431.

The connecting pin 433 is a rod-shaped body projecting from the front on the tip end side of the arm body 430, and is slidably inserted along a sliding groove 441a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. The arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected so as to be relatively movable via the connecting pin 433.

As will be described later, a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430. Is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off from the sliding groove 441a. Further, the arm body 430 is provided with a rotating body 434 in front of the arm body 430 at a position opposite to the driven groove 432 with the bent portion interposed therebetween. The rotating body 434 is rotatably formed by the driving force of the drive motor 435 arranged on the back surface side of the arm body 430.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 located eccentrically from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

The mounting plate 451 is arranged in front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is housed between the facing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 projects from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove. Regulate getting out.

According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment), the rotation driving force is transmitted to the crank gear 453. The eccentric pin 454 eccentric from the center of rotation of the crank gear 453 is displaced in the vertical direction in the front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed upward or downward by the eccentric pin 454 sliding on the driven groove 432, and is rotated around the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is relatively displaceably connected to the arm body 430 via the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independently connected to each other. By being rotated, as will be described later, it is possible to move in a mode in which a linear motion and a rotary motion are combined (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, a detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatable on the base 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back of the base 441, respectively, and the back of the base 441. Mainly, the arm member 444 to be arranged, the drive motor 445 that generates the driving force for rotating the arm member 444, and the crank member 446 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444. Be prepared.

The substrate 441 is a member forming the skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed in the shape of a circular plate when viewed from the front. A pair of sliding grooves 441a are formed in the substrate 441 with openings. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as a front view elongated hole-shaped opening extending linearly, and a pair is arranged non-parallel. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in an inverted C shape in front view, which is upwardly inclined from the center toward both ends in the front view of the substrate 441.

On the back surface of the substrate 441, a cylindrical tubular portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is projected. Will be done.

A connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the tubular portion 441b. That is, since the connecting pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 441b, the supporting area of the connecting pin 433 can be expanded by that amount, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. ..

The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed in a disk shape having a front view circular shape having substantially the same diameter as the substrate 441 and having a predetermined thickness dimension. The front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in this embodiment) are disposed inside the front body 442. Therefore, by making the plurality of light emitting means emit light (lighting or blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be emitted from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface toward the outside. As a result, the player can visually recognize the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) as if it is emitting light.

The front body 442 is arranged (fastened and fixed) on the base 441 after the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base 441 from the back surface side, and at least the tubular portion 441b of the base 441 is inserted into the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is attached (fastened and fixed), and the collar is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off from the substrate 441.

The arm member 444 is a long member having a diameter longer than that of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444a is a hole pivotally supported by the shaft 441a of the front body 441, and is formed at a position centered in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending below the shafted support hole 444a at right angles to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. It is formed as an opening (in the shape of a long hole in the front view).

The arm member 444 is rotatably supported by a shaft 441a between the facing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back surface body 443 in a posture in which both end portions thereof project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23), and will be described later. As the crank member 446 rotates, the eccentric pin 446b slides along the driven groove 444b, so that the eccentric pin 446 is rotated around the shaft support hole 444b.

The crank member 446 is a member arranged between the facing surfaces of the substrate 441 and the back surface body 443, and is a rotation main body 446a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445 and a rotation center of the rotation main body 446a (drive motor 445). It is provided with an eccentric pin 446b located eccentrically from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446b is projected from the front surface of the rotating body 446a and is inserted into the driven groove 444b of the arm member 444.

When the rotating body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus of a predetermined radius. As a result, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled to the left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the rotation of a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment) is alternately repeated in the forward and reverse directions. The arm member 444 is rotated around (axis 441c) as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

As a result, as will be described later, the movement of the arm member 444 can be visually recognized by the player in a manner in which both end portions of the arm member 444 protruding from both sides of the front body 442 to the left and right are alternately reciprocated up and down. .. Further, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, the reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is caused to act on the base body 441 and the front body 442, as described later, with respect to the arm body 430. The movement of the front body 442 to be relatively displaced can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29. A pair of left-right rotation units 500 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6), and the pair of left-right rotation units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for, since they are formed with substantially the same configuration, only one (the one arranged on the left side when viewed from the front) will be described, and the explanation of the other will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a front view of the left-right rotation unit 500. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left-right rotation unit 500 is arranged in front of the front-view rectangular rear base 511, the front base 512 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 511, and the front base 513. A cover body 513 to be provided, a drive motor 520 arranged on the back side of the back base 511, and a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

On the facing surfaces of the rear base 511 and the cover body 513, the shaft support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at positions where they are coaxial. Will be set up. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotation shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted and an opening 512b through which the eccentric pin 542 of the crank gear 540 described later of the transmission mechanism is inserted.

The displacement member 530 is a member with a blade-shaped decoration on the front surface, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotary shaft 531 is a shaft pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511a and 513a of the rear base 511 and the cover body 513, and is the front surface and the back surface on the base end side (lower side of FIG. 29) of the displacement member 530. It is projected coaxially from each. The displacement member 530 can rotate about the rotation axis 531 between the retracted position overlapping the front base 512 and the overhanging position protruding toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210 in the front view. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

The driven hole 432 is a hole in which the connecting pin 552 of the link member 550, which will be described later, of the transmission mechanism is rotatably supported, and is recessed at a position separated from the rotating shaft 531 toward the tip end side by a predetermined distance. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, so that the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. It mainly includes a crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530.

The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is projected toward the front at a position eccentric from the center of rotation thereof. The link member 550 is a rod-shaped body disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530, and the connecting hole 551 is recessed in the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. The connecting pin 552 is projected from the front of the above.

The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably pivotally supported in the connecting hole 551 of the link member 550 via the opening 512b of the front base 512, and the connecting pin 552 of the link member 550 is a driven hole of the displacement member 530. It is rotatably supported by 532. As a result, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550 to form a crank mechanism.

According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), the rotational driving force thereof is transmitted. The eccentric pin 541 eccentric from the center of rotation of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. As a result, the displacement member 530 is rotated between the retracted position and the overhanging position described above with the rotation shaft 431 as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 41. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the pair of arm bodies 430 located on the left side (left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front, respectively. It is referred to as a "left" arm body 430 and a "right" arm body 430.

31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 31 (a) is in the ascending position, and FIG. 31 (b) is the ascending position and the descending position. FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state of being arranged in between and the state of being arranged in the descending position.

32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 32 (a) is FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) is FIG. 31 (b). 32 (c) corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG. 31 (c), respectively.

It should be noted that FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c) correspond to a cross-sectional view in which the back surface of the first member 440 is visually recognized by cutting in a plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. Further, while the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically shown by using a two-dot chain line, the rear body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 35, 36, 38, and 40, which will be described later, and the description thereof will be omitted below.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing up the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) upward. The posture is set and the first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is located close to the end (hereinafter referred to as "outer end") of each sliding groove 441a on the side close to the radial outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

From the states shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), when the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is driven by the driven groove 432. While sliding, push down the left and right arm bodies 430 respectively.

As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated around the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Be displaced. From this state, when each crank gear 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, and are shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). As such, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) downward. The posture is set so that the first member 440 is located at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Further, above the first member 440, the rotating body 413 is visibly exposed to the player.

Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is located close to the end (hereinafter referred to as "inner end") of each sliding groove 441a on the side near the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In this embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end in the descending position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the ascending position.

As a result, as will be described later, when the first member 440 is displaced relative to the arm member 430 by utilizing the action of inertia or the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the descending position is obtained. The relative displacement amount in can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven in the directions opposite to those described above from the states (lowering positions) shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), the rotation of each crank gear 453 is accompanied by the rotation of the pair of drive motors 450. The eccentric pin 454 slides the driven groove 432 and pushes up the left and right arm bodies 430, respectively, thereby finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit. 400 is placed in the ascending position.

In this way, according to the central floating unit 400, the first member 440 can be moved up and down between the ascending position and the lowering position. However, in the above operation described as an example of raising and lowering the first member 440, the first member 440 moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position, and the first member 440 thereof. There is little change in the movement of.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the tip side (connecting pin 433) of each of the left and right arm bodies 430 is first. Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the mode of rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430. can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

33 (a) to 33 (c) and 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) is in a state of being arranged in an ascending position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged between the ascending and descending positions, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged in the descending position. Corresponds to each state.

35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) are views. Corresponding to the rear sectional views of the central floating unit 400 in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c), FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are the centers in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Corresponds to each of the cross-sectional rear views of the floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), from the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven to drive the tip side. (Connecting pin 433) rotates the right arm body 430 toward the downward rotation direction (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as "downward rotation").

Due to the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 (on the left side in FIG. 35 (a)) pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, whereby FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. As shown in 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) into a downward-sloping posture.

Here, the left arm body 430 in the stopped state (right side in FIG. 35A) is located between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the sliding groove 441a at the raised position as shown in FIG. 237 (a). A predetermined gap is formed in. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder (lowering the left shoulder in FIG. 35B), the sliding groove 441a to which the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected is connected. The inclination of the first member 440 becomes steeper, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged in a direction that allows the movement (fall) of the first member 440 due to the action of gravity. ..

Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the ascending position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 is moved to the right arm body 430 up to a predetermined rotation position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 is brought into the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b) by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be placed.

That is, the first member 440, which has been driven downward by the right arm body 430 until the right arm body 430 reaches a predetermined rotation position, is on the right after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of being driven by the downward rotation of the arm body 430, it can be rapidly displaced downward by free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 (on the left side in FIG. 35 (b)) slides. By further pushing the moving groove 441a downward, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), the posture of the first member 40 with the right shoulder lowered can be changed (tilted) to a steeper angle. ..

In this case, since the left arm body 430 (on the right side in FIG. 35B) is in the stopped state and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a, the connecting pin 433 (FIG. 35). In (b), the first member 440 can be rotated around the right side as the center of rotation, and as the right arm body 430 rotates downward, the first member 440 is viewed from the left arm body 430 side (in front view). It is possible to form a state of being pushed into (left side of FIG. 33).

That is, in the process from the ascending position in FIG. 33 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational movement in the direction of downward movement to the right (clockwise in Fig. 33), and a linear movement to the left (to the left in Fig. 33) can be used for displacement. It can change the movement.

When the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c) are reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is also located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the arm body 430 on the left side (left side in FIG. 33C) is then rotated downward.

Due to the downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 (on the right side in FIG. 35 (c)) pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, whereby FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from a downward-sloping posture to a horizontal posture.

In an example of the operation described here, from the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (a), the left arm body 430 is further lowered to a position restricted by the notch portion 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 on the left (right side in FIG. 36 (a)) pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, which is contrary to the case described above (see FIG. 33) in FIG. 34 (see FIG. 33). As shown in b) and FIG. 36 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) into a posture of lowering the left shoulder.

When the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b) are reached, the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowermost position, and further downward rotation is restricted. Next, the arm body 430 on the right side (left side in FIG. 34 (b)) is rotated downward to a position restricted by the notch portion 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the posture of lowering the left shoulder to the horizontal posture and is arranged at the lowermost position. Can be done. That is, it is arranged in the descending position.

As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the tip ends (connected) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently from each other to move linearly to the first member 440. It is possible to give a change to the movement by making it possible to give a movement that is a combination of the motion and the rotational motion.

In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420 on the proximal end side (rotating shaft 431) and are rotated around the proximal end side, so that the left and right arm bodies are rotated. Each of the tip sides (connecting pin 433) of the 430 can be moved along an arcuate locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are linearly slid and displaced, it is possible to impart a motion that is a more complicated combination of linear motion and rotational motion to the first member 440, resulting in a larger change. Can be given to that movement.

Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged in the ascending position or the descending position is inertial with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. It can be displaced relative to (the action of inertia). The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement at the descending position as an example.

37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the descending position, and in FIG. 37 (a), the state where the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. 37 (a). In b) and FIG. 37 (c), the state in which the first member 440 is swayed from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a) to the left and right is shown.

38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) are FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged in the descending position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 has each sliding groove of the first member 440. It is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of 441a. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be allowed by the above-mentioned gap.

For example, by displacing (rotating) one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 at a predetermined speed and then stopping the arm body 430, the inertial force generated by the stoppage is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 has each. It is possible to form a displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by inertia (action of inertia). Can and can change its movement.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed linearly and are arranged in a non-parallel manner, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and the second When one member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (action of inertia), a rotation component can be added to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by a combination of linear motion and rotational motion as well as linear motion, and as a result, the motion of the first member 440 is changed. Can be given.

Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a straight line, resistance is generated when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a due to the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. As a result, the displacement of the first member 440 due to the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load of each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially C shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges and stops, the first member is in the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the first member 440 from rattling with respect to the arm body 430 in a state where the central floating unit 400 is retracted to the ascending position and stands by by performing an effect by another unit or a display device. .. As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right by inertia (action of inertia) after the arm body 430 is stopped, the first member maintains the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position. It is not possible with a structure that only moves linearly while doing so (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be displaced independently), and the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently as in the present embodiment. It was made possible for the first time by making it possible. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

That is, in the structure (conventional product) in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position, even if the arm body is stopped, it acts on the first member with the stop. The inertial force that is applied cannot be a trigger to reciprocate (sway) the first member from side to side.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture, one arm body 430 remains in the stopped state and only the other arm body 430 is displaced (rotated). Since one member 440 can be placed in a reference position (for example, a descending position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force accompanying the stop of the other arm body 430 reciprocates (rolls) the first member 440 from side to side. ) Can be a trigger. As a result, the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be reliably generated, and the amplitude of the reciprocating movement to the left and right can be increased.

Here, the descending position has been described as an example of a position where the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by inertia (inertia) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, but it is understood from the above configuration. As you can, it is possible in other locations. That is, as long as there is a gap between the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of each connecting pin 433 and the first member 440 in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped. It may be in the position of. Therefore, it is possible to generate a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left or right at an arbitrary position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

Next, the operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 to the left and right by utilizing the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, even after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right due to the above-mentioned inertia (inertia action) has converged, the first member 440 is still attached to the left and right arm bodies 430. Can be reciprocated from side to side without rotating.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the descending position, and in FIG. 39 (a), the state where the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. 39 (a). In b) and FIG. 39 (c), a state in which the first member 440 is laterally swayed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) is shown.

40 (a) to 40 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are shown in FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being arranged in the descending position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is the first member 440 as described above. It is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of each of the sliding grooves 441a. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be allowed by the above-mentioned gap.

That is, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base 441 of the first member 440, the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated) by the driving force of the drive motor 445, and the reaction force is transferred to the base 441. It can act, and by the action of the reaction force, each connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members are stopped. From the state where the 444 is located in the neutral position, as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in front view, and the reaction force acts on the arm member 444. As a result, the substrate 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view, and the arm member 444 is counterclockwise in the front view as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c). Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

As a result, the substrate 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) left and right, and the movement can be changed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the base member 441 and is rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445. Therefore, the arm member 444 is displaced due to the displacement of the arm member 444. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the substrate 441 and the front body 442 in the rotational direction. As a result, it is possible to easily generate a rotation component in the movement of the substrate 441 and the front body 442.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the axis 441c of the base 441) is located at the center of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 in the left-right direction. The force can be easily connected to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (base 441 and front body 442).

Here, the descending position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by the reaction force at the time of rotation of the arm member 444, but as can be understood from the above configuration, other It is also possible in position. That is, as long as there is a gap between the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of each connecting pin 433 and the first member 440 in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped. It may be in the position of. Therefore, it is possible to generate a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left or right at an arbitrary position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

Here, a sensation device for detecting the posture of the first member 440 may be provided, and control may be performed to change the rotational state of the arm member 444 based on the detection result of the sensor device. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged, or the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) from side to side.

For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) to the left and right with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). (See FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocating movement of the base 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). Acts in a direction that cancels the movement of the substrate 441 and the front body 442). As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

Alternatively, from a state in which the movement of the first member 440 converges and stops, or a state in which the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) to the left or right due to inertia (action of inertia), the first member 440 The arm member 444 is rotated so as to reciprocate or reciprocate the base 441 and the front body 442 (the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is used to amplify the movement of the base 441 and the front body 442). To act on). As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right, and the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be changed according to the rotational state of the arm member 444.

The sensor is an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor) that is arranged on a portion (for example, a base 441, a front body 442, a back body 443, etc.) other than the arm member 444 of the first member 440 and detects acceleration in three directions thereof. , Capacitance type, piezo type, etc.), distance sensor for detecting the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440 (for example, triangular ranging type, time of flight type, etc.) and the like are exemplified. The distance sensor is provided at at least two locations and is configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

Next, the cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

41 (a) is a front view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 41 (c) is a top view. It is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 in the XLIc-XLIc line of FIG. 41 (b).

It should be noted that FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c) show a state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position and the left-right rotating unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position. Further, in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512 and the cover bodies 420, 513 are omitted. Only the main configurations required for explanation are shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left-right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position while the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be in contact with a pair of tubular portions 441b erected on the back surface of the substrate 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be regulated.

For example, when the central floating unit 400 arranged in the ascending position is arranged in the descending position by rotating the left and right arm bodies 430 downward, at the same time, the left and right rotating unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position and the first By abutting the displacement member 530 on the member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right due to inertia (action of inertia) as described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38). It can be regulated to be rolled).

Alternatively, when the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is displaced (rotated), the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the first member is caused by the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444. It is possible to restrict the members (base 441 and front body 442) from reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right, whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm depends on the arrangement position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. , A mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

Next, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, the relationship between the left and right sensor device 600 and the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are the XLIIb-XLIIb line and FIG. 43 (a) of FIG. 42 (a). It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of a). 42 shows a state in which the first member 440 is arranged in an ascending position, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the first member 440 is arranged in a descending position.

In addition, in FIGS. 42 and 43, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the back case 210, the first member 440, and the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are shown, and the other configurations are omitted. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 42 and 43, the path of the light irradiated from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of the light irradiated to the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by using a two-dot chain line. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45, which will be described later, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left and right sensor device 600 detects the player's fingers in front of the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquires the presence / absence (existence) and position, or the operation direction and operation speed. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Will be set up.

The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of the light irradiated to the plate glass 16a are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42 (a)). (Left and right direction) The light emitting part is arranged in an inclined posture toward the inside so as to have an overlap in the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are placed at positions deeper in the width direction (positions outside the width direction) than the inner edges of the openings of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be arranged so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

In this case, it is in front of the plate glass 16a (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), lower side in FIG. 42 (b)) and diagonally in front of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion). ), The light emitted from the light emitting portion and transmitted through the plate glass 16a is reflected by the player's fingers, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving portion. The presence of a person's fingers is detected.

The left and right sensor device 600 arranges the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 on the left and right, and can perform detection at two places in front of the plate glass 16a (regions corresponding to the irradiation regions S1 and S2, respectively). Therefore, based on the detection results of both sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (whether it is located in front of the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2) and the operation direction (from the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). The direction toward or vice versa) or the operating speed (speed when crossing between the irradiation regions S1 and S2) can be detected.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor devices 600 (first sensor 610 and second sensor 620) is set so as to overlap the moving region of the first member 440. Will be done. That is, the first member 440 is formed so as to be displaceable to a position where it overlaps at least a part of the detection region (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the plate glass 16a) of the left and right sensor devices.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the first member 440 is in front of the plate glass 16a (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 43 (a) and the lower side in FIG. 43 (b)). , A region diagonally forward of the irradiation region S1 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) (hereinafter referred to as “detection region of the first sensor 610”) and the front of the plate glass 16a. Therefore, it is displaced to a position that separates the region (hereinafter referred to as "detection region of the second sensor 620") in the diagonally front of the irradiation region S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

As a result, the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated in front of the flat glass 16a. Therefore, it is surely avoided that the second sensor 620 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the first sensor 610 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the second sensor 620. can.

Therefore, for example, an effect of allowing the player to make an alternative choice (for example, two locations on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (positions corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed in two locations corresponding to the detection area of the player, and the player brings his / her finger close to one of the two regions (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Therefore, when performing an effect of selecting either one, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be improved.

Further, as described above, the central floating unit 400 is formed so that the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 can be relatively displaced to the first member 440 (base 441). The first member 440 can be moved up and down linearly along the vertical direction, and the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) from side to side (see FIG. 39). Further, the stop position of the first member 440 can be biased to either one of the left and right directions (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

Thereby, the size of at least one or both of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the first member 440. Therefore, for example, in response to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is made to move his / her finger to search for a position (detection area) in which the finger is detected. It is possible to perform the production.

Further, for example, since the first member 440 can shield one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 to make it undetectable, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Despite the display instructing the player to select the selection target by hand, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas and interferes with the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, by shielding one of the detection areas by the first member 440, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying an instruction for urging the player to select the other on the third symbol display device 81.

44 (a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 in the XLIVb-XLIVb line of FIG. 44 (a).

As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are disposed therein, and the plurality of light emitting means (lighting or lighting) are emitted. By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated outward from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface. As a result, the player can visually recognize the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) as if it is emitting light.

In this case, when the light emitted outward from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, it is incident. False detection is caused by the interference between the emitted light and the light emitted from the light emitting unit and the direct reception of the incident light by the light receiving unit.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light radiated to the outside from the front body 442 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded (a position crossing a virtual line (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B) connecting the front body 442 and each of the sensors 610 and 620, hereinafter referred to as a “shielding position”). Is formed in. Therefore, when the light emitting means of the front body 442 emits light, the displacement member 530 is displaced to the shielding position, so that the sensors 610 and 620 can be shielded from the light emitted from the light emitting means by the displacement member 530. As a result, erroneous detection of each sensor 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

Further, by making the displacement member 530 also serve as a means for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the permanent shielding member can be used. It is not necessary to provide it, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, so that a space can be secured as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between the ascending position and the descending position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), depending on the displacement position of the first member 440. The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed in a shielded position. That is, the displacement member 530 can be made to follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevation position) of the first member 440.

That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to cover the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for the arrangement of the shielding member. However, if the displacement member 530 is used, Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevation position), the displacement member 530 can be miniaturized. Therefore, since the permanent shielding member can be eliminated, not only the component cost can be reduced and the space can be secured, but also the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530 can be reduced.

Next, the relationship between the left-right sensor device 600 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 45.

45 (a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a).

As shown in FIG. 45, in the left-right rotation unit 500, the left and right displacement members 530 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) between the retracted position (see FIG. 7) and the overhanging position (see FIG. 8). Where a sensor (not shown) for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are arranged at the retracted position and the extended position is provided, the left and right displacement members 530 are located between the retracted position and the extended position. At an intermediate position (predetermined position), they are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620.

The left-right sensor device 600 is formed so that the displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 can be independently detected by the sensors 610 and 620 that the displacement members 530 are arranged at intermediate positions (predetermined positions). Thereby, the means for detecting the presence / absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the flat glass 16a and the means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position are provided in the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is arranged at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The position where each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is detected by the sensors 610 and 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be an overhanging position instead of an intermediate position. It is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method of detecting dirt D on the flat glass 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). In FIG. 46, the path of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated by using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 42 (a), the object F existing in the detection region of the first sensor 610, and in FIG. 42 (b), the stain D adhering to the irradiation region S1 (see FIG. 42 (a)), respectively. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), for example, when the object F (player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), it is irradiated from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610. The light is transmitted through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, then reflected by the object F, and is received by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the outward path. As a result, the presence of the player's fingers is detected by the first sensor 610.

In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, the game board 13 It is possible to dispose of these sensors at positions deeper in the width direction (positions outside the width direction) than the inner edge of the opening with the opening in between (see FIG. 6), and these sensors 610 and 620 can be visually recognized by the player. It can be difficult to do.

However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a become close to parallel). Therefore, if dirt D (for example, oil from a player's hand) is attached to the plate glass 16a, the dirt D reflects light in a direction different from the outward path, and the reflected light is reflected by the first sensor 610. It is not possible to receive light from the light receiving part of. Therefore, the presence or absence of dirt D adhering to the plate glass 16a cannot be detected by the first sensor 610.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward, the irradiation region S1 of the plate glass 16a is contaminated. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, whereby the dirt D on the irradiation region S1 on the plate glass 16a The presence or absence of adhesion can be detected. The presence or absence of dirt D in the irradiation region S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620 is detected by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610.

That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S1 and is received by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620. If this is not the case, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation region S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S2, and the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610 deposits the light. When no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S2.

Here, it is preferable that the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 detect the presence or absence of dirt D on the flat glass 16a in the process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since the player has not entered the store, the object F (player's finger) does not exist in front of the flat glass 16a (detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, a threshold value is set for the time required from light emission to light reception based on the difference between the object F and the dirt D (for example, the path length when the object is reflected and the path length when the object is reflected by the dirt D). This is because it is not necessary to perform (providing), and the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a can be improved accordingly.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XLVIIb of FIG. 47 (a). Note that FIG. 47 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

In the first embodiment, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism, but the transmission in the second embodiment has been described. The mechanism is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be intermittently transmitted to the second rotating body 340b. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (d), the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is sequentially meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 thereof. It includes a gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

The first gear 2353 differs only in the number of teeth from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. The number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 differs only in the thickness dimension from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and has two gears (the first side intermediate gear 2354a and the second side intermediate gear 2354b) in the axial direction (FIG. 47). (B) Concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction) and formed as an integrated member.

The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can be meshed with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (first rotating body 340a) is being rotated, the intermediate gear 2354 (first side intermediate gear 2354a and second side intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The rotation. The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is set to 21.

The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 2354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is omitted. Specifically, in the second side intermediate gear 2354b, a non-toothed region, which is a region where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and a region remaining in the non-toothed region (that is, 14 teeth are peripheral). A toothed region, which is a region continuous in the direction), is formed.

In the non-engagement region of the second intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth are omitted (removed) and the teeth of the second gear 2355 cannot be meshed with each other. It is blocked. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth of the second gear 2355 can be meshed with each other, and the rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

In this case, the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth with respect to the first side intermediate gear 2354a in which the number of teeth is set to 21. Since the central angle is 120 degrees and the tooth alignment region is the region corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, the central angle is 240 degrees.

Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in the section corresponding to the non-engagement region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-engaged, and is stopped with the second side intermediate gear 2354b. It is rotated in the section corresponding to the starting area where the second gear 2355 is engaged. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 48 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In addition, FIGS. 49 and 50 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 49. From (a) to FIG. 49 (e), No. 48 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (d) show No. 48 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 9.

In addition, in FIGS. 48 to 50, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are rotated by the second rotation using the reference numerals “A to C”. The first display board 343A to the third display board 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by using the reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, a state in which the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions (states shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49 (a) of FIG. 48). ) Is hereinafter referred to as "initial state". In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set at the boundary position on one side between the meshed region and the non-engaged region (the end of the meshed region and the beginning of the non-engaged region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 49 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 48 in FIG. 48). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has an intermediate gear 2354 (the first). Due to the action of the non-engaged region in the 2 side intermediate gear 2354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the stopped state is maintained.

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visual position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "A', B" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 48. 2 and in the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and along with this, the intermediate gear 2354 is also 120. Since it is rotated by a degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at the boundary position on the other side between the meshed region and the non-engaged region (the beginning of the meshed region and the end of the non-engaged region). Will be done.

No. 48 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing region (the region of 120 degrees in the first half of the central angle of 240 degrees) in the intermediate gear 2354b).

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 3 and FIG. 49 (c), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 3 "B', C" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

No. 48 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is placed in the visible position from the state shown in 3 and FIG. 49 (c), the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing region (the region of 120 degrees in the latter half of the central angle of 240 degrees) in the intermediate gear 2354b).

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a fourth combination (No. 4 “C', A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 48. In the state shown in 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and the intermediate gear 2354 is also 360 degrees accordingly. Since it is rotated by a degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at the boundary position on one side between the meshed region and the non-engaged region (the end of the meshed region and the beginning of the non-engaged region). Will be done.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49 (a) of FIG. 48 to the state shown in No. 3 and FIG. 49 (c) of FIG. 48). By repeating the embodiment two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 48 in FIG. 4-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .5 "C', B") and a sixth combination (No. 6 "A', C" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

In addition, No. 48 in FIG. 7-No. In the section of the state shown in 9, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .7 "B', A"), forming the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) and the ninth combination (No. 9 "C', C" in FIG. 48). be able to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears. The gear 1 (intermediate gear 2354) has a meshing region that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) to transmit rotation, and the gear 1 is non-geared with the mating gear to block the transmission of rotation. A non-gated area is formed.

As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, nine sets of combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, can be formed with only one drive motor 350, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to effectively produce the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the cost of parts.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and the stop of the second rotating body 340b can be released to restart the rotation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the second rotating body 340b.

Further, since the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment has no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction. Therefore, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 48) is formed, the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) appears. In this case, the table of FIG. 48 is advanced in the forward direction (downward of FIG. 48) to reveal the eighth combination, and the table of FIG. 48 is advanced in the reverse direction (upward of FIG. 48). It is also possible to make the ninth combination appear.

As a result, as in the former case, No. 48 in FIG. 48. No. 7 to No. In the transition to 8, only the first rotating body 340a is rotated with the second rotating body 340b stopped, and the eighth combination (No. 8 “B', B” in FIG. 48) appears. (That is, while "B'" has already appeared on one side, the other side is switched from "A" to "B" to make "B', B" appear) and the latter As in the case, No. 48 in FIG. No. 9 to No. In the transition to 8, both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 “B', B” in FIG. 48) (that is, one of them). And both of the other figures are switched to make "B', B" appear), and the effect can be arbitrarily selected and executed according to the game state.

Further, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated twice. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the present embodiment, a non-engagement region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second side intermediate gear 2354b), and while the first rotating body 340a is rotated, the second rotating body 340b is rotated and stopped. Is switched, and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the spacing of a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each include the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees, they are non-toothed. The region formation range (central angle) is set to 120 degrees.

As a result, the phases of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b do not shift. Therefore, in the table shown in FIG. 48, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b is an element. The length can be shortened (the number of table stages can be reduced). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b required to bring out the desired combination of figures. That is, the time required to bring out the desired combination of figures can be shortened.

However, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set to be non-corresponding to the spacing of a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-engagement region is set to the range of the central angle of 108 degrees, the phase shift of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is caused as in the case of the first embodiment. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of figures (for example, 9 sets), and it is also possible to form a state in which the figures are not combined, so that the player can visually recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination is not established).

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. 51 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 51 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). Note that FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

In the second embodiment, the case where the intermediate gear 2354 has one non-engagement region and one tooth engagement region has been described, but the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment has the non-engagement region and the teeth. Two combined regions are formed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d), the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is sequentially meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 thereof. It includes a gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

The first gear 3353 differs only in the thickness dimension from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and has two gears (the first side intermediate gear 3354a and the second side intermediate gear 3354b) in the axial direction (FIG. 51). (B) Concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction) and formed as an integrated member.

The first side intermediate gear 3354a is formed with teeth that can be meshed with the teeth of the first gear 3353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 3353 (first rotating body 340a) is being rotated, the intermediate gear 3354 (first side intermediate gear 3354a and second side intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The rotation. The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is set to 35.

The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 3354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is omitted. Specifically, in the second side intermediate gear 3354b, the first non-engagement region X1 and the second non-engagement region X2, which are regions in which seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth thereof. From the first toothed area Y1 located between the toothed area X1 and the second non-toothed area X2, which is a region in which seven teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction, and the first toothed area Y1. A second toothed area Y2, which is located on the other side between the first toothed area X1 and the second non-toothed area X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees and is a region in which 14 teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction. And are formed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-engaged region X1 and the second non-engaged region X2, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is stopped while the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped. ) Can be rotated 120 degrees each.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

FIG. 52 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Further, FIGS. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 53. (A) to FIG. 53 (d) are shown in FIG. 52. In the state shown as 1 to 4, FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are shown in FIG. 52. Corresponds to the states shown as 5 and 6, respectively.

In addition, in FIGS. 52 to 54, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are rotated by the second rotation using the reference numerals “A to C”. The first display board 343A to the third display board 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by using the reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the initial state in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are set to the viewing positions, respectively. It is said to be in the placed state. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-matching region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first). (See FIG. 51 (a)).

No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 52 in FIG. 52). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has an intermediate gear 3354 (the first). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the first non-engagement region X1 in the second side intermediate gear 3354b), and the rotation is maintained in the stopped state.

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visual position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "A', B" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 2 and in the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly, with respect to the second gear 3355. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-engagement region X1 and the second meshing region Y2 (the start end of the second meshing region Y2, the end of the first non-engagement region X1). Be placed.

No. 52 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the first half of the 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 3 and FIG. 53 (c), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 3 "B', C" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

No. 52 in FIG. 3 and from the state shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the latter half of the 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a fourth combination (No. 4 “C', A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 4 and in the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly, with respect to the second gear 3355. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-matching region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the beginning of the second non-matching region). Will be done.

No. 52 in FIG. 4 and from the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the second non-engagement region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b), and the rotation is maintained in the stopped state.

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged in the visible position. As a result, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C', B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 5 and in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated by 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly. , The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-engagement region X2 and the first meshing region Y1 (the end of the second non-engagement region X, the first meshing). It is arranged in the starting end of the region Y1).

No. 52 in FIG. 5 and from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b arranges the first display plate 343A in the visible position. As a result, the sixth combination (No. 6 "A', C" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 6 and in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-matching region X1 (the first meshing region Y1). It is set at the end (the end, the start of the first non-engagement region X1) (see FIG. 53 (a)).

Therefore, thereafter, it is substantially the same as the above-mentioned embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 53 (a) of FIG. 52 to the state shown in No. 6 and FIG. 54 (b) of FIG. 52). The same embodiment is repeated. As a result, nine sets of combinations can be formed in one cycle (a round from the start point to the end point of the table). In this embodiment, the number of stages of the table in one cycle is 15.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears. The gear 1 (intermediate gear 3354) has a gear meshing region (first and second gear meshing regions Y1 and Y2) that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 3355) to transmit rotation, and the mating gear. Non-engaged regions (first and second non-engaged regions Y1 and Y2) that are non-engaged with respect to the gear and block the transmission of rotation are formed.

As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, nine sets of combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, can be formed with only one drive motor 350, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to effectively produce the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the cost of parts.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-engaged regions (first and second non-engaged regions X1 and X2) that block the transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. It is distributed and arranged, and the dentate region and the non-dental region are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, No. 52 in FIG. No. 4 to No. As shown in 7, the stop of rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be made continuous by two kinds of figures. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Further, since the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment has no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 52 is referred to as No. No. 4 to No. By switching the traveling direction between forward and reverse, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the rotation speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b differently.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in the direction of arrow LVb of FIG. 55 (a). Further, FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). In addition, in FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only the main configuration necessary for explanation is shown.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described, but the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment have been described. The 4449 is formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the central floating unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment, sliding grooves 4439 are formed on the distal end sides of each of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and they are formed. A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted through each sliding groove 4439 are projected from the back surface of the first member 4440.

The sliding groove 4439 is formed as a linearly extending long hole-shaped opening, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that can slide along the sliding groove 441a. The arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected so as to be relatively movable via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449. A collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a stopper.

As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 in the present embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are provided by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. In the structure for connecting the arms, the connecting pin 4449 is projected from the first member 4440 to form the sliding groove 4439 on the pair of arm bodies 4430. Therefore, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm bodies 4430, The direction (inclination angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left or right by inertia (action of inertia) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), or the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). ), When the first member 4440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left or right by the action of the reaction force (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to form a pair. By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially C shape, the rotation component can be applied as described above, so that the first member 440 can be attached to the first member 440. Not only linear motion but also linear motion combined with rotary motion can be reciprocated (rolling) from side to side.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle (opposite angle of the letter “H) between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is adjusted). As a result, the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (reducing the facing angle of the letter "H"), the rotational component is increased, and the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (rolling). The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the facing angle of the letter "H"), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (rolling). The rate of linear motion can be increased.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, so that the rotation component is not generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. It is possible to make the reciprocating movement (rolling) of the above only by linear motion. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the first member 4440 moves horizontally in the left-right direction.

In this way, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right (a mode including a rotation component and a mode including a rotation component). However, it is not possible to achieve both of the aspects of the linear component only) in the first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base 441), and the arm body 4430 This was possible for the first time by forming a sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, the movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

Next, the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are central floating units 400. It is a cross-sectional rear view of the left-right rotation unit 5500.

Note that FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) correspond to FIG. 41 (c). Further, in FIGS. 56 and 57, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512 and the cover bodies 420, 513 are omitted, and the main parts necessary for explanation are omitted. Only the configuration is shown.

The left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged at a lower position than the left-right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left-right rotation unit 5500 is arranged in the overhanging position while the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 5500 causes the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( The pair of tubular portions 441b erected on the back surface of the substrate 441) can be pushed downward.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the overhanging positions while the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position (one is stretched). The first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) from side to side (rolling) by repeating the operation of slightly retracting the other from the overhanging position while arranging the other in the protruding position).

In this case, the operation of alternately arranging the left and right displacement members 530 at the overhanging position, the operation of retreating from the overhanging position, and the operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so as to be interlocked (synchronized) with. The first member 440 and the left and right displacement members 530 can be interlocked to form a movement that swings up, down, left, and right, and the player can recognize a large movement with a sense of unity.

Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 is made to collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision causes the first member 440 to reciprocate (roll) to the left and right, and is predetermined. After the lapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then be made to collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b) so that the first member 440 is continuously reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right. The reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be emphasized and recognized by the player.

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is attached to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped upward or downward. Not only the form of reciprocating to the left and right, but also the form of reciprocating the first member 440 to the left and right by using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without utilizing the inertial force caused by the displacement of the arm body 430. Can also be formed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the figures on the three surfaces are provided. The case where the player is visually recognized by combining the above is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number n of the display surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the number of faces m of the display surface of the second rotating body 340b are different. It may be set to a different value.

In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a drive gear 351 and a transmission gear 352, and a first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gear 355 are used. , 2355, 3355 may be formed so as to include at least.

For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 are arranged on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 are placed on the second rotating body 340b in a state in which the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 can be meshed with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354. The structure in which the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gear 355, 2355, 3355 is exemplified. According to such a structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the base 331 is provided with the reflecting portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion forming the back surface of the accommodating body 330 (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reflective portion RF may be arranged in other portions. As another portion, the inner surface of the portion of the substrate 331 that forms the upper surface or the lower surface of the housing 330 is exemplified. Since each of these surfaces faces the outer peripheral surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is sent to the player. It can be reflected so that it can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflection is accompanied by the rotation. The gap (distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 18B) between each inner surface of the substrate 441 on which the plate RF is arranged and the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b can be increased or decreased, and the reflector RF can be used. The facing angle of each of the display plates 343A to 343C of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b with respect to each inner surface of the arranged substrate 441 can be changed. Thereby, the mode of the reflected light can be changed for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmitting portion PN as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body elevating unit 300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is orthogonal to each other. It may be something to do. Thereby, for example, the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b can be displaced (moved) to the player in the directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, it is preferable that the display plates 344A to 344C are formed on a square in front view. This is because when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged side by side, a sense of unity of the figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces can be formed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b) arranged in one accommodating body 330 in the rotating body elevating unit 300 is two has been described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number may be three or more.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the case where the base end side of the left and right arm bodies 430 is rotatably supported by the base body 410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, left and right. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed so as to be slidably displaceable with respect to the base body 410. Since the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced independently even by the slide displacement, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of each of the above embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) or have an inertial force. The case where the first member 440 is relatively displaceable with respect to the arm member 430 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are relative to each other. The displaceably connected structure may be another structure.

As another structure, for example, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, a rubber-like elastic body, urethane, a metal coil spring / torsion spring, a leaf spring, etc.). A structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are rotatably connected by a shaft and a shaft hole, and the relative displacement is caused by the rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. A structure that enables relative displacement by connecting the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 with a spherical ball and a stud that comes into spherical contact with the ball, and by rotating the ball with respect to the stud. An example is a structure in which the tip of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms to enable relative displacement by deformation of the link mechanism, a structure in which some or all of them are combined, and the like. To.

In each of the above embodiments, the operation method when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position has been described, but each of these operating methods is an example, and it is naturally possible to adopt another operating method. .. Therefore, for example, in the operation methods shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, a part thereof may be replaced with another operation method.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, when the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left or right by inertia (inertia), the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 is formed to the left and right without making the player recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocating movement due to inertia is performed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being continued.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the arm member 444 has a symmetrical shape and the center of gravity thereof is located at the center in the left-right direction in the central floating unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm member 444 is not necessarily limited to this. The position of the center of gravity of the above may be eccentric to either side in the left-right direction. According to this, the reaction force acting on the substrate 441 with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocating movement (rolling) of the first member 440 to the left and right can be increased and can be changed.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500, 5500, the displacement member 530 is directly brought into contact with the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the substrate 441), whereby the movement of the first member 440 is caused. Although the case of restricting or causing the movement of the first member 440 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the substrate 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other. A similar operation may be formed so as to be feasible.

Specifically, a magnet is arranged on one of the first member 440 (the cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and on the other of the first member 440 (the cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is arranged and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member to move the first member 440. A structure that regulates or causes movement in the first member 440 is exemplified.

According to this, since the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the substrate 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent them from coming into contact with each other, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. When the iron member is arranged on the other side of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. , And the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440 is balanced so that the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530. Make contact.

<Regarding the control configuration>
Next, a first control example regarding the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 111.

<About the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 111. FIG. 58A is a diagram showing a frame button 22 and a touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a pressing portion pressed by the player, and the limit type switch is turned on when the pressing portion is pressed downward by a predetermined amount. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and even at the next monitoring timing (after 2 ms) determined to be “ON” from the “OFF” state. When it is determined to be "ON", it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the frame button 22 is mistakenly determined to have been pressed when the frame button 22 is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like. Further, when the frame button 22 is not continuously pressed, that is, the state is switched from the "ON" state to the "OFF" state, and it is determined to be "OFF" at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is pressed. Is determined to have been released.

The touch switch 290 is arranged close to the frame button 22 and the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor unit arranged substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and is configured to emit infrared rays from the sensor unit and turn on when the infrared rays hit an object and identify the reflected infrared rays. There is. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing his or her hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. In order to turn on the touch switch 290, the operation of bringing a hand or the like closer to the sensor unit is called operating the touch switch 290.

Further, as with the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and the state determined to be "OFF" is then changed to the "ON" state. Then, when it is further determined to be "ON", it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The characters "touch" are shown on the upper surface of the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 so that the player can easily recognize that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22, and is composed of a push switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 is composed of an upper selection switch 291a formed of an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b formed of a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is pressed and used by the player mainly when adjusting the volume. By pressing the upper selection switch 291a, the volume is set to be loud. Further, by pressing the lower selection switch 291b, the volume is set to be low. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is composed of a main symbol composed of characters and numbers, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol rows are scrolled in the X direction of the arrow (from right to left) with periodicity, and variable display is performed. In particular, in the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order.

Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the left, middle, and right columns for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The left column portion of this display area is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Will be done. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in this control example, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the middle row portion of this display area is the effective line L2, the right column portion is the effective line L3, and the diagonal line from the lower left to the upper right is the effective line L4. , The diagonal line from the upper left to the lower right is the effective line L5, and a total of five effective lines are configured. Even if the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, the jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

Although omitted in FIG. 59, the display area of the third symbol display device is provided with a sub display area in addition to the display area (main display area) on which the third symbol is displayed. The sub-display area is provided horizontally below the main display area, and is further divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area on the left side is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the other small areas. The area is an area for displaying the preview effect image.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in a small area of the sub-display area. In the small area, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is 4. Indicates that it is a sphere. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist.

Further, in this control example, the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 may be variably displayed as a symbol having only numbers attached to the symbol in the case of super reach or the like. The display area may be enlarged and the display area of the small display area may disappear. With this configuration, it is possible to display a fresh display mode to the player.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area, the reserved ball number is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect is executed. When the left / right selection effect is executed, the central floating unit 400 first covers the common area where the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area (detection area) S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap. Descent.

When the central floating unit 400 descends, the light emitted by the left and right sensor devices 600 is shielded by the lowered central floating unit 400, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. As a result, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the portion where the central floating unit 400 is lowered is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor devices, and the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 The irradiation area (detection area) is separated.

The contents to be selected by the player are displayed in the display areas corresponding to the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 divided in this way (in FIG. 60, the sunset background and the irradiation area are displayed in the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1). The starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). With this configuration, the player can see the display content displayed in the display area and make an arbitrary selection simply by touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. Further, the region where the irradiation region S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation region S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the region near the overlapping region are excluded from the irradiation region of the left and right sensor devices 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely separated, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the player's finger.

Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 of this control example and the descent control of the central floating unit 400, when the effect of only detecting whether or not the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, the effect is executed. Since the left and right sensor devices 600 are provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect the player's fingers in a wide area. When the effect of selecting either left or right by the player is executed, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can completely divide the irradiation area S1. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the player's finger. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage by constructing a detection situation suitable for each of the plurality of effects of detecting the player's fingers.

In this control example, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to realize the left / right selection effect by dividing the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 of the left / right sensor device 600, but the left and right are configured by using other configurations. The selection effect may be configured to be feasible. Another example of feasibly configuring the left-right selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

FIG. 60B is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect in another example is executed. In this alternative example, when the left / right selection process is executed, the central floating unit 400 is first lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, information is acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the central floating unit 400, and the position information of the central floating unit 400 is calculated.

Then, from the calculated position information, a predetermined display area not covered by the central floating unit 400 in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the left / right selection display area, and the left / right selection display area is left / right. Display the selection screen. Next, the left / right selection device 600 is changed so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left / right sensor device 600 overlap with the left / right selection screen.

According to the configuration of another example described above, the left and right selection displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 according to the movement of the variable member (central floating unit 400) covering the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to change the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left / right sensor device 600, there is an effect that the player's selection operation in the left / right selection effect can be reliably detected.

In this alternative example, a configuration is used in which the position of the variable member is calculated using an acceleration sensor, but the position is not limited to this, and the position of the variable member may be calculated from the execution status of a program that controls the drive of the variable member, for example. good.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect period (mode C) will be described. When 55 minutes have passed since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, a production that allows you to interact with the dog using the touch switch 290, which is called contact time, is displayed as a time production period (mode C) of 5 minutes. The display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 61 instead of the display mode (see FIG. 59) displayed in the normal effect period (mode A). The main display area where the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed in the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, an effect of urging the player to display an effect of operating the touch center 290 to call the dog closer (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog) is displayed in the lower left display area. The character "call" is displayed, and the player is notified that when the touch switch 290 is operated, the effect of calling the dog is displayed.

FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a “stroking effect” mode as a contact effect. In the "stroking effect", the hand is brought close to the distance where the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and the frame button 22 is rotated around the frame button 22 to urge the touch switch 290 to be turned on (operated). When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the pattern imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed as if stroking the dog's head, and the dog's facial expression is variably displayed.

By doing so, the movement of the player's hand becomes as if he / she is stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he / she is stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed at the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking motion, and a predetermined lottery is performed, and a predetermined lottery is performed on the right side of the display screen according to the result of the lottery. The displayed indicator goes up.

The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the reliability of the school of fish until the next time production period (the production period based on the time information acquired from RTC292) arrives. In other words, the contact effect executed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating many touch switches 290 during the contact effect, the fish school trust until the next time effect period. It is configured to be configurable so that the degree is high.

By configuring in this way, the player can change the reliability of the production by his own operation, so that he / she will actively participate in the game and can prevent him / her from getting bored with the game. Will be.

In this control example, "stroking effect" is described as the contact effect, but a plurality of contents of the contact effect may be provided. When a plurality of effects are provided, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator has a high rate of increase but the indicator decreases when the indicator is operated by mistake so that the player can select the game. For example, "brushing effect" can be considered as such an effect. In the "brushing effect", the indicator can be raised greatly by brushing the displayed dog's torso well, and the indicator can be lowered if the dog's face is brushed by mistake.

Further, the indicator may be lowered by the player performing the contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to intentionally lower the reliability of the school of fish and increase the frequency of appearance.

In addition, a plurality of types of dogs may be prepared so that the degree of rise of the indicator and the types of effects that can be set can be changed depending on the type of dog. When preparing multiple types of dogs, for example, it is advisable to change the types of dogs that appear based on a plurality of missions and game contents in a normal period. With such a configuration, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact production, the game during the normal period is concentrated, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game.

Further, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating around the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms when operated quickly. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set to be most easily raised. Therefore, the player who operates the touch switch 290 quickly with the correct operation can give more benefits. In addition, in this "stroking effect", the player who keeps the touch switch 290 on all the time, that is, the player who just holds his hand over the touch switch 290, is configured so that the level does not rise on the indicator. bottom. This can encourage the player to play with the correct movement.

FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the “contact effect”. It is notified that the reliability of the school of fish has reached 70% by operating the touch switch 290 in the "contact time" (see FIG. 62 (a)), which is the "contact effect". If the judgment result is a big hit hold memory in the hold memory stored at the end of the "contact time", the game result of the "contact time" is ignored and the "reliability of the school of fish is 100". % ”May be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the production, and it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game.

Next, a display mode of the volume setting during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variation display. In this control example, even during the period in which the variation display of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the volume can be set based on the operation of the player as long as the period until the reach is established. It is configured as.

When the frame button 22 is operated while the variation display of the third symbol is being executed, the volume setting screen is displayed on the upper layer than the variation screen of the third symbol. The volume is adjusted by operating the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) while the volume setting screen is displayed. On the volume setting screen, the current volume level, the characters "Volume setting in progress" indicating that the volume can be set, and the mark prompting the operation of the operation switch 291 are displayed.

On this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 was not operated for a predetermined time when the changing third symbol was in the reach state or after the volume setting became possible (after the volume setting screen was displayed). In some cases, or when the operation to complete the volume setting is performed, it is deleted.

As described above, in this control example, the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, so that the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (while listening to the game volume). can. This makes it possible to adjust the volume when the third symbol does not fluctuate, and reduce the problem that the game volume becomes unexpected when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is started.

In this control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen, but in addition to this, the game volume currently output is the maximum value of the game volume output by the pachinko machine 10. A volume value that allows the player to relatively grasp how much it is may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the volume based on the currently output game volume and volume value, further reducing the problem that an unexpected game volume is output during the game. Is possible.

Further, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to display the maximum value of the game volume in the currently executed variable display so that the player can grasp it. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound is generated in the variable display this time, and can adjust the volume in advance. Further, by displaying the maximum value of the game volume in the currently executed variable display, the player can predict the result of the winning / failing determination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a change based on the game result to the volume adjustment operation that is normally performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although FIG. 63 shows the volume setting screen when the third symbol is fluctuating, the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed when the state in which the third symbol is not fluctuating continues for a predetermined time. The volume setting screen is displayed even when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed. In this case, the volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set when a predetermined time has elapsed since the demo screen is displayed or when a predetermined operation is performed on the demo screen.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. These counters and the like include special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device, display setting in the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the above.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing special symbol holding balls, and special symbol holding ball execution. There is an area. In each area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64, respectively.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is passed through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability of special symbol (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability of special symbol (see FIG. 66 (a)) are mainly used. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In this control example, two types of jackpots, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are set, and either "big hit A" or "big hit B" is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is added to the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Next, a mechanism in which the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern and the voice lamp control device 113 determines a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 69 to 70, variation pattern selection tables for determining variation patterns of special symbols are set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the timekeeping data measured by the RTC292, and is normally 54 minutes. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. To. Details of each of these periods will be described later, but depending on the set period, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected will differ depending on the period. Set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the variation time of each effect, the result of determining whether the result is correct, or the rough variation. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With such a configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to determine an individual fluctuation pattern, and can reduce the control addition. Further, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can also be suppressed.

The variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol at which the variation is started and the current effect mode. Here, as the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the rough type and fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern are determined. Various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns selected when the hit / fail determination result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of reserved pieces. Here, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern that becomes "super reach" is set more easily to be selected than "normal reach". Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the frequency of the "super reach" fluctuation pattern being executed and becoming a big hit increases, and the player can hit the jackpot when the "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected. Easy to have expectations.

In the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach", the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates for a predetermined time through the reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. After the display, it is a variable display mode in which the main symbol of the reach display mode is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach" is composed of a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "super reach" described later.

The super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the "super reach", are displayed in the reach display mode as in the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and then the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is executed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in. The "super reach" fluctuation pattern is composed of a relatively longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern.

Next, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is out of alignment, as the fluctuation pattern for deviation, "short-time deviation (for short-time use)" and "long-time deviation (for short-time use)" , "Out of normal reach", "Out of super reach" are stipulated. The short-time deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a variation time (7000 ms) shorter than that of other variation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, but is a main symbol for a predetermined time. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the display mode in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-term deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "long-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (10000 ms) longer than that of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach deviation variation pattern, which is the variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern because the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode. It is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be easier to select than the super reach deviation variation pattern described later when the hit / fail determination result is deviation. Further, the super reach deviation variation pattern, which is “super reach deviation”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation with respect to various super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns.

If the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is incorrect, the variation pattern selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The variation type counter CS1 may be configured to be assigned to each variation pattern so that the proportions of the variables are different.

For example, when the number of reserved pieces is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation" and may not be selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first winning opening 64, and the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which the game is stopped (a period during which the lottery for the game is not executed).

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 3 to 4, it is preferable to set a large ratio in which the fluctuation pattern of "short-time off" is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit of 3 to 4, the short fluctuation pattern is easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the number of invalid balls exceeds the number of reserved balls. It is possible to suppress the problem of becoming.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a probability of hitting a normal symbol from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, as the hit type of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long-time hit are set, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is 1. It is a hit that is executed once. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the first electric accessory 640a in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the second symbol display device (not shown). In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the first electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "21 to 204", the first electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and it is further attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric accessory 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 76). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 84) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 83) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 82) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a time-saving / medium-time counter 203e, a probability change flag 203f, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first hit. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. It is (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning ball (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times (variation display performed in). The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 77 and S405 in FIG. 79). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is a hold ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the through gate 66 or 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (FIG. 81). S703: No).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to be turned on when the gaming state is a probability change.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol hold lamp (not shown), and a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of 65a as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a touch switch 290, a selection switch 291 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a SW notice selection table 222b, a fish school selection table 222c, and a shaking operation table 222d. Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223 g, input time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation degree storage area 223m, effect mode storage area 223n, A standby flag 223o, a touch effect effective time storage area 223q, an interval counter 223r, a volume setting storage area 223s, a volume setting flag 223t, a separation flag 223u, an operating flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a is an area in which the winning information is stored corresponding to the reserved ball based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various information such as a winning / failing judgment result, a fluctuation pattern, and a stop type are set.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the special symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating the stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for determining various effects, details of fluctuation patterns, various lottery, and the like. This effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC292 is normal. It is set to on when it is determined that the time information (time information) acquired from RTC292 is within 3 years from the manufacture, and is set to off when it is determined that 3 years have passed.

The input time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the set period of the time production period from the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC292. In the on-time storage area 223, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 86, S1212) in the start-up process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113). In S1224 of the above, information on the time production period is set for 24 hours.

The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period is started. This preparation period flag 223i1 is set to on when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 is the preparation period, and is set to off when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 is the time production period. Will be done.

The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. The start period flag 223i2 is set to on when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 is the time effect period, and is turned off when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 has elapsed the time effect period. Set.

The SW effective time storage area 223j is an area for storing the effective time of the SW operation. The SW effective time storage area 223j is subtracted or reset from the stored effective time in the SW effect control process (FIG. 97, S2202).

The level storage area 223k is an area for storing the upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the touch effect effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

The expectation degree storage area 223m is an area for storing the expectation degree based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). ..

The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information related to the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set), respectively. In the production mode, if the current production mode is a normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode A is stored, if it is a time production period, the production mode B is stored, and if it is an extended time production period, the production mode A is stored. Mode C is stored.

The standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog is in a display state of waiting during the time effect period (during the effect mode C) in the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to on when the contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and then turned off by turning on the touch switch 290.

The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the effective time of the touch effect. In the touch effect effective time storage area 223q, the stored effective time is subtracted in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated, and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314).

The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used for the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to on when the volume can be set (FIG. 93, S1905) and turned off when the volume setting is completed. ..

The separation flag 223u is a flag used for the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), and is set to on when the central floating unit 400 is set to descend (FIG. 94, S2004), and either left or right is set. When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

The operating flag 223v is a flag used for the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined that the accessory driving start timing is determined (FIG. 95, S2103). Is set to off when is finished (FIG. 95, S2111).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 88) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 71 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table 222c in the present control example. Here, the fish school notice selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of the touch sensor control process (FIGS. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described with reference to FIG. 62. It's a table.

By using this table, the notice effect is controlled so that the fish school notice appears with the expectation corresponding to the reliability (expectation) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62 (b)). In this control example, the fish school notice selection table 222c is used, but when a plurality of effects whose expectations are set by the contact time (time effect) are provided, a table is provided so as to correspond to each effect.

Further, in the fish school notice selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), the fish school notice is set not to appear when the expectation degree is 0%. It may be set to. With this configuration, the player who wants to give notice of the school of fish regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment participates in the production so as to intentionally lower the expectation during the contact time (time production), so that the game gets tired early. It is possible to suppress that.

FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking operation table 222d in the first control example. The shaking operation table 222d is a table referred to when executing S2108 of the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316) described later.

Here, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by the rotational force of the drive motor 450 via the crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation status of the arm member 444 can be grasped by the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

In this control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 with reference to the swing operation table 222d. Has been decided. Specifically, when increasing the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, set the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation. If the information of the acceleration sensor is the data during clockwise rotation, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is clockwise rotation is set.

That is, since the drive motor 445 is driven and controlled based on the actual rotation state by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation state) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the rotation of the drive motor 445 The force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

In particular, in a variable member such as the arm member 444 in which the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive and control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

Further, in the shaking operation table 222d shown in FIG. 71 (b), only the operation table for increasing the shaking (rotation) of the arm member 444 is described, but the shaking (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. An operation table may be provided. In this case, for example, even if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation may be set and used as an operation table for rotationally driving the drive motor 445. With this configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the driving force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other out, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be efficiently reduced.

Further, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to drive the variable member (arm). It may be configured to control the rotation of the member 444). Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when the frame button 22 is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, which is the worst. When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

With this configuration, the rotation status of the variable member can be changed based on the player's operation, and the effect that the player participates in can be increased, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the 111, NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs translation of known data addresses.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing an image is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 controls the voice lamp. When the character symbol is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 234, but the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the first electric accessory 640a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the first. 2 The number of prize balls increases as it becomes easier to enter the prize opening 640. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified over time.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 73). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 74). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 74).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, in the example of FIG. 74). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 46) (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 102 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S3209 of 102 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 109 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 75) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 102 (b). ), The pointer update process (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 75) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 75, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 102 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3707 in FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4302 of FIG. 111).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 84. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the ball is passed through the through gate 66 or 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204 :. No), this process is terminated. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is performed. A hold ball count command indicating the value of the hold ball count counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of S207 is executed, the special symbol fluctuation start processing for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 78. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In this control example, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1, and the type of jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot and the type of the jackpot based on the value of one random number counter. In this case, for example, the total number of random number values is set to 3000, and the random number counter is used for loop counting. By providing 6 random numbers corresponding to the jackpot A and 4 random numbers corresponding to the jackpot B in the random number values of 3000 in total, it is possible to realize the same distribution as in this control example. By doing so, there is an effect that the counter can be reduced by one.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). After that, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability of the probability variation period (S213). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), then the stop command is set (S300), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the next jackpot game is started by setting the probability variation flag 203f to ON and setting the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability which is the probability variation period. Until the game is played in a short time, and the big hit type is the big hit B, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203e, but a different big hit type may be provided. For example, a jackpot type that sets the game state to a high probability and does not provide a time-saving game, a jackpot type that sets the game state to a high probability and sets 100 to the time-saving medium counter 203e, and a probability changing counter are newly provided. 100 is set for each of the probability change counter and the time reduction counter, and the jackpot type that provides high-probability and time-saving games for a predetermined number of times (100 times) and whether or not the high-probability game state continues is determined by a variable lottery. The type of jackpot to be decided can be considered. In this way, by using various jackpot types or combining them, it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and it is possible to improve the playability.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If it is the above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

Next, the special symbol change start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start processing (S208), first, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination of whether or not the period is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S303. In the processing of S303, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability time ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judged as a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and there are two types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, Among the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability change period from the jackpot game to the next jackpot), and "60 to". If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In this process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 84). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

In this control example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but in addition, the fluctuation type is determined for each holding number stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A counter may be provided to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the number of holdings and the fluctuation type counter.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is won. This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the reserved values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. That is, the winning is detected when the ball is continuously detected three times (6 msec) in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 msec. If the switch read process S101 is configured so that the state in which the switch is continuously detecting for a predetermined period can be determined, it is possible to eliminate the need to execute the timer interrupt process three times in this process. ..

Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter The value (N1) of 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a command for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S407). Here, the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of pending numbers N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter The value (N2) of 203c is added by 1 (S410). Then, a command for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S413, the look-ahead is executed, the winning command is set, and this process is terminated. Here, the look-ahead executed in S413 will be described. The look-ahead is based on the game information (value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is a look-ahead process that determines in advance the determination (hit / fail determination) executed at the start of fluctuation.

In the look-ahead process, a determination is made in advance based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, and the determination result is set as a winning command. Like the other commands, this winning command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 84). Will be done.

The voice lamp control device 113 performs a predetermined notification to the player in advance by using the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the stage before the fluctuation starts. Is possible.

In this control example, the look-ahead process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the process result (determination result) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command. The stored game information (value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or the information corresponding to the game information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. It may be configured to output and execute the read-ahead process described above by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) and the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a accompanying the above. As described above, the opening time of the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is also controlled at the same time, but the control content is the same as that of the first electric accessory 640a, so the description thereof is omitted. do.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON. This is because, in this control example, when the probability change flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 0 and the probability variation flag 203f is not set to ON, the process shifts to the process of S611, and the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e If the value is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the process proceeds to S609.

In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit. As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that it is out of the normal symbol.

In the process of S608, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,21 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that it is out of the normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being a big hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the normal symbol hits, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times of opening and the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the first electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device is performed. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed, the first electric accessory is executed. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, and if the ball has passed, the first This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 84, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (used area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets an initial value (S914), and starts payout control of the game ball. It will be possible. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) and the start winning process (see FIG. 79) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 80), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. .. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S620 of FIG. 80 or the processing of S621 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example also performs the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) is completed, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 80). do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 82 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and the used area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see FIG. 83, S901). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 85, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1320 (see FIG. 87) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1320. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1320 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data is transferred to the S1208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1320. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1319 in FIG. 87). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1320 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1211). After that, the time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1208 is performed via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. (S1211). After that, the time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached from S1204 via the processing of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1212, the time setting process is executed (S1212). The time setting process (S1212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), time information is acquired from RTC292, and based on the time information, a process of setting the preparation period and the time production period in the input time storage area 223h is executed.

In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when assembling the pachinko machine 10, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. The RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration that allows the "date" to be discriminated. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1222). Here, the deadline data is set to 3 years within 3 and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292 in this control example. A date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the deadline data, and if it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the start timing of the time production cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a time delay or the like due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

In this control example, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223 g, which will be described later, is set to be turned on. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC292 is determined, and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. May be good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC292 to a voltage value or higher that allows normal operation.

In the process of S1222, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the deadline data, that is, it is determined that 3 years or more have passed (S1222: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the deadline data, that is, within 3 years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the input time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in this control example, the normal game period (effect mode A) is 54 minutes from a predetermined time set in advance with the power of the pachinko machine 10 turned on, and the subsequent 1 minute is the preparation period (effect mode B). ), 5 minutes after the lapse of the preparation period is set as the time production period (effect mode C). After 5 minutes of the time production period has elapsed, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and then each period is similarly set.

In this control example, each period is set as described above, but based on the time information (time information) acquired from RTC292, when the first predetermined time is reached, the normal game period (effect mode A) is supported. When the second predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed, and when the third predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed. It may be set in chronological order based on the time information. By doing so, even if there is an error in the time for turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to execute the same effect at a predetermined time. .. Further, since the RTC292 is used, even if the time for turning on the power is delayed, no error occurs in the time information (time information) to be timed.

The details of each period described above will be described later, but between the normal game period and the time production period, the type of the background image on which the notice content and the special symbol are displayed is switched and displayed. In addition, the preparation period is a period for preparing for switching from the normal game period to the time production period, and before switching to the time production period, the change of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. It is set to do.

In this control example, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the input time storage area 223h. 54 minutes may be set to execute the game, the period may be measured by countdown, count-up, or the like, and the preparation period may be set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to that, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time of the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Further, the player may start the execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time production period based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing so, when friends play a game on the adjacent table, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 execute a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the above-mentioned predetermined operations. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variation display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the process of this command determination process (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, the synchronization effect management processing (S1313) is executed. The details of this synchronous effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. After the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, the volume setting process is executed (S1314). The details of this volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

When the processing of S1314 is completed, the left / right selection processing (S1315) is executed. The details of the left / right selection process (S1315) will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315) is executed, the shake control process is executed (S1316). The details of this shaking control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

When the processing of S1316 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. After that, the advance notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). The details of this advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. When the processing of S1404 is completed, the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S1412), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (S1502).

Here, in this control example, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C are configured to be set respectively. Each effect mode is configured to be set every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the game is started. For 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the effect mode A is set as the normal game period, the effect mode B is set as the preparation period after 54 minutes, and the effect mode B is set as the preparation period. The effect mode C is set as the time effect period for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of the time effect period has elapsed, the effect mode A, which is the normal game period, is set again, and the effect mode B and the effect mode C are repeatedly set.

In this way, after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the effect mode is switched every time a predetermined predetermined time elapses, so that the power is turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to match the timing at which the effect mode is switched between the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (that is, it is a normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol (See FIG. 69), the variation pattern is selected and set based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the number of pending items, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1503), and the present process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1502 that the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) of the corresponding special symbol (see FIG. 70). S1504), this process is terminated. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set and the characters "Soon to start contact time !!" are displayed on the background to indicate that the preparation period is in effect. The contact time indicates the time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which a countdown of 1 minute is displayed on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how soon the time production period will start.

Further, although the details will be described in the advance notice selection process (see FIG. 90) described later, the advance notice effect is not set during the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time effect period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and a notice effect different from the dedicated notice effect set in the time effect period is displayed. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, the details of the advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1404).

In the advance notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). When the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this process ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON so that the advance notice effect is not set when the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 92), which will be described later, determines that the preparation period is in effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when the preparation period flag 223i1 is not set to ON (S1601: No), next, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S1602). If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach (S1602: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S1602: Yes), next, the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). After that, the advance notice lottery is executed based on the set expectation degree and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not to select the fish school notice (S1605). If the fish school notice is not selected (S1605: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the fish school notice is selected (S1605: Yes), a display command indicating the fish school notice is set (S1606), and this process is terminated. The expected degree used in S1604 is set in S2332 of FIG. 99, which will be described later, and the details will be described later.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 88. If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412. Move to the processing of. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the reserved ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and set in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1409). After the processing of S1409 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S1412. In the process of S1408, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1410). Then, when the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). After that, the process proceeds to S1412.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C2 are selected separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the processing of S1410, if the winning command of the special symbol has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1410: No). S1412), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is selected from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. You will also be notified of each notice selected here.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set from the RAM 223. The stop type acquired and instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the display for notifying the display control device 114. A stop type command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1709 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a synchronization effect management process (S1313), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous effect management process (S1313), a process of acquiring time information from RTC292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time effect period based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating it is performed. Run.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223 g is set to ON (S1801). When it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1802), is the start period flag 223i2 turned on? Discrimination (S1803). When it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is off (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804). .. If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), then it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time production period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805).

If it is determined by the process of S1805 that it is not the time production period, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time production period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to off (S1805: Yes). S1806), and then the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode C (time effect period) is set is set (S1809), and this process is terminated. The display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode corresponding to the time effect period based on the reception of this command.

Return to S1804 and continue the explanation. In the process of S1804, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1811). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode B (preparation period) is set is set (S1812), and this process is terminated. The display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the preparation period based on the reception of this command.

Further, in the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "Soon to start contact time !!" indicating that the preparation period is set are displayed on the background. The contact time indicates the time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which a countdown of 1 minute is displayed on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how soon the time production period will start.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 92. When it is determined in the process of S1803 that the start period flag 223i2 is on (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). If it is determined that it is not outside the time production period (S1813: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the time is outside the effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to off (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode A is set is set (S1816). After that, this process ends. The display control device 113 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode of the normal effect period based on the reception of this command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a volume setting process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this volume setting process (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player.

In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). When the effect mode is not mode A (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the effect mode is mode A (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reach is established (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period is the combination of the third symbol that becomes a big hit when two symbol rows are stopped and displayed out of the three symbol rows that are variablely displayed (variably displayed) by the third symbol display device 81. It is the period during which the state (reach state) that remains likely to be displayed is established.

When the determination result of S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), then it is determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). When the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is next determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 is not operated (S1904: No), this process ends. When the selection switch 291 is operated (S1904: Yes), then the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906), and this process is performed. To finish.

In the process of S1903, when the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is raised, the volume setting storage area 223s is set (S1908), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This process ends.

In the process of S1907, when the upper selection switch 291a is not operated (S1907: No), it is subsequently determined whether or not the lower selection switch 291 is operated (S1910). When the lower selection switch 291b is not operated (S1910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the lower selection switch is operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered, the volume setting storage area 223s is set (S1911), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). End the process.

As described above, in the volume setting process (S1314), a specific period (effect mode A is set) even when the third symbol is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the state (during the period when reach is not established), the operation of the operation means (selection switch 291) that can be operated by the player is enabled, and the volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 has conventionally been able to be set only in a state in which the third symbol is not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (so-called demo screen display state or standby screen state). It is possible to set the volume of the third symbol even when the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the game at a desired volume.

Further, in this control example, when the effect mode is set to other than A, the volume cannot be set. This is because in a mode such as the effect mode B or the effect mode C where the effect is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC292, the control to synchronize the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 may be performed. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronous effect with the surrounding pachinko machines 10 (for example, the volume of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be changed when a car approaches from a distance. This is because the production balance is lost in the controlled production).

Although not shown, when the effect mode is set to B or C, the volume output related to the synchronized effect ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronized effect. The specified volume level is output. With this configuration, even if different volume levels are set for a plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for synchronous production, which is of interest to players in terms of production. It becomes possible to have.

Further, the predetermined volume level output during the above-mentioned synchronization effect is set to be lower than the volume level which is the reference value at the normal time (so that the volume becomes smaller). This is because the same sound is often output from the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time during the synchronous production.

In the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by a digital signal (a pattern in which the output volume is output to a speaker by a digital signal), the volume control related to the synchronization effect is possible by the above-mentioned control, but analog. In the case of control (a pattern that adjusts the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker by controlling the output section of the speaker), it is based on the set volume level so that the volume related to the synchronization effect is an appropriate volume. Then, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronization effect.

In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 is controlled so that the volume output corresponding to the synchronous effect can be output at an appropriate volume regardless of the set volume level, the effect mode is set. The volume may be set even in a state other than the state set in A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a more desired volume.

Further, in this control example, the volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is because, after the reach is established, the movable accessory provided on the game board 13 is driven, and the third symbol display device is also producing a feeling of expectation of a big hit. This is to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and to have the pachinko machine 10 perform the operation as a whole so that the effect can be enjoyed.

In this control example, since the third symbol is configured so that the volume can be set during the variable display, the volume setting can also be used for playability. For example, if the lottery result is a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is a big hit, and a loud effect for notifying the jackpot is set at the end of the variable display of the third symbol, the volume is set. It is conceivable that a notification such as "Be careful because a loud noise is generated in this fluctuation!" By performing such notification, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display can be suggested, and it can also be used as a reference when setting the volume. It is possible to prevent a loud volume from being generated in advance. Further, since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from suddenly making a loud noise, even a person with a weak heart can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, since the third symbol is configured so that the volume can be set during the variable display, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the variable display. Therefore, as a result of setting the volume level during the demo screen display as in the conventional case, there is an effect that the problem that the volume of the BGM during the variable display becomes louder than expected and causes discomfort can be solved.

Further, in this control example, only the volume setting process based on the operation of the player is described, but the volume may be set based on the time information acquired from RTC292. For example, by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 to input business hours (opening time and closing time) into the pachinko machine 10. When the time information acquired from RTC292 reaches the closing time, the volume level is automatically lowered to the specified level, and when the time information acquired from RTC292 reaches the opening time, the volume level is set to the specified reference level or during the business hours of the previous day. It is advisable to automatically restore the set volume level. With this configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output by the pachinko machine 10 during maintenance work performed outside business hours, and it is possible to prevent maintenance workers from feeling uncomfortable. It will be possible.

In addition, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level during the time production period executed based on the time information acquired from RTC292, and the result of the mini game performed during the time production period or the execution during the time production period. The volume level may be controlled to increase based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, the players around the pachinko machine 10 with a loud volume will also pay attention to the pachinko machine 10 with a loud volume during the time production period, and the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 with a loud volume will have a sense of superiority. You can soak.

Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to control the volume level to be increased based on the result of the look-ahead processing based on the winning command. By doing so, by grasping the change in the volume level before the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is started, the game is played in a state where the expectation for the big hit is raised. It becomes possible to pay attention to.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, a left / right selection process (S1315), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this left / right selection process (S1315). This left / right selection process is a process executed when the player is made to select the alternative (left / right) by using the left / right sensor device 600 (first sensor 610, second sensor 620) (Fig.). See 60).

Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. 43. The left / right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting a player's finger in front of the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (existence) and position, operation direction, and operation speed of the player, and is a rear case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a.

The irradiation regions (detection regions) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so as to partially overlap each other as shown in the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of FIG. 42. By doing so, the presence of the player's fingers can be detected in a wide continuous area.

In this control example, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation area (detection area) is set is divided into left and right by lowering the central floating unit 400, and the player is given two points. An effect of making an alternative choice is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for allowing the player to make an alternative selection is the left / right selection process.

In the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), first, it is determined whether or not the left / right selection timing is reached (S2001). The left / right selection timing is a case where the left / right selection effect is included in the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It indicates the timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed.

In the process of S2001, if it is not the left / right selection timing (S2001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the left / right selection timing (S2001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). When the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), then the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set to on (S2004), and this process ends.

In the process of S2002, if the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), then it is determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). When the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the left selection is set (S2006), then the separation flag 223u is set to off (S2007), and this process ends. ..

In the process of S2005, when the left sensor is off (S2005: No), then it is determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, a shared detection region is formed so that at least a part of the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620 overlap each other. By using the detection area continuously formed by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 as one detection area, it is possible to reliably detect the player's operation in a wide range, and the alternative is When performing the effect, by intruding a movable accessory (variable member) between the plate glass 16a and the left and right sensor device 600, at least the above-mentioned shared detection area is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the 1 sensor 610 and the detection area of the 2nd sensor 620 are separated.

With this configuration, when the player performs a production game in which the player touches (or brings the fingers closer) the flat glass 16a without changing the left and right sensor devices 600, the player can continuously perform a wide range of touch operations. In the case of performing an effect game in which the player makes an alternative selection, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are separated by the player. It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

Further, in this control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed, and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do so. By doing so, the detection area can be moved.

With this configuration, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the flat glass 16a corresponding to the region of the third symbol display device 81 that is not covered by the movable accessory. Can be the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. As a result, a display called "touch" is performed in the display area not covered by the movable accessory, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area is set as the detection area of each sensor, so that the movable accessory becomes the third. Even in a situation where the display area of the symbol display device is covered, the detection area can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that the effect can be fully enjoyed.

Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 610 and the second sensor 610 are operated by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 that can be operated by the player provided in the pachinko machine 10. It may have a function of adjusting the detection area of the sensor 620. By doing so, the player can execute the effect simply by touching the desired position of the flat glass 16a.

Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that it is not possible to know where the current detection area is. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player hits the detection area of the first sensor 610.

In the case of performing such an effect, it is preferable to touch the area of the second sensor 620 before hitting the detection area of the first sensor 610 so that the area is removed. In addition, as a winning privilege, it is conceivable to display a special video, a privilege that can acquire a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and information that can acquire a large amount of the points. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player can actually participate, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In this control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by the player's fingers and reflected. It is configured to detect the player's fingers by receiving light with the light receiving unit, but other methods may be adopted as long as the sensor can detect the movement of the fingers.

For example, a human sensor that has multiple sensing axes configured in the detection area and detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axis, or a pyroelectric that is a type of polarized material. The current generated by receiving infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) emitted from the human body on the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body (current generated with changes in the charge state) using an electric body. A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects fingers based on this can be considered.

When using a pyroelectric infrared sensor, it is advisable to mount the pyroelectric element on a dome-shaped lens in order to have directivity in the detection direction. Further, the pyroelectric element may be composed of an inorganic ceramic material (lead zirconate titanate (PZT) or the like) or an organic material (polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or the like). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film composed of PVDF, it is possible to configure the infrared sensor as a flexible plastic film, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

Further, by arranging a plurality of such elements, it is possible to detect the high-speed movement and the moving direction of the fingers, and it is possible to detect the gesture operation of moving the fingers. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect in which the player can actually participate, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. As other sensors, a non-contact photoelectric sensor, a capacitance type proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a shaking control process (S1316), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this shaking control process (S1316). This shaking control process is a process executed when the central floating unit 400 is shaken by using the drive motor 450.

Here, the variable control (operation control) of the variable member (central floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed of a stepping motor. The stepping motor rotates in steps of a fixed angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with the input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (steps) and pulse speed (frequency). It is configured so that the rotation amount and rotation speed of the motor can be controlled and the variable member can be movably controlled.

Each variable member is configured to be variable by being driven by a transmission means (gear) interlocked with the rotational drive of the stepping motor described above. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a drive motor control means that outputs a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to the minimum unit in which the variable member can be changed (a unit in which the gear that is the transmission means rotates by one tooth). Has been done.

First, the movable control of the arm body 430 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable via a crank gear 453, which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means), by the rotational force of the drive motor 450. Then, the variable member mounted on the arm body 430 is configured to be variable based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). The position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the rotation speed (number of steps) of the drive motor 450 based on the state in which the origin detection sensor detects the origin.

Next, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by the rotational force of the drive motor 450 via the crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rear body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is mounted is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). Based on the state where the limited detection sensor detects the origin, the position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the rotation speed (number of steps) of the drive motor 445.

That is, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be capable of operating a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motors 450 (two) and the drive motors 445, respectively (FIGS. 31, 33, and FIG. 34, see FIGS. 37 and 39).

Further, in this control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for the member that is variably configured so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, by comparing the position (assumed position) of the variable member calculated from the rotation speed (number of steps) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor, the variable member can be normally moved and controlled. It becomes possible to determine whether or not it has been done. If the assumed position and the current position are different, it is possible that the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is out of step and the movement is poor.

Returning to FIG. 95, the explanation will be continued. In the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory drive start timing (S2101). The accessory drive start timing is a case where the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes an effect of shaking the accessory. It indicates the timing at which the effect of shaking the character is executed. When it is the accessory drive start timing (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the operating flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this process is terminated.

In addition, although this figure describes the case where the accessory drive start timing performed based on the fluctuation pattern is set, the accessory drive start timing can be set by operating the frame button 22, for example. It may be configured as follows.

In the process of S2101, when it is not the accessory drive start timing (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the operating flag 223v is ON (S2104). When the operating flag 223v is off (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the operating flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not the operation scenario is a shaking operation scenario (S2106). In the case of a shaking motion scenario (S2106: Yes), the information of the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), the shaking motion data is set from the shaking motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the acceleration sensor information is left rotation data, rotation data is set in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation, and when the acceleration sensor information is right rotation data, the arm member Set the rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is clockwise rotation.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is not a scenario of shaking operation (S2106: No), this process is terminated. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether it is the scenario end (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the scenario end (S2109: Yes), the operating flag 223v is set to off (S2110), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is determined based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444. I have decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotational state) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 445 based on the actual rotation state. The rotational force of 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

In particular, in a variable member such as the arm member 444 in which the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive and control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

The swing control of the variable member may be performed by using the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to drive the variable member (arm). It controls the rotation of the member 444). Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when the frame button 22 is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member, and the worst timing is obtained. When pressed with, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

With this configuration, the rotation status of the variable member can be changed based on the player's operation, and the effect that the player participates in can be increased, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 87, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S2201). When it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), the SW effect control process described later is executed (S2202), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S2201: No), the special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and then this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the SW effect control process (S2202), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this SW effect control process (S2202). In this SW effect control process, the process based on the SW operation is executed in the normal period (effect mode A), which is a period other than the period (time effect period) in which the effect based on the time information acquired from RTC292 is performed.

In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time is larger than 0 (S2301). If the SW effective time is 0 (S2301: No), this process ends.

In the process of S2301, if the SW effective time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (other touch switch 290 and selection switch 291) is pressed (S2303). If the frame button 22 or the like is not pressed (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected display advance notice command is set (S2304), and the SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223j is reset (S2304). S2305), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a special SW effect control process (S2203), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this special SW effect control process (S2203). In this special SW effect control process, the process based on the SW operation is executed during the period (time effect period) in which the effect based on the time information acquired from RTC292 is performed.

In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the contact effect is on standby during the time effect period. That is, the standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect is selected in the time effect period. Then, by turning on the touch switch 290, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

When it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display status command indicating that the wait flag 223o is off is set (S2314). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2312, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S2311, when it is determined that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is larger than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 99, the touch sensor control process (S2316), which is one of the processes in the special SW effect control process (see FIG. 98), will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this touch sensor control process (S2316). In the touch sensor control process (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). After that, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322). When the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). After that, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2331.

When it is determined in the process of S2322 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328). ). When the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328: Yes), the level storage area 223k is subtracted by 1 (S2329). After that, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the process proceeds to S2331.

In the process of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). When the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), the expectation level based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation degree storage area 223m (S2332). After that, a display command indicating that the expectation degree has been set is set (S2333), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 111, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S3003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (S2901 in FIG. 101) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2901) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3002. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. And S3002 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S3003 to S3005 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. However, all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 100. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2903, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2904). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2904, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2905). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 109 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)). The determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), and the main control device was instructed to start the variable effect. When the voice lamp control device 113 is used from 110, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, which is simple. It is possible to perform variable effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2905, the interrupt permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 75) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal production image. Is executed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105.

In the display setting process (S3203), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3206). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), which are determined in the task process (S3204), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3209) is executed to process S3204. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3202), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 103, S3202), as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S3301: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3303).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), the process returns to S3301.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3305) will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 104 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3401).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3403, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3406), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3405, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401 is used. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3402e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 103. In the processing of S3304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a stop type command for display (S3306: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3307), and the process returns to the process of S3301.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 104 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S3502).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S3503).

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3306, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3306: No), then it is determined whether there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). If it is determined that the display hold command has been received (S3308: Yes), the hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbol is displayed, and the color of the displayed reserved symbol is set to be variable. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display hold command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display notice command (S3310). When it is determined that there is a display notice command (S3310: Yes), the notice display data based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed to set a display such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S3310: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (S3312). When it is determined that there is a display status command (S3312: Yes), the background display data corresponding to the status based on the command is set (S3313). As a result, the display corresponding to the time effect and the like is set. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display touch command (S3314). When it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), the corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). As a result, the display corresponding to the touch effect such as the contact effect is set. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3316), and if there is an error command (S3316). : Yes), error command processing is executed (S3318), and the process returns to S3301 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3318) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3601). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3602), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3601, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3602 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S3602. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 103. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S3316 (S3316: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3317), and the process returns to the process of S3301.

In the processing of S3301 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes). ), The processing of S3302 to S3317 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3301 to S3307 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3301 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3401. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3203), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3701: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3702 to S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3702), S3703 to S3704. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3703). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3704).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3801).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 106. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3705.

In S3705, the pointer update process is executed (S3705). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3901, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3903), and if it is a demo display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3905), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3903, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3903: No). S3906), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3902: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 106 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3906 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3709).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3709: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3710), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3714), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3204), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3715, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the definite display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3716). If the demo display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3717) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3718). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3716, if the demo display flag is on (S3716: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S3205), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 109 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4001, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). FIG. 109 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4101: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4102). In the process of S4102, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S4102 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4102: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4103. Further, as a result of the processing of S4101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4103.

In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4103: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 is described in the drawing list. Based on the transferred transfer data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4103 (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, a normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3705) of the display setting process (S3203) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202), and if it is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205.

Further, in the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4202: No), the processes of S4203 and S4204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

In the process of S4206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4206 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4207. Further, as a result of the processing of S4205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4205: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4207.

In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4212: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S4213), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4214). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the storage destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4215), and the process proceeds to S4209.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4214, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4209, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The discrimination in the processing of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S4209, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4210). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206), and the image controller 237 describes the transfer in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4210, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3206), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (S3204) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated (S4301). That is, in the processing of S4301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3204). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S4302 (S4303). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In the second control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the first control example. The point that the reel control process is added in addition to the process performed in the first control example described above, and the variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control process. The difference is that a new process has been added to the variable display setting process. Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112A is an example showing a display mode in a state where the housing 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 112A, the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as the main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the accommodating body 330, and the first A third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sub-third symbol) that is compositely displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotating body 340b is displayed at the same time. This display mode is executed by raising the housing 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. It is a display mode to be displayed.

In this display mode, three main symbols and three sub-third symbols are displayed in the left-right direction, respectively, and the left column, the middle column, and the right column are configured to be displayed correspondingly to each other. That is, the main third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which 4 and 7 are displayed) and the sub third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which A and A'are combinedly displayed) correspond to each other. The main third symbol in the column (blank symbol) and the sub third symbol in the middle column (the symbol in which C and B'are combinedly displayed) correspond to each other, and the main third symbol in the right column (blank symbol). And the sub-third symbol in the right column (the symbol in which C and A'are combinedly displayed) correspond to each other.

The sub-third symbol has "A and A'", "B and B'", and "C and C'" as specific combinations, and all three sub-third symbols are "A and A'". When it is displayed in a composite manner, it notifies that the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is a big hit. Further, when all three sub-third symbols are combined and displayed as "B and B'" or "C and C'", the player is notified to expect a big hit, for example, "B and B". By arranging three sub-third symbols combined with "'", it is configured to be displayed as "Cha-n-su".

FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which the third symbol on the right is switched after the display of FIG. 112 (a). As shown in this figure, when the main third symbol and the sub third symbol are displayed, the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is displayed according to the combination of the respective symbols. For example, the hit / miss of the special symbol is displayed. If the judgment result is a big hit, the combination in which the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit is displayed in the main 3rd symbol (combination in which 3 shark / turtle symbols are lined up), and the special symbol is correct / miss in the sub 3rd symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols that are combined and displayed by A and A'are lined up) is displayed.

As described above, in the present control example, the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is notified using the third symbol which is variablely displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal gaming state. When shifting to the reel mode, which is a gaming state different from the normal gaming state, the combination of the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-mentioned sub third symbol is special. It is configured so that the result of determining whether the symbol is correct or not can be notified.

As the conditions for shifting to the reel mode described above, the reel mode is used when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a predetermined judgment result (big hit), or when the variation pattern command or winning command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is used. May contain production information corresponding to.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a reel scenario table 222e added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the main process 2. Of the main processes 2, the processes S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 are the same as the processes S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 of the main process (see FIG. 87) in the first control example, respectively. Since the process is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed, and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. Since it is different, it will be explained below.

The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330), which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In this reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). When the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). After that, the setting start flag 223w is set to off (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to on (S2405), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when the setting start flag 223w is off (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). When the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). After that, it is determined whether or not the data is end data (S2408). If it is end data (S2408: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not end data (S2408: No), operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process 2.

In this fluctuation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). When the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). When the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B and set (S1514). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this process ends.

Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table includes a table referenced in the effect control process (look-ahead control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Is provided separately from the table referenced.

In S1515, the reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is divided into a position where the player can see (exposed position) and a position where the player cannot see easily (storage position). A plurality of scenarios in which the reel position where the position is determined and the rotation speed are predetermined as the rotation operation of the reel member are prepared, and are based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount. It is configured to be appropriately selected and set (see FIG. 134 (a)).

In the process of S1512, when the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C (S1516). After that, this process ends.

Next, the variation display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1340). In each of the variable display setting processes 2 of S1711 to S1719, the same processes as those of S1701 to S1709 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example are executed. Detailed explanation will be omitted. This control example differs from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and will be described below.

In the process of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720). In the case of the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this process is terminated. The reel mode entry pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit is included more than the stop type selection command when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is not a big hit. ing.

On the other hand, if it is not a reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a reel mode end pattern (S1722). If it is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to off (S1723), and this process is terminated.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 133. In the third control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the second control example. Specifically, the above-mentioned command determination process is added with the effect change process at the time of winning, the volume setting process 2 is added, the special effect process is added, and the shaking control process 2 is added. , The difference is that other processing is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the description of the other configurations will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 118, a display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described. Here, the special volume setting effect, which explains the special volume setting effect, is an effect generated based on the fact that a ball is inserted, and the volume setting at the normal time is performed during the period when the effect is occurring (Fig. A special volume setting (see FIG. 130) different from that (see 93) is possible. When the volume is set by this special volume setting, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the jackpot expectation of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation in the reserved symbol are special voices, volumes, or display modes. It is configured to be notified using.

According to the special volume setting effect configured in this way, the notification suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is also executed by the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of settings, volume setting and expectation suggestion notification (effect setting), based on one operation performed by the player, and to the frame button 22 (operation means) performed by the player to enjoy the game. It has the effect of making it possible to reduce the number of operations.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special volume setting effect. As shown in this figure, when the special volume setting effect is executed, a part of the sub symbol (blank symbol) is changed to the volume symbol indicating the volume setting and displayed. During this special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor devices 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area where the volume symbol is displayed, and the player can use the glass plate 16a corresponding to the volume symbol. By touching it, you can set a special volume.

When the special volume setting becomes possible, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol displayed on the display screen is changed to a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the magnitude of the volume and displayed.

Further, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the display mode of the volume symbol is changed to a display mode according to the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol whose display mode is changing and the jackpot expectation degree in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the color of the volume pattern is changed from white → blue → yellow → red → rainbow. As a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation, not only the color is changed, but also, for example, the type of the pattern displayed on the volume symbol is changed or the form of the symbol mark displayed as the volume symbol is changed. It is possible to change the method by increasing the number or increasing the number.

Further, as a notification effect based on the jackpot expectation level, not only the display mode of the volume symbol may be changed, but also notification using voice (volume) may be performed. For example, an operation of raising the volume level may be performed. Regardless of this, a contradiction effect such as a decrease in the volume of the pachinko machine 10 or a notification sound effect for notifying that a big hit exists in the hit / fail determination result may be performed. When the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in this way, it is possible to make the different categories of volume setting and notification effect related by performing the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation degree using sound. This makes it possible to make it easier for the player who has set the volume to notice the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation.

In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is described as a special volume setting effect, but the same control may be used for other than the volume setting. For example, it may be used when setting the brightness and the hue of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display device). When such a configuration is adopted, the sub-design (blank design) is changed and displayed as a light design indicating brightness or a color bar design indicating a hue, and the display mode of the above-mentioned design is displayed as a notification effect based on the expectation of a big hit. In addition to the effect of changing, it is preferable to use a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided in the pachinko machine 10 for notification. With this configuration, the expectation of the jackpot is executed by the visual notification effect (lamp brightness, color) based on the operation performed by the player to change the visual setting (brightness, color). It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to notice the notification effect.

Further, the plurality of sub-symbols (blank symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed to volume symbols, light symbols, and color bar symbols, respectively, so that settings corresponding to the symbols selected by the player are made. You may.

In this control example, the sub-symbols that are stopped and displayed and a part of the sub-symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner are configured to be changed to volume symbols, but only the sub-symbols that are stopped and displayed can be changed to volume symbols. It may be configured so that only the sub symbol in the variable display can be changed to the volume symbol. Further, the jackpot expectation may be notified based on the volume setting operation in the normal time.

Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which whether or not the player touches the volume symbol is determined from the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600, but the volume symbol is operated by an operation means other than the left and right sensor device 600. It may be configured to determine that it has been selected.

As described above, in the special volume setting effect in this control example, the player only performs the operation of setting the volume, and the state suggestion notification effect suggesting the jackpot expectation level is also performed by the player. It is possible to prevent the operation of the operating means (frame button 22, selection switch 291) from becoming complicated.

Further, since the mode using sound is used as the mode of the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, it is possible to easily make the player notice the state suggestion notification effect.

Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time effect period. First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is the timekeeping means by the time setting process (see FIG. 86) in the start-up process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC292. Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period (effect mode B) is set when 54 minutes have elapsed. The normal game period (effect mode A) is set until the preparation period is set. Then, one minute after the preparation period (effect mode B) is set, the time effect period (effect mode C) is set. After that, when 5 minutes have passed since the time effect period (effect mode C) was set, the normal game period is set again.

In this control example, the player acquires points during the normal game period (effect mode A1), displays the result of the points acquired during the preparation period (effect mode B), and displays the time effect according to the acquired points. The content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) is changed, and the effect of changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) is performed based on the result of the time effect.

Next, the detailed contents of the effect in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. The description of the same effect as that described in the first control example described above will be omitted.

FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, in order for the player to acquire points. It is a figure which shows the mini-game to be executed. Three treasure chests are lined up in the center of the display screen, and a comment urging the player to select an arbitrary treasure chest is displayed above the treasure chests. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure box, a display mode showing points appears from the treasure box, and the points are added to the points earned by the player.

Further, on this display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum earnable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as "10/100" at the lower left of the screen. It should be noted that the content of the time effect to be executed during the later time effect period is determined according to the points acquired during the normal game period.

Furthermore, in the vicinity of the area where the earned points are displayed, an earned point indicator with the maximum value set to 100 points is displayed, visually indicating how much the current earned points are with respect to the maximum value. You can grasp it. Further, the indicator has a boundary line at a position indicating the number of points earned 40, 70, 90, and the character "GET" is displayed for each boundary line. In this figure, the display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

This boundary line indicates a value at which the table (see FIG. 125 (a)) used when determining the content of the time effect (effect performed in the effect mode C) to be performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required up to the stage where the time effect may be changed while setting the boundary line as the target value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the mini game.

In addition, the display of the number of points earned on the indicator is configured so that the color changes when the boundary line is crossed. In this control example, the above-mentioned two displays are performed for the acquired points, but only one of them may be displayed.

In this control example, points can be obtained not only in the mini-game shown in FIG. 120 (a) but also in a normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b). Therefore, FIG. 120 (b) will be described.

FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect of “fish school reach”. It is a figure which shows. When the "fish school reach" is executed, "fish school GET + 20 points" is displayed on the display screen, and 20 points are added. In this way, even if it is a normal game production, points can be earned when a specific production is executed, so that it is possible to accumulate points even if the mini game cannot be operated well. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect that occurs during the normal game period.

It should be noted that the points that can be obtained in a normal game effect may be configured so that the number of points and a specific effect to which the points are given can be set at random. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to display the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the normal game period on the display screen. In addition, when all the effects set as specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege of maximizing the points earned may be provided.

Further, the number of points acquired by executing a mini game or a specific effect during the normal game period may not be displayed on the display screen, and some points may not be added on the display, for example. , It is better to acquire and display less points than the points actually earned in the mini game, or to display a part of the effect set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display. .. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the specific number of points to be earned, and the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)) can be enjoyed.

FIG. 121A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and is a diagram showing points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which announces the result of a number. A comment is displayed in the upper area of the main display screen to inform that the time effect "contact time" is about to start, and the remaining time until the time effect is started (35) in the right area of the main display screen. A countdown display unit for displaying a countdown (seconds) is provided. When the numerical value (number of seconds) displayed on the countdown display unit becomes 0, the time effect period (effect mode C) is entered and the time effect is started.

Further, in the left area of this display screen, an earned point result display unit for displaying the result of the number of points earned during the normal game period (effect mode A1) is provided, and the points earned during the normal game period are displayed. Will be done. If it is configured not to display all the points earned during the normal game period on the display screen, the result of the number of points displayed in the result display section of this figure can be seen for the first time during the normal game period. You can grasp the number of points you have earned.

FIG. 121B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which displays the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) using a number. In the upper area of this display screen, a comment indicating that the dog breed to be used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) has been determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog breed display unit for displaying the dog breed determined this time is provided, and the dog breed C is displayed as the dog breed to be used during the next time production period. In addition, a display indicating the remaining 9 seconds is displayed on the countdown display unit.

Here, the breeds of dogs used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breeds A to D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time production period, and are selected and determined by a dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) described later. Each dog breed has its own individuality, and the degree of increase in reliability during the contact time (during time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set as "normal", and the effect in which the reliability can be custom-set is set as "fish school reach".

In this control example, the type of effect that allows the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability to be custom-set is set for each dog breed, but the player can custom-set the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability. It may be possible to select the type of possible production. In such a case, for example, when the dog type D is selected, the selectable range may be reduced, and when the dog type A is selected, the selectable range may be increased. With this configuration, the player will play the game so that the dog type A is set in order to make various custom settings.

In addition, a game mode other than the game mode (reach type, reliability) described in this control example may be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of the premier effect in the variable display in which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the appearance rate of the effect that can give a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and the like can be considered.

In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period for acquiring points (effect mode A1) and a period for executing the effect based on the contents set in the time effect (effect mode A2), and the normal game period is executed alternately. However, for example, at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time production period), the player may be able to select which period to execute during the normal game period. With this configuration, if the desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it is possible to select the period for regaining points, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

In addition, the normal game period may be divided into the first half part and the second half part, the first half part may be a period for executing the production based on the contents set during the time production period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points. The period to be acquired and the period to execute the effect based on the content set in the time effect may be overlapped, and both may be performed at the same time.

Further, the points acquired during the normal game period may be accumulated all day long, and the content of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long time. In addition, the acquired points are converted into information that can be read by an external terminal (portable device) (for example, a two-dimensional code) and output, and information created based on the information read by the external device (for example, a password). By inputting to the pachinko machine 10, it may be possible to execute a game in which the previously acquired points are inherited. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who does not have time to play for a long time over a day.

Next, the detailed contents of the effect in the shaking effect 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, wherein the player has an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges to operate a frame button 22 in a timely manner to shake.

Here, the shaking effect 2 will be described. The shaking effect 2 is an effect of moving the slightly shaking arm member 444 based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. More specifically, the timing of calculating the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 and notifying the operation timing to the display screen based on the calculated data. Display notifications. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444 is determined. Is.

In the above-mentioned shaking effect 2, the arm member 444 is controlled to shake greatly by operating the frame button 22 at the right timing, and when the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is bad, the arm member 444 is controlled. It is controlled so that the shaking becomes small. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the operation of the player, the player feels that he / she is participating in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and thus he / she is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

Further, in the shaking effect 2 in this control example, the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual shaking state of the variable member, and is therefore displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual shaking state of the variable member will be synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the right timing according to the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to be greatly shaken, so that it is possible to eliminate the discomfort to the player.

Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. A comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the central area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen. Is provided with a timing display unit in which an indicator is displayed by increasing / decreasing movement in the left-right direction in a predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display unit displays an increase / decrease movement in the left-right direction based on information obtained by digitizing the actual shaking state of the arm member 444 using an acceleration sensor. The speed of increasing / decreasing movement in the left-right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swing width of the arm member 444 increases, or the information obtained from the acceleration sensor may be corrected and controlled to be constantly constant. May be good.

Then, the timing at which the indicator is located at the center position S (range of a) in the predetermined region M is the timing at which the arm member 444 is shaken most efficiently by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. As the timing moves away from the center position S (range b → range c), the arm member 444 is controlled so as not to shake significantly. It should be noted that the timing display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during one shaking effect 2.

In this control example, the player operates the frame button 22 at the right timing as the shaking member effect 2, but the effect shown in FIG. 122 may be used as another effect. FIG. 122B is a diagram showing another example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, and is an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) in which the player is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges to operate the frame button 22 repeatedly in order to shake.

In this alternative example, a comment urging the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 and a figure imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the center area of the display screen, and the right side area of the display screen is repeatedly hit. There is provided a continuous hit count display unit that displays an indicator that moves (rises) upward according to the number of times. In another example described in this figure, the indicator of the number of repeated hits display unit rises according to the number of times the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit. Then, the higher the indicator level of the continuous hit count display unit (as it rises), the more the arm member 444 may be configured to be driven at the timing of large shaking.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
The third control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example, a rotating body operation table 222f and a dog type selection table 222g are added to the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example has a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β added to the second control example. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d are not described, but they are in the other memory area 223z. It is assumed that it is included, and the description thereof is simply omitted, and the same processing as that of the second control example is performed.

Next, the combination of the figures displayed on the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. 124. Regarding the configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the same parts as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body operation table showing an error range used when setting a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the combination of the figures in this control example. Here, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, its rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism (detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the first embodiment). do). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355, which is a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b, is set to 20.

Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven and the first gear 353 is rotated by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a is rotated by about 25 degrees. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth, the second gear 355 also rotates by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b perform rotational operations at different angles based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 124. In the rotating body operation table shown in this figure, the vertical axis is No. Is provided from "1" to "141". No. shown on this vertical axis. Is attached corresponding to the unit controlled by the drive motor control means described above, that is, for each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. It is attached corresponding to, for example, No. The state in which the first rotating body 340a is rotated 25 degrees and the second rotating body 340b is rotated 18 degrees from the state shown in No. 1 is No. It is shown as 2. Hereinafter, numbers are assigned in order based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, and No. When becomes "141", No. It returns to the same state as "1". That is, the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 have 140 teeth, that is, the first rotating body 340a rotates 3600 degrees (10 rotations) and the second rotating body 340b rotates 2520 degrees (7 rotations). It is configured to return to the state.

Further, the rotating body operation table is provided with a first error range and a second error range, and the respective Nos. It shows whether the display mode of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b corresponding to the above is acceptable as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. The mechanism for generating an error in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the structure for preventing the display mode from being uncomfortable due to the error are the structures described in the above-described first embodiment. Since it is the same as, the description thereof will be omitted.

The first error range shown in the rotating body operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and the second error range is. It is a range wider than the first error range, and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to the player.

For example, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode combined and displayed by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the state of "48" is "B, B'", and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode combined with the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the state of "89" is also "B, B'", and this display mode is set as the second error range.

This is No. 1 which is the first error range from the display mode (display information) of the current rotating body acquired in the look-ahead reel display effect processing (see FIG. 129) described later. When the amount of rotation until moving to "48" is a predetermined amount or more, No. 2 which is the second error range. This is so that the correction can be performed so as to move to "89".

By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time until each rotating body is stopped (the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol) is short, for example, in the winning command generated while the third symbol is variable display. Even if it is a variation effect using a rotating body based on the rotation body or a variation effect using a rotating body based on operating the frame button 22 generated during the variation display of the third symbol, a predetermined stop display mode is displayed. It is possible to make it.

In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the first embodiment described above is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are rotated in the forward rotation direction (ascending order direction of No.) or in the reverse rotation direction (No. ascending order direction). It is possible to rotate in the descending order direction of No.), and it is controlled by the drive motor control means provided in the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, each table used in the special effect processing and the shaking effect process 2 added in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog breed selection table used in the special effect processing (see FIG. 132) described later.

This dog type selection table is a special effect (contact time) that is executed while the effect mode is set to mode C, based on the points (mission achievement result) acquired while the effect mode is set to mode A. ) Is a table for selecting the dog type used in), and is configured so that any one of dog type A to dog type D is selected depending on the mission achievement result.

Dog type A to dog type D are set so that the degree of increase in reliability during the contact time (during time production) production (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set as "normal", and the effect of customizing the reliability is set as "fish school reach". The more points the mission achievement result has, the higher the effect of the effect is set for the player, and the dog breed A is set to have the highest effect.

The high production effect here means, for example, by increasing the frequency of appearance of production (premier production) that rarely appears normally, or by expanding the range of custom settings for reliability, in a normal game. It means making it possible to experience a production that cannot be experienced in the state.

Next, FIG. 125 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the shaking operation table 2 used in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. The shaking operation table 2 acquires the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable status of the variable member (arm member 444) in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when the shaking effect is performed. It is a table which sets a direction to rotate a variable member (arm member 444) based on the acceleration sensor information for this.

In the shaking operation table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timing is divided into three, "81 to 100", "51 to 80", and "0 to 50". This division corresponds to the indicators "a", "b", and "c" displayed in FIG. 122 (a), respectively. For example, the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is in the circle (center position S). In the case of (middle), the direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated is set with reference to the table of "81 to 100" whose button operation timing corresponds to "a".

Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the shaking operation table 2 of FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the variable member, and is classified, for example, the acceleration sensor. If the information obtained from is indicating the situation where the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set with reference to the table to which the button operation timing and the acceleration sensor information described above correspond. In this control example, when the button operation timing is "81 to 100", the data for driving the drive motor is set in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member increases, and when the button operation timing is "51 to 80", the data is set. , Do not set the data to drive the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. Further, when the button operation timing is "0 to 50", the data for driving the drive motor is set in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member becomes smaller.

In this control example, the data for driving the drive motor is not set in order to maintain the rotation width of the variable member, but the data for driving the drive motor so as to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is set. It may be set.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 133. This control example differs from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that some processing of command judgment processing, volume setting processing, and shaking control processing is changed, and special effect processing is newly added. The parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main process. In the main process, first, the processes of S1301 to S1310 are executed as in the second control example. Next, the command determination process 2 that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1351). The details of this command determination process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. After the command determination process 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed in the same manner as in the second control example described above, and then the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Next, the shaking control process 2 (S1354) executed during the shaking effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is executed. The details of the shaking control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Then, the other processes (S1355) described in the first control example or the second control example described above are executed, and the processes from S1317 to S1321 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example described above. In S1355, the synchronization effect management process (S1313), the left / right selection process (S1315), and the reel control process (S1330) are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the details of the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1351). In this command determination process 2 (S1351), a prize-winning effect change process (S1451), which is performed when a special symbol winning command is received, is added to the command determination process (S1311) in the second control example described above. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 2, first, the processes of S1401 to S1410 are executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned command determination process (see FIG. 88). Next, when it is determined in S1410 that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received (S1410: No), a process corresponding to another command (S1412) is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned command determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the winning command of the special symbol has been received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area (S1411), and the effect change processing at the time of winning is performed. (S1451) is executed. This winning effect change process (S1451) executes the effect changing process based on the winning command when the winning command of the special symbol is received from the main control device 110, and the details thereof are shown in FIG. 128. Will be described later. Then, after executing the effect change processing (S1451) at the time of winning, the process proceeds to S1412.

As described above, in this control example, when a winning command of a special symbol is received from the main control device 110, an effect based on the information contained in the winning command (so-called look-ahead effect) can be realized. It is described as. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects by changing the effects at a timing other than the timing at which the variation pattern command is received, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is not easily bored by the player. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the winning effect change process (S1451) performed by the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a winning effect change process (S1451). In this prize-winning effect change process (S1451), a process related to an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) executed based on the information included in the received winning command is executed.

In the process of changing the effect at the time of winning, first, the winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether or not the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include the information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the look-ahead effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403).

This chance eye display effect is an effect executed based on the determination result of the winning command received this time, and is a third symbol executed until the third symbol change based on the winning command received this time is started. In the fluctuation, by setting the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed to a predetermined specific combination other than the combination that becomes the jackpot, it is an effect suggesting the possibility that the jackpot may exist in the determination result of the reserved symbol.

If it is determined in S4403 that the look-ahead effect is not the chance eye display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403: Yes), then it is determined whether the third symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation (S4404).

Here, when it is determined that the third symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation (S4404: Yes), a display stop type command in which the stop symbol is a chance eye is set (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4408.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the third symbol is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation (S4404: No), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405). If the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), the reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining fluctuation time (S4406), and the setting start flag is set. Set to on. Then, it shifts to S4408.

As described above, in the chance eye display effect in this control example, the mode of displaying the chance eye can be changed according to the timing when the winning command including the information for executing the chance target display effect is received. That is, if the timing at which the winning command is received fluctuates on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the third symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, a process of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation to the chance eye is executed. However, since it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, a display stop type command is set in which the stop symbol of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes a chance eye. On the other hand, when the timing at which the winning command is received is variable and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is not in high-speed fluctuation (for example, at least one of the plurality of symbol rows is stopped and displayed. At the timing of the movement or at the timing during low-speed display in which the player can visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbol at least one of the plurality of symbol rows), the reel member (first rotating body 340a) provided in the rotating body elevating unit 300 A member that compositely displays the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b and displays a plurality of third symbols in a variable manner by rotating each rotating body) is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled to be raised to a position (exposed position) that covers the third symbol displayed on the screen and to display a chance eye.

With this configuration, even if a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received at the timing when the third symbol is stopped or fluctuated at low speed on the display screen, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to display the chance eye without any need. Therefore, when a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received, the stop display of the changing third symbol can be changed to the chance eye, and the changing third symbol can be changed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. There is an effect that the period during which the stop display can be changed to the chance eye can be lengthened.

In this control example, S4405 determines the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol. This is because the reel member stored in the storage position that is difficult for the player to see in the normal gaming state is driven to the exposed position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by driving the rotating body elevating unit 300. If the time required for raising the reel member to the exposed position is shortened, the remaining variable time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the reel member stored in the storage position is reel-controlled so that the display mode synthetically displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof corresponds to the chance eye of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member is completed and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body elevating unit 300, the above-mentioned reel control is executed. When the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are located at the origin position (initial position), the display mode displayed on the display surface may be configured to correspond to the chance eye. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a reel control in which the display mode of the reel member is an opportunity, and the data capacity can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 128, the explanation will be continued. Next, the look-ahead reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the look-ahead reel display effect is a look-ahead reel in order to reliably display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the symbol change corresponding to the winning command including the information of the look-ahead reel display effect within the fluctuation time. This is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member by the time the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the display effect is started. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Then, after the look-ahead reel display effect process (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the look-ahead effect is a special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period during which a special volume setting different from the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) is possible, and when the volume is set by this special volume setting, the volume is set. , The volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the expected degree of jackpot of the changing special symbol and the expected degree of jackpot in the reserved symbol are notified by using a special voice, volume, or display mode.

If it is not determined in S4409 that the look-ahead effect is the special volume setting (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is a special volume setting (S4409: Yes), a display stop type command in which the blank symbol (sub symbol) is changed to the volume symbol is set (S4410). Then, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

Next, other processing related to the look-ahead effect is executed (S4412). Here, as another process, for example, there is a process of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information included in the winning command. After executing the other look-ahead processing of S4412, this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, when a winning command of a special symbol is received from the main control device, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the information included in the winning command. This makes it possible to provide the player with an effect that suggests the result of the judgment based on the prize between the time when the ball wins in the prize opening and the time when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the prize starts. This has the effect of making the player interested in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the look-ahead reel display effect processing (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead reel display effect process (S4408). This look-ahead reel display effect processing (S4408) is a process related to the look-ahead effect performed during the above-mentioned winning effect change process (S1451).

When the look-ahead reel display effect processing is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (sub-third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and the look-ahead stop display information (sub-third symbol based on the winning command) are displayed. (Stop display information) and (S4501). The sub-third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by synthetically displaying the symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Further, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally controlled by the rotational drive of the drive motor 350.

Therefore, the current display information can be acquired by detecting the rotational drive status of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (number of pulses) for rotationally driving the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, is detected, and the location corresponding to the current number of steps is acquired as the current display information from the rotating body operation table.

Further, the acquisition of the look-ahead stop display information means that the stop display symbol of the sub-third symbol based on the winning command is determined from the information included in the winning command, and the stop display symbol is the first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range. It is for acquiring information.

Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the look-ahead stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. 1 to which the current display information corresponds. No. to which the look-ahead stop display information corresponds. Calculate the difference with. In this control example, since the drive motor 350 is configured to be able to rotate forward and reverse, the difference to be calculated is when the drive motor 350 is rotated forward (the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which No. increases. When the drive motor 350 is reversed (when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases), the rotation amount having the smaller difference is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated in S4502 is the rotation amount for rotating the first rotating body more than 1080 degrees (S4503). Here, the amount of rotation of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the first rotating body to make one revolution. That is, in S4503, the No. 1 to which the current display information corresponds. No. to which the look-ahead stop display information corresponds It is determined whether the number of seconds required to move (rotate) to is 3 seconds or more.

When it is determined in the process of S4503 that the rotation amount is the rotation amount to be rotated more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), the No. corresponding to the stop display information. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and shifts to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. 124, No. corresponding to the current information. However, the No. 1 to which the stop display information corresponds in the first error range. No. which needs to be rotated more than 1080 degrees in order to rotate to. In the case of No., the stop display information corresponds to the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less. Since there is, No. corresponding to the stop display information in the processing of S4506. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range, so that the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4503 that the rotation amount is 1080 degrees or less, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, this process is terminated.

Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table includes a table referenced in the effect control process (look-ahead control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Is provided separately from the table referenced.

In S4504, the reel scenario table corresponding to the look-ahead control process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, either the position where the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be visually recognized (exposed position) or the position where the player cannot easily see the reel member (storage position). The reel position is determined to be positioned at, the rotation speed of the reel member, the presence / absence of pre-rotation, and the presence / absence of a notification effect for notifying the player that the look-ahead reel display effect is in progress. A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared, and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on the information included in the winning command, the amount of rotation operation, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

The pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table is No. 1 corresponding to the current display information. No. corresponding to the stop display information from The rotation operation up to is performed not only during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the look-ahead information (information on the look-ahead reel display effect), but also on the winning command including the look-ahead information (information on the look-ahead reel display effect). No. corresponding to the current display information even while other variation display (pre-variation display) executed until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to is started. No. corresponding to the stop display information from It is a control to rotate the reel symbol in advance toward.

This pre-rotation control is based on a pattern in which the rotation movement amount is uniformly rotated for each fluctuation display based on the number of times of the pre-variation display (or the number of reserved symbols), and a rotation movement amount. There is a pattern that rotates at once up to the pre-rotation operation amount set based on, and these are set based on the value acquired from the effect counter and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation display.

By using such a configuration, even if the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the look-ahead information (information of the look-ahead reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the variation display (information on the look-ahead reel display effect). The number of rotations) can be reduced in advance, and the look-ahead reel display effect can be provided to the player without discomfort.

When performing the above-mentioned pre-rotation, the effect pattern of raising the reel to the exposed position to perform the pre-rotation and lowering the reel to the storage position again and the pre-rotation with the reel positioned to the storage position. It is advisable to provide both an effect pattern to perform the above.

With this configuration, in the former effect pattern, by performing pre-rotation at the exposed position, the player is notified that the look-ahead reel display effect is being performed, and the player is expected. In the latter effect pattern, which allows the player to play a game, by performing the pre-rotation at the storage position, it is possible to carry out the content of the pre-rotation without noticing the player, as if it were an arbitrary pattern. It is possible to make it appear as if (stop display at No. corresponding to stop display information) is displayed quickly.

Further, the notification effect of notifying the player that the look-ahead reel display effect is in progress is an effect of swinging and driving the accommodating body 300, which is a reel member, at the storage position, and a plurality of notification effects are obtained based on the value acquired from the effect counter. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

A game state or a game result may be added as a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the pattern of the production, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as about 1 second per lap, in reality, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low-speed rotation and medium-speed rotation can be performed. It is configured so that high-speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the processing of S4503, the stop display information corresponds to No. 1 based on the rotation speed in the case of low-speed rotation. Is provided with a correction boundary value (1080 degrees) for correcting from the first error range to the second error range.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player stop display the stop display information regardless of the rotation speed set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

In this control example, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the look-ahead stop display information is larger than the predetermined amount, and if it is larger than the predetermined amount, it is set based on the look-ahead stop display information. No. where the stop display symbol is displayed. Is configured to be acquired from within the second error range, but the stop display symbol may be set from within the first error range or within the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the look-ahead reel display effect as the look-ahead effect is started, or until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. It may be possible to set whether to acquire the stop display symbol from the first error range or the second error range based on the time. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably display the stop display information to the player.

Further, in this control example, this process is configured as an effect process based on the reception of a winning command (so-called look-ahead effect process). For example, an effect process based on the reception of a variation pattern command. This process may be used as the above. With this configuration, it is possible to determine which error range the stop display symbol is set based on based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, and there is a problem that the stop display cannot be made in time within the fluctuation time. It becomes possible to suppress it.

In addition to this, it may be used for an effect executed based on the player operating the frame button 22. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the display screen of the third symbol marking device 81 performs variable display of the third symbol, and the player operates the frame button 22. , It is conceivable that the variation display of the third symbol is changed to the mode using the reel member.

Even when such an effect is executed, the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed in the variable display of the third symbol using the reel member during the variable display of the special symbol. When the effect of switching to the variable display is used, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member can be set from the first error range and the second error range as in this control example. If there is a margin in the remaining fluctuation time of the symbol, it can be set from within the first error range, and if there is no margin in the fluctuation time, it can be set from the second error range, so the stop display can be made in time within the fluctuation time. By providing a second error range, it is possible to suppress problems such as not being present, and even when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol is reduced, the display mode of the third symbol can be changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member. It is possible to change to the display using.

Further, in this control example, the symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol (rotating body symbol) compositely displayed by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are each the first. Although it is used as three symbols, for example, only the liquid crystal symbol may be used as the third symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as a directing symbol (a symbol that does not directly correspond to the variable display of the special symbol), or the liquid crystal symbol. May be used as the effect symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. Further, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotating body symbol during one variation display. With this configuration, it is possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of the volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process 2 (S1352). The volume setting process 2 (S1352) differs from the volume setting process (S1314) described above in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be ON is added, and the other parts are the same. be. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601). When it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not on (S4601: No), the volume setting process (S1314) described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set to on (S4602). When the special volume setting flag 223β is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether the volume symbol is selected by the player (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the volume symbol is not selected (S4603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume symbol is selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). .. Next, the special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

When the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the volume level controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 is switched from the volume level in the normal game to the special volume level during the special volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect ends and the game returns to the normal game, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate troublesome operations such as the player resetting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 to a volume level suitable for a normal game.

Returning to the process of S4602, when it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is on (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). When it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is raised to set the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and a display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a is not pressed (S4607: No), then it is determined whether the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610).

If it is determined in the process of S4610 that the lower selection switch 291b is not pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to the special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered to set the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and the display indicating the special volume level is displayed. Set the command (S4612). Next, the special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

The special volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process for managing the period in which the special volume is set, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. After the process of S4606 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the special volume setting period management process (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management process (S4606).

In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701). Here, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4701: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is determined by receiving the stop command set in S300 of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 110.

In this control example, the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device are given identification information that can be linked, and the winning command is indicated by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the identification information. It is configured to associate the winning information with the stop command, but other configurations may be used. For example, the area in which the prize information including the information of the special volume setting effect is stored is stored in the prize information storage area, and the area in which the prize information including the information of the special volume setting effect is stored is shifted to the execution area. It may be configured to manage things.

Returning to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4702 that there is no stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set (not yet received) (S4702: No), this processing is terminated because the volume setting period is still in effect. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a stop command (received) corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set, the special volume level is cleared (S4703) and the display of the special volume setting screen is cleared. Is set (S4704). Next, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to off (S4705), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect is set as the special volume level, and can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level. Has been done. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect ends and the game returns to the normal game, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect starts (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area). It will be possible to return to the ready.

Next, the details of the special effect processing (S1353) specified by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect processing (S1353).

In the special effect processing, it is first determined whether the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). When it is determined that the current effect mode is not mode A (S4801: No), the process shifts to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is mode A (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the mini game is in progress (S4802). Here, the mini-game is a game effect shown in FIG. 120 (a) in which a player obtains points by operating an operating means (frame button 22, touch switch 290, selection switch 291).

If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the mini game is not in progress (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mini-game is in progress (S4802: Yes), points corresponding to the result of the mini-game are added to the earned points storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the earned points is set (S4804). ). Then, it shifts to S4805.

Next, it is determined whether the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect in which points can be obtained by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). If it is determined in the process of S4805 that it is not a specific effect (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a specific effect (S4805: Yes), points corresponding to the specific effect are added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

As described above, in the special effect processing when the effect mode is mode A, a process of adding points acquired by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect is performed. In addition, another method may be used as a method in which the player can acquire points during the effect mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that a predetermined password can be input and points are added by the player inputting and operating the predetermined password, or the game result (number of big hits or acquisition). It may be configured so that points are added based on the ball).

Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing (S4802 to S4807) when the effect mode is mode A is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode B (S4808). When it is determined that the effect mode is not mode B (S4808: No), the process shifts to S4811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode is mode B (S4808: Yes), then the dog type is selected from the dog type selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating the dog breed is set (S4810), and the process proceeds to S4811.

As described above, in the special effect processing when the effect mode is mode B, a process of selecting a dog type to be used in mode C, which will be described later, is performed based on the points acquired during mode A. In this control example, by selecting a specific dog breed from a plurality of dog breeds, the content of the setting performed during the mode C (the reliability of the production and the type of the production for setting the reliability) is changed. However, even if it is configured so that the player can select the type of setting performed in mode C and the degree of increase in reliability based on the points acquired in mode A in mode B. good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to expand the range that the player can select as the number of points acquired during the mode A increases. By doing so, the player will actively acquire points, and it will be possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing (S4809 to S4810) when the effect mode is mode B is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not mode C (S4811: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is C (S4811: Yes), the effect corresponding to the dog breed set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-mentioned special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is mode C can be changed (custom setting) with respect to the second control example described above (special effect). With regard to, since the type of production that is the target of custom setting and the degree of increase in the reliability of the production can be changed based on the points acquired when the production mode is mode A, which pachinko machine 10 is Even when staying in the production mode, the player can always participate in the game production, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the details of the shaking control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the shaking control process 2 (S1354).

In the shaking control process 2, it is first determined whether or not the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). When it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operating flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902).

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the fluctuation pattern is not a shaking effect (S4902: No), another shaking control process (S4911) is executed, and this process is terminated. The other shaking control process executed in S4911 is the shaking control process (S1316) shown in FIG. 95.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S49028 that the fluctuation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902: Yes), initial operation data for driving the arm member 444 (movable accessory) in a predetermined mode is set (S4902: Yes). S4903), the operating flag is set to on (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the movable accessory is read, and the shaking information of the movable accessory is acquired (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator based on the information of the acceleration sensor is set (S4906). The indicator corresponding to the display command set here becomes the indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a).

When the process of S4906 is executed, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated next (S4907). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the shaking operation data from the shaking operation table (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor. To set. Then, it is determined whether or not the shaking effect is completed (S4909).

If it is determined that the shaking effect has not been completed (S4909: No), this process is terminated, while if it is determined that the shaking effect has been completed (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. Set (S4910) and end this process.

As described above, in the shaking control process 2 in this control example, the operating state of the movable accessory is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable accessory) and operated by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operating means) and the operating status of the movable accessory, the movable accessory can be moved in the direction in which it swings greatly (movable direction), or the movable accessory can be moved in the direction in which it swings slightly (movable). Since it is configured to use the swinging motion (movable motion) table 2 to set whether or not to move in the direction), the variable member is actually controlled to be movable based on the operation of the player. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to positively operate the operating means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for notifying the timing at which the player operates the operation means is provided by the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation status of the movable accessory acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor. Since it is configured to be displayable on the display screen, the player can operate the operation means while watching the operation timing notification display, so that the movable accessory can perform a desired movable operation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 with the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and the MPU 231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed as one unit of the time when the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the fluctuation display by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning, and the number of reserved balls. The case of including it in the command has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is input to the voice lamp by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first winning opening 64, in which the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13, is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 so that the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, and the first entry port is used. The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 66 or 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an embodiment (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to set a normal gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low and a probabilistic gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high as the gaming state, and it is easier to hit the normal symbol. A pachinko machine that can set a time-saving state that is a gaming state and a normal state in which a normal symbol is harder to hit than the time-saving state is used, but it may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like that has other gaming states. For example, when the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the probability fluctuation state, acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is advantageous for the player even if the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is wrong. It may be possible to set the second probability variation game state in which the state (so-called small hit) is set with a higher probability than usual. It should be noted that the small hit is a state in which the ball can be won in the variable winning device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is out of the question.

With this configuration, the player who has entered the probabilistic gaming state will play the game aiming at the second probabilistic gaming state, which is a state that is more advantageous for the player, and will get tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, when the second probabilistic gaming state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of hit / fail judgments of the special symbol executed during the probabilistic game state, and when the number of hit / fail judgments exceeds the limit. May be configured to shift from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state. With this configuration, if the probabilistic game state is reached as in the past, the probabilistic game state will not continue until the next big hit, so even during the probabilistic game state, concentrate on the player. You can play a game.

When the second probabilistic gaming state is set for a pachinko machine or the like in which the number of hit / fail judgments is limited for the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state in this way, the player can obtain more balls during the second probabilistic gaming state. You will be aware of big hits and small hits. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on playing the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when using a gaming machine capable of setting the second probabilistic gaming state, it is preferable to provide a plurality of third symbol display devices and switch the device for displaying the variation of the third symbol according to the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the surrounding players that the game is being played in the most advantageous gaming state for the player, such as the second probabilistic gaming state, and the player is satisfied. Can be provided.

As a plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in this control example and the reel member provided in the rotating body elevating unit 300 (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body). It is preferable to use a member (member) in which the third symbol is synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of 340b, and a plurality of third symbols are variablely displayed by rotating each rotating body. With this configuration, the variable display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the difference in appearance can be clarified.

Further, by controlling the elevating of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the rotating body elevating unit 300 can be moved to an exposed position (a position that covers at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) that can be visually recognized by the player, or the player can move the rotating body elevating unit 300 to an exposed position (a position that covers at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device). Since it is possible to move it to a storage position that is difficult to see (a position that is stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the variation display of the third symbol in the second probability variation game state is reeled. By configuring the members to perform the game, it is possible to make the player aware that the rotating body elevating unit 300 is playing the game in the second probabilistic game state only by being located at the exposed position, and the player is satisfied. Can provide a feeling.

Further, as the elevating control of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the rotating body elevating unit 300 performs an operation of moving back and forth between the storage position and the exposed position, thereby producing an effect of suggesting the current gaming state to the player. Since it can be performed, it is possible to provide a production that gives the player a sense of expectation.

Further, in the second probability variation game state, the reel member displays a variable display suggesting whether or not the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit on the third symbol display device 81, and the hit / miss judgment result of the special symbol is a small hit on the reel member. It is also possible to execute a variable display suggesting whether or not it is. With this configuration, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member on which the variable display suggesting whether or not it is a small hit in the first half period of the second probability variation game state is performed, and the latter half of the second probability variation game state. At the time of the period, attention will be paid to the third symbol display device 81, which performs a variable display suggesting whether or not it is a big hit. This has the effect that the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

It should be noted that, using different display devices, a variable display suggesting whether or not the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit and a variable display suggesting whether the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a small hit are used. When displaying at the same time, one of them may be displayed as a third symbol and the other may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Further, instead of displaying the fluctuation of the symbol, a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, an effect using only a sound or a lamp, or the like may be performed to suggest a pass / fail determination result. Further, the display device that is variablely displayed may be switched based on the determination result of the special symbol.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the left and right sensor device 600 as an example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate arranged on the front side of the game board at intervals through which a game medium can pass, and displacement toward the back side of the game board. It is provided with a displacement member that is possibly arranged and visible to the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position where the displacement member overlaps at least a part of a detection region of the sensor device.

Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the front of the game board (plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from the object is provided, and the optical sensor is used by the player. Those that detect the presence or movement of fingers are known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-09434). In this case, the path of the light (irradiation light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap the moving region of the displaceable member formed so as to be displaceable (for example, paragraph 0045 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-09434). And Fig. 5 etc.). Therefore, the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and there is a problem that the displacement member cannot be effectively used.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device, the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection area of the sensor device. Can be done. That is, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, and is, for example, an optical sensor device (an irradiation means that irradiates light consisting of visible light or invisible light, and an object (object) that is irradiated from the irradiation means. A light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light is provided, and the light received is evaluated). As a method for evaluating the received light, a triangular ranging method that converts the image formation position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence or absence (distance) of the object or the time required from the irradiation of the light to the reception of the light is performed. An example is a time-of-flight formula that converts light into the presence / absence (distance) of an object.

In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at predetermined intervals from each other, and the displacement member includes a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A game machine A2 characterized in that it can be displaced to a position for partitioning.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced at a position separating the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, so that the displacement member can be displaced on the front surface of the transparent plate. , These two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation of causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

On the other hand, by retracting the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the division of these two detection areas by the displacement member can be released. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor, and the first sensor is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection areas of the detection area and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displacement member can be displaced in a region overlapping with at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of at least one of the detection areas of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his / her hand or finger, the player can be made to search for the detection area.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can use both the means for detecting the object on the front surface side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. .. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a light emitting means formed so as to be capable of emitting light is provided, and the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

Since the gaming machine A5 is provided with a light emitting means capable of emitting light, it is possible to produce an effect by emitting light of the light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emission of the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device, it is possible to suppress the light emission of the light emitting means from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, since the displacement member can also be used as a member for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Further, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielded position and a space can be secured. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced. can.

In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member receives light emitted from the light emitting means into the sensor device according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded.

According to the gaming machine A6, since a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. It is possible to suppress the light reception. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of shielding the light emission of any of the light emitting means from the plurality of light emitting means is provided, a large space is required for the arrangement of the member. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

The game machine A5 or A6 includes a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the game board so as to be visible through the opening of the game board and to which the light emitting means is arranged. The displacement member is characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emission from the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device according to the displacement position of the second displacement member. Displacement machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is arranged on the second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at different positions according to the displacement of the second displacement member. .. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device according to the displacement position of the second displacement member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted from the sensor device. It is possible to suppress the light reception. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A5 or A6, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of shielding the light emission of the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is provided for the arrangement of the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged opposite to each other at predetermined intervals, and the first sensor or the second sensor is provided. Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive the light, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to see. At the same time, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, fat on the player's hand).

For example, in a configuration in which the sensor device 1 is arranged at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is emitted diagonally to the transparent plate, the sensor device is viewed from the front. Can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and an object (for example, the player's hand or finger) existing on the front side of the transparent plate can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the gaming board. It can be difficult for the player to see. In this case, when the light emitted from either the first sensor or the second sensor is reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor, and the transparent plate is dirty. In the absence of, the light emitted from either the first sensor or the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor. This makes it possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate.

It is preferable that the first sensor and the second sensor detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate in the process when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, since the player is not in the store, it is not necessary to distinguish between the object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and the dirt on the transparent plate. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is characterized in that an absorbent material capable of absorbing the irradiated light is disposed on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbent material capable of absorbing the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member, so that the front side of the transparent plate can be used. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified to suppress the control load.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is characterized in that a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light. Machine A10.

According to the game machine A10, in any of the game machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed from a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light at a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. , It is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member, so that the front side of the transparent plate can be used. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified to suppress the control load.

Further, since the above portion of the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to the object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. As a result, the displacement member can be displaced while securing the detection area of the sensor device.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is formed with a reflective surface on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device to reflect the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member reflects the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device in a direction different from that of the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member, so that the front side of the transparent plate can be used. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified to suppress the control load.

<Concept of the invention using the central floating unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displaceable member, a first member displaced relative to the displaceable member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displaced member, the displaced member is The gaming machine B1 is provided with a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

Here, it is known that a displaceable displacement member is provided and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. Further, there is also one in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member and the first member is rotated to enhance the effect of the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above-mentioned one, there is a problem that the first member rotates while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the movement of the first member is hardly changed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement members are provided with a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected to each other. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

Further, since the displacement member is connected so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the arm member, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is displaced relative to the arm member and both are displaced by independent displacements, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. Can be done, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

As the form of displacement of the arm member, for example, a form of rotating around the other end side, a form of sliding displacement on the other end side, and a form of combining these (one of the arm members rotates and the other slide displacement). , The form to be adopted respectively) is exemplified.

Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, a shaft arranged on one of the arm member or the first member is a shaft in a shaft hole arranged on the other. A form in which the supported shaft can be displaced relative to the shaft hole by rotating the shaft, and a pin arranged on one of the arm members or the first member slides along a sliding groove arranged on the other. A form in which relative displacement is possible by doing so, a form in which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member and the elastic member is elastically deformed so that relative displacement is possible, and the arm member and the first member are arranged on one of the arm members or the first member. A form in which the spherical ball is arranged on the other side and can be relatively displaced by rotating in an arbitrary direction with respect to the stud in spherical contact with the ball, and the arm member and the first member have one or more link mechanisms (not deformed). Examples thereof include a form in which the nodes are connected via a joint which is a movable part) and the link mechanism is deformed to enable relative displacement, and a form in which each of these forms is combined.

In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported by the other end opposite to one end on which the first member is dislocated so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the driving means causes the pair of arm members to be rotatably supported. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is rotated around the other end.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are driven by rotatably supporting one end of the pair of arm members and the other end of the opposite side so as to be relatively displaceable. Since it is rotated around the other end by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along an arcuate locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to impart a motion that combines linear motion and rotary motion to the first member, and it is possible to give a change to the motion.

The pair of arm members may have the same distance from one end to the other end, or may have different lengths.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. The pin portion to be formed is arranged, and the sliding groove is formed by one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where at least the arm member is arranged at a reference position. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and the sliding groove has at least the arm member at the reference position. In the arranged state, a gap is formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion, so that even if the arm member is stopped, the first member can be displaced by the gap. It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. This makes it possible to change the movement of the first member.

For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at a reference position, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. It is possible to form a displacement that reciprocates. As a result, after the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the first member can be reciprocated (swayed).

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the sliding groove is formed in the first member and a pair of linear grooves are arranged in a non-parallel manner in the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged in a non-parallel manner, so that the displacement of the arm member is displaced. When the first member is displaced relative to the arm member by the amount of the gap between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin after being stopped at the reference position, that A rotation component can be added to the relative displacement. This makes it possible to change the movement of the first member.

Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. At the same time, the load on the drive means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially C shape.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially C-shape, so that after the reciprocating movement of the first member converges and stops, the stopped state is reached. The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the first member retracted to the retracted position from rattling due to disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported by the other end on the opposite side to the one end on which the first member is arranged so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the driving means causes the pair of arm members to be rotatably supported. Rotated around the other end, the sliding groove is formed linearly and is disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member. Game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are driven by rotatably supporting one end of the pair of arm members and the other end of the opposite side so as to be relatively displaceable. Since it is rotated around the other end by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along an arcuate locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to impart a motion that combines linear motion and rotary motion to the first member, and it is possible to give a change to the motion.

In this case, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and is arranged at one end of the arm member and the pin portion is arranged on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove is determined according to the rotation angle of the arm member ( The tilt direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially C shape or in a straight line. As a result, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of inertial force, when the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape, the first member While making it possible to add a rotational component to the movement, the reciprocating movement can be quickly converged toward the center of the V shape, and when the sliding grooves are arranged in a straight line, the first member The movement can be limited to the linear component.

Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. At the same time, the load on the drive means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion allows the movement of the first member by the action of gravity. The gaming machine B7, which is characterized in that it is arranged in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion is the first member due to the action of gravity. As the movement of the first member, in addition to the movement driven by the displacement of the arm member, the movement of the first member that does not follow the displacement of the arm member and is free-falled by the action of gravity can be formed. .. This makes it possible to change the movement of the first member.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member is attached to a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably arranged in the main body portion, and the driven portion thereof. The gaming machine B8 comprising a second driving means for applying a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of an arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably arranged in the main body portion, and a driven portion. Since the driven portion is provided with the second driving means for applying the driving force, it is possible to perform an effect of relative displacement of the driven portion with respect to the main body portion by the driving force of the second driving means. In this case, a reaction force due to the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, so that the reaction force can form a displacement that reciprocates the pin portion toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. can. As a result, the main body portion (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) while the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

In the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means, so that the arm When the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body to displace the main body in a state where the displacement of the member is stopped, it is possible to easily generate a rotation component in the movement of the main body.

Examples of the shape of the driven portion include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and a long shape. In this case, the center of gravity of the driven portion may be eccentric from the center of rotation (position pivotally supported by the main body portion). As a result, the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit can be increased, and the fluctuation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body unit.

In the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions, so that the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving portion is applied to the rotation of the main body portion. It can be easily connected to movement.

The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first member.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B10, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first member. By such contact, both the regulation of the movement of the first member and the change of the movement of the first member can be achieved. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first member, so that the first member is displaced (reciprocating) by the inertial force generated by the stop of the arm member. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, in a state where the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member and the first member is bounced off, whereby the first member is displaced relative to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced or a mode in which the first member is displaced in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member.

Further, when the first member includes a main body portion and a driven portion, by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the main body portion, the main body portion is maintained in a stopped state and only the driven portion is displaced. Can be made to. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the main body portion is displaced together with the driven portion by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion and a mode in which only the driven portion is displaced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B11, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, a magnet is arranged on one of the first member or the second displacement member, and the first member or the first member or the first member. 2 A magnet or an iron member is arranged on the other side of the displacement member, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A game machine B12 characterized by being displaced.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B11, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the second displacement member is provided on either the first member or the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force is applied between the magnet and the magnet or the iron member disposed on the other side of the first member or the second displacement member, the action of the magnetic force regulates the movement of the first member or or The first member can be displaced. For example, by stopping the arm member at a reference position and then moving the second displacement member close to the first member, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of a magnetic force. Since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of the magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other, and both can be made non-contact, so that damage can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by a driving means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In a gaming machine that is provided with at least the above and allows the player to visually recognize the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the driving force of the driving means is formed so as to be able to be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to be different from each other.

Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated and drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a figure and a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotating body is independently rotated and driven by the first drive motor (driving means), and the second rotating body is independently rotated by the second drive motor, and the figure of the first rotating body visually recognized by the player. And the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, since the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine requires the same number of drive motors as the rotating body, there is a problem that the cost increases accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission means sets the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body are different. Since it is formed so as to be able to transmit to, even with one driving means, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed. That is, the required number of drive means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The different rotational states of one rotating body and the other rotating body include, for example, a state in which the rotational speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated and the other is rotated. The state in which the rotating body of the above is stopped is exemplified. The rotation speed does not have to be constant and may be increased or decreased.

Further, as a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body, for example, characters, patterns, colors, patterns, or a combination thereof are exemplified. In this case, the figure may be a part of a character or a pattern (a character or a pattern that is combined with another figure to form one character or a pattern), or the whole figure (the figure alone forms one character or a pattern). Things) may be.

In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. The rotation cycle and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body can be made different. Therefore, even with the driving means of 1, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

Further, since the transmission means has a configuration in which the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different, the structure of the transmitting means can be simplified.

Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism that transmits rotation by meshing (gear transmission mechanism and chain transmission mechanism) and a mechanism that transmits rotation by friction (friction transmission mechanism and belt transmission mechanism). The gear transmission mechanism includes spur gears, worms and worm gears, bevel gears, or racks and pinions, the chain transmission mechanism includes chains and sprockets, the friction transmission mechanism includes friction gears, and the belt transmission mechanism. , Pulleys and belts are exemplified respectively.

In this case, a mechanism for transmitting rotation between the rotating shaft of the first rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means and between the rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means by the above-mentioned meshing. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and in one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the rotating shaft thereof is directly connected to the driving shaft of the driving means, and the first rotating body and the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the second rotating body are directly connected to each other. A mechanism for transmitting rotation by meshing or a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided between the other rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means. In the latter case, the number of parts (gears, etc.) for constituting the mechanism for transmitting rotation can be suppressed, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine C2, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are in a state in which the other phase is deviated from one phase at the viewing position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being stopped at.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear can be increased, and it is required to make the desired combination of figures appear. It is possible to suppress the number of rotations and make it appear in a short time.

That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player, it is required that the phases of both of the two rotating bodies match. As the number of possible shapes decreases, the number of revolutions required to reveal the desired combination of shapes increases (the table becomes longer). On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, the other phase is deviated from one phase of both rotating bodies. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and it is possible to suppress the number of rotations required to make the desired combination of figures appear and make them appear in a short time. can.

In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is curved in an arc shape which is convex outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferable. This is because even if there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body stopped at the visible position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

In the game machine C1, the transmission means includes a first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and a second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the drive means to the second rotating body. At least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes at least two gears that are meshable with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. The gaming machine C4 is characterized by comprising a meshing region for transmitting rotation and a non-matching region for blocking the transmission of rotation with the meshing of the other gear as non-gating.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means comprises at least two gears that are geared together and one of those two gears meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation to the meshing region and the other. Since it is provided with a non-engagement region in which the meshing with the gear is non-engaged and the transmission of rotation is blocked, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped and the other is rotated, and the first rotation. A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even with the driving means of 1, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

Further, as described above, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, stop the rotation of one of them, and release the stop to restart the rotation. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body.

Both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshed region and a non-engaged region. It may be provided with. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state in which both stop, a state in which one stops and the other rotates, and a state in which one rotates and the other stops. ..

In the game machine C4, only one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-engagement region, and the formation range of the non-engagement region is the first rotating body or the first rotating body. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is set corresponding to the space between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, since only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means has a gear having a toothed region and a non-toothed region, the driving means is driven. In the present state, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, and the other is maintained in rotation. In this case, the formation range of the non-engaged region is set corresponding to the space between the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other of the first rotating body or the second rotating body, and thus is the same as the figure of the first rotating body. The length of the table whose element is the combination with the figure of the second rotating body can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation speeds of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to bring out the desired combination of figures. That is, the time required to bring out the desired combination of figures can be shortened.

It should be noted that the formation range of the non-mating region is set corresponding to the space between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other, that one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is set by the non-gating region. While stopped, it means that the other is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1). In particular, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because the length of the table described above can be minimized to minimize the number of rotations required to bring out the desired combination of figures.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, the transmission means has a forward transmission means for transmitting the forward rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a positive direction of the driving means. The reverse direction transmitting means for transmitting the rotation in the opposite direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the positive rotation of the driving means when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction. Allows transmission to the directional transmission means, blocks transmission to the reverse transmission means, and when the drive means is rotated in the opposite direction, transmits the rotation of the drive means to the forward transmission means. The gaming machine C6 is provided with a switching means that shuts off and allows transmission to the reverse transmission means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, when the driving means is rotated in the positive direction, the switching means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the positive direction transmitting means. If it is permissible and the transmission to the reverse transmission means is blocked, and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the switching means blocks the transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward transmission means. Since transmission to the reverse direction transmitting means is allowed together with the above, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation that the player visually recognizes depending on whether the driving means is rotated in the forward direction or in the opposite direction. The type of combination with the body shape can be different. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily select two types of tables by changing the rotation direction of the driving means to two types of tables whose elements are the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body. can do.

As the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means, the first structure described in the game machine C2 or C3 (a structure in which the rotation ratios of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are different), the game machine C4 or the game machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by a non-engagement region), and a second structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. It can be arbitrarily selected from the three structures.

For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse transmission means is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means. For example, the case where the first structure is selected or the case where the second structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means are exemplified. In the former case, the rotation ratio is different between the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means, and in the latter case, the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means have a toothed region and a non-toothed region. The formation ratio of is different. Also in this case, there are two types of tables whose elements are the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, the two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected. It can be possible.

Further, the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the opposite direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that the directions are the same. This is because it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the rotation direction of the drive means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, a light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided, and the outer circumference of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided. The gaming machine C7, characterized in that at least a portion of the surface is formed of a light transmissive material.

According to the game machine C7, in any of the game machines C1 to C6, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light transmitting material, so that the first The light emission of the light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body can be visually recognized by the player.

It should be noted that the light emitting means may be made to emit light at all times or under predetermined conditions. As a predetermined condition, for example, when the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body form a specific combination, and when either the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped, the stop is performed. For example, when the rotation is restarted before or after the execution of.

In the game machine C7, the front surface is formed in an open box shape, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is accommodated through the open portion of the front surface. The gaming machine C8 is provided with an accommodating body that allows the player to visually recognize the figure drawn in the above.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the front surface is formed in an open box shape, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the first rotation is performed through the front open portion. Since the housing body is provided so that the player can visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the body and the second rotating body, the light emission of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player by using the housing body. That is, the light emission of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player in a manner different from the case where the light emission is directly visually recognized. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the inner wall surface of the accommodating body to be visually recognized by the player, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall portion of the accommodating body to irradiate a predetermined object. Examples thereof include a mode in which a player visually recognizes a predetermined object together with a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from a light emitting means is incident on the wall portion of the accommodating body to emit light in a predetermined portion of the accommodating body (for example, an end face on the front surface). To.

In each of the above embodiments, for example, a specific figure among a plurality of figures drawn on at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is the back side of the first rotating body or the second rotating body (that is, that is). It is preferably executed when it is placed in a position (invisible to the player). A specific figure placed in a position invisible to the player is associated with the player by the light emission of the light emitting means (the first rotating body or the second rotating body makes the specific figure visible). Because it can be expected to be rotated). In particular, it is preferable that the light emission of the light emitting means is executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped.

In the gaming machines C1 to C8, the accommodating body in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the effect position and the game in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body can visually recognize the accommodating body. The gaming machine C9 is provided with a moving means for moving to and from a retracted position that cannot be seen by a person.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the accommodation body in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are housed, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are the players. Since the moving means for moving between the effect position visible from the player and the retracted position invisible to the player is provided, a desired combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body can be selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body relatively many times in order to bring out the desired combination, and where it takes a long time, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated by the moving means. Since the body can be moved to a retracted position that cannot be seen by the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated to a predetermined rotating position in advance at such a retracted position, whereby. When the required timing arrives, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved to the effect position by the moving means, and the desired combination can be quickly displayed.

The gaming machine C9 is provided with an operating means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at the retracted position and the operating means is operated. Characteristic gaming machine C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C9, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged in the retracted position and the operating means is operated, so that the first rotation is performed. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance at the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the rotation.

That is, since a relatively loud sound is generated when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, even if the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the retracted position and made invisible to the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the second rotating body and the second rotating body are made invisible. The rotation may be recognized by the player due to the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be performed by being mixed with the operation of the operating means, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. can.

As the operating means, for example, a payout device, a voice generator, and the like are exemplified. That is, in a state where the game medium is paid out by the payout device, a relatively loud sound is generated along with the payout operation of the game medium. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like. The same applies to the state in which voice is being generated from the voice generator. Further, instead of or in addition to this, when a predetermined display is performed on the display device, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like.

<Concept of the invention using LED344 as an example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means arranged inside the rotating body, and the rotation thereof. In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body in which a body is rotatably accommodated and a figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is visually recognized by a player through an open portion on the front surface, light is emitted from the light emitting means of the rotating body. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that the light transmitted from the outer wall is reflected by the housing and is visually recognized by the player.

Here, a rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means arranged inside the rotating body, and a light emitting means. A gaming machine is known that includes an accommodating body in which a rotating body is rotatably accommodated, and allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -220215 (publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the light of the light emitting means passes through the outer wall of the rotating body which is visible from the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, and is only directly visible to the player. There was a problem that the effect of light was not effectively exhibited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the accommodating body and visually recognized by the player, so that the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is transmitted. The light can be visually recognized by the player in a manner different from the case of directly visually recognizing it, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a transmissive portion formed of a light-transmitting material and transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a material capable of reflecting light. A reflective portion is formed to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means into the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion provide an irradiation region of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body is rotated. A game machine D2 characterized by being passable.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body has a transmitting portion for transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body and the light emitted from the light emitting means. A reflecting portion that reflects the inside of the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation region of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body is rotated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means. It is possible to form a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside and a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted to the outside from the transmitting portion, and each of these forms is a rotating body. It can be switched with the rotation of. That is, two light emitting forms can be formed with only one light emitting means, and for example, the position of the light visually recognized by the player is switched to at least two places without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, it is possible to effectively exert the effect of light production while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a posture of irradiating light toward the open portion of the front surface of the housing.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture of irradiating the light toward the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. In the embodiment in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, the light can be visually recognized by the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In the form in which the light is reflected by the portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, the light cannot be visually recognized from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the accommodating body is transmitted. It can be visually recognized by the player around the rotating body. As a result, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched as the rotating body rotates, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be significantly different. As a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited. can.

A gaming machine D4, wherein in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the accommodating body is visually recognized by the player around the rotating body, the light is emitted. The size of the area to be visually recognized can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively. The gaming machine D5 characterized in that it is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged substantially parallel to the first rotating body, and the first of them. Since the rotating body and the second rotating body are each formed as a triangular columnar body having a triangular cross section, the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body (as the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body occurs). The facing interval) can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the accommodating body is transmitted from the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When the player visually recognizes the light, the size of the area where the light can be visually recognized can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided with the reflective portion on the inner surface of the outer wall forming the outer surface of one of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. The gaming machine D6, wherein the transmission portion is disposed on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is on the inner surface of the outer wall forming the outer surface of one of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflecting portion is arranged and the transmitting portion is arranged on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In the case of making it, light can be transmitted to the outside from two outer surfaces (transmitting portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different points on the inner wall surface of the accommodating body to be visually recognized by the player, or the light transmitted from one of the transmissive portions is directly visible to the player and transmitted from the other transmissive portion. The generated light can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the housing so that the player can visually recognize it, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D6, the accommodating body is formed in a box-shaped body having an open front surface, and a reflective portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is formed on the inner wall surface on the back surface side of the box-shaped body. The gaming machine D7, characterized in that it is arranged in a range beyond the outer shape of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the accommodating body is formed in a box-shaped body having an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is made of a material capable of reflecting light. Since the reflecting portion to be formed is arranged in a range exceeding the outer shape of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In addition, the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is visually recognized by the player in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. At the same time, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exerted.

In the game machine D7, the accommodating body is an inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body, and can reflect light on the inner wall surface facing parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflective portion formed of various materials is arranged.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7, the accommodating body is an inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body and faces parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Since a reflective portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is arranged on the inner wall surface, the light reflected by the inner wall surface on the back side of the accommodating body is further reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface side and visually recognized by the player. At the same time, the light transmitted from the transmitting portion can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface side of the accommodating body to be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

<Characteristic E group> (AQ mode)
It is possible to dynamically display the identification information on the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information. The identification information is configured to show the determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and the first rotating body thereof. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the rotating body, a rotation control means for rotating and controlling the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a first gaming state and the first game state thereof. When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the second gaming state different from the gaming state and the state setting means, the identification information is used in combination. The determination result by the determination means is shown, and when the second game state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are the determination results by the determination means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a switching setting means for switching and setting as shown in the above.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of displaying a symbol by combining a plurality of symbols by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbol on a liquid crystal screen. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-23040). However, even in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player is bored because only the game of constantly rotating the rotating body to display the symbol is performed. The gaming machine E1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine E1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display means for displaying the identification information. A dynamic display means capable of displaying a target, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information. The identification information is configured to show the determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface thereof. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the first rotating body, a rotation controlling means for rotating and controlling the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a first gaming state. And a state setting means capable of setting at least one of a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and when the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, the identification. The determination result by the determination means is shown by the combination of information, and when the second gaming state is set, the determination is made by the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means. It has a switching setting means for switching and setting so as to show a determination result by the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 has a variable means for varying the first rotating body and the second rotating body into a visible first position and a second position that is more difficult to see than the first position, and the variable means thereof. When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, the means has the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the second position as compared with the case where the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by being easy to change.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the variable means based on the gaming state.

As a result, it is possible to assume the game state depending on the positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body becomes a specific combination, the display means has an effect executing means for executing a specific effect. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to perform an effect based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. , It becomes possible to associate the effect with the symbol display means and the display means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the driving transmission means for transmitting the driving force for rotating the first rotation and the second rotating body is provided, and the driving transmitting means includes the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The gaming machine E4 characterized in that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the driving transmission means. Therefore, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, the acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition means, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied. When the storage means for storing the information, the pre-determination means for executing the determination of the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the second gaming state are set. The gaming machine is characterized by having a determination means for determining a combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body based on the determination result of the prior determination means. E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are played. That is, since the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is determined based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the time until the determined combination of the symbols is displayed is secured. can do.

This makes it possible to provide the player with an effect by using, for example, the time until it is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E5, when the combination of symbols determined by the determination means is determined, the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the advance determination means is dynamically displayed in advance. The gaming machine E6 is characterized by having a pre-rotating means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, by a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are used by the time the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the pre-determining means is started. Since it is possible to rotate the slingshot by a predetermined amount, there is an effect that the combination of symbols determined by the determining means can be reliably displayed.

<Feature F group> (Volume is displayed at the time of demonstration)
A determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and a sound based on the effect executed by the effect execution means are output. In a gaming machine having a voice output means to be operated, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a volume setting means that sets a volume based on the operation of the operation means, the effect execution means is used. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a setting means for effectively setting an operation by the operation means in a specific period of the period in which the effect is executed.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine equipped with an audio output device and capable of setting the volume of audio for producing a game or the like has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-237647). .. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only when the game-based effect is not executed, and when the game-based effect is executed, an unintended volume of sound is output. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the gaming machine F1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game at a volume desired by the player.

According to the gaming machine F1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means for executing the effect. A gaming machine having a voice output means for outputting a voice based on an effect, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a volume setting means for setting a volume based on the operation of the operation means. In the period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing means, the setting means for effectively setting the operation by the operation means in a specific period is provided. As a result, the volume can be adjusted as appropriate. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play at a desired volume.

In the gaming machine F1, the effect determining means for determining the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, the specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F2, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, a specific period can be set based on the content of the production, so that the volume can be set within a range that does not interfere with the production, and the production effect can be achieved. It has the effect of suppressing damage.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period for effectively setting an operation by the operating means when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined period. Machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the volume can be set even when the effect is not executed for a predetermined period by the effect executing means, so that the player can set the volume at a desired timing. Has the effect of being able to set.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the display means is displayed with a display means for displaying the effect mode by the effect execution means and a setting mode for indicating that the specific period is set by the setting means. A gaming machine F4 comprising: a setting mode display control means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the period during which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period during which the player can set the volume can be easily set. It has the effect that it can be grasped and the player can easily set the volume.

Discrimination information notifying means for notifying discrimination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting means when the effect is not executed for the predetermined period by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. The gaming machine F5, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed for a predetermined time by the effect executing means, the set volume can be discriminated, so that the player can be notified. Has the effect that it can be easily determined whether or not the volume should be changed.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is a prohibition means for prohibiting the operation means from being effectively set by the setting means based on the determination of a specific determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, it is prohibited to effectively set the operation means, so that the volume is increased. It is possible to grasp the judgment result of the judgment means by the operation for setting, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information is the specific determination. It is composed of at least a first symbol indicating that it is a result and a second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the setting mode is a variable display of the second symbol. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are played. That is, the effect of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect execution means, and at least the first symbol indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result and the determination result different from the specific determination result. Of the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating the above, the second symbol is variably displayed according to the setting mode.

Thereby, the second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result can be used for setting the volume. Therefore, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means can be effectively used.

One of the gaming machines F4 to F7 is characterized by having a luminance variable means for varying the luminance of the display means based on the operation of the operating means when the specific period is set. The gaming machine F8.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when a specific period is set, the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness changing means based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play with the desired brightness.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the acquisition means for acquiring the information used for the determination of the determination condition based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means at least until the determination condition is satisfied. A predetermined condition is determined based on a storage means for storing the information, a pre-determination means for determining the information stored by the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and a determination result by the pre-determination means. The setting means has a determination means for determining the establishment, and the setting means determines the information for at least the specific period by the prior determination means when the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the operation of the operating means is effectively set until the effect corresponding to the above is executed.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are played. That is, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means acquires the information used for the determination of the determination means. The storage means stores the acquired information at least until the determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is determined by the pre-determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, the determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation of the operating means is effectively set by the setting means until the effect corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination means is executed.

As a result, the period from the determination of the information by the pre-determination means to the execution of the effect corresponding to the information can be set as the period in which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a favorite volume according to the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Customized setting of fish school)
A determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and an operation for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a target display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, by the operation of the player. An operating means capable of inputting game information, a storage means capable of storing game information input by the operating means, and a determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A pre-display means for displaying prior information based on a determination result on the display means, a pre-information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the pre-display means based on the determination result, and the prior information thereof. A setting means for setting a ratio of the specific prior information determined by the determination means selected between the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result, and the setting thereof. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a ratio determining means for determining a ratio set by the means based on the game information stored in the storage means.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery of games is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-09434). However, in this type of pachinko machine, it is not possible to set the degree of expectation of the production according to the preference of each player, and it is difficult to provide the gaming machine according to the preference of the player. was there. The gaming machine G1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suits the taste of the player.

According to the gaming machine G1, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means. It has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed. An operating means capable of inputting game information by the operation of a person, a storage means capable of storing the game information input by the operating means, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A pre-display means for displaying prior information based on a determination result by the determination means on the display means, and a prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the pre-display means based on the determination result. , Setting means for setting the probability that the specific prior information that can be determined is determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the prior information determination means, and setting by the setting means. It has a probability determining means for determining the probability to be played based on the game information stored in the storage means. As a result, the degree of expectation indicated by the prior information can be changed according to the player's preference. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine can be provided according to the preference of the player.

In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 indicates that the specific prior information informs the player of the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific advance information, so that the player can match the preference of the player. There is an effect that the production can be set in more detail.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is the information indicating the degree of expectation of the gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation, so that the information is produced in more detail according to the player's preference. Has the effect of being able to set.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a counter means capable of repeatedly updating the counter value within a predetermined range, and acquisition of the counter value counted by the counter means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The specific prior information includes means, and the determination is set within the range of the counter value in the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A value is set, and the prior information determination means is the specific prior information when the counter value acquired by the acquisition means is any of the determination values set in the specific prior information. The gaming machine G4, which is characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are played. That is, the counter value is repeatedly updated within a predetermined range by the counter means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the counter value counted by the counter means is acquired by the acquisition means. The specific prior information is acquired by the acquisition means after the determination value set within the range of the counter value is set depending on whether the determination result is a specific determination result or other than the specific determination result. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the specific prior information is determined. This has the effect of simplifying control.

The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the ratio setting means sets a range of the determination values to be set based on the gaming information.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G4, the range of the determination value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, so that there is an effect that the determination value can be set more easily.

<Characteristic H group> (Control to divide the area of the touch detection position)
An effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of non-contactly detecting an operation operation of a player, and a specific effect by the effect executing means when the operation operation is detected by the detection means. In a gaming machine having an effect variable means for executing the above, the detection means includes a first detection area capable of detecting the operation operation and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member having at least a region and capable of being variable to a prohibited position for prohibiting the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position for allowing the shared detection region to be formed, and a variable member thereof. A variable control means for variably controlling the variable member to the prohibited position and the permitted position, and a discriminating means for determining whether the variable member is detected by the detection means in the first detection area or the second detection area. When the variable member is variable at the prohibited position, the effect variable means determines that either one of the first detection region and the second detection region is detected by the discrimination means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is variable to the specific effect corresponding to each of the results.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port into which the gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. , The lottery of the game is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a means to change the effect by the operation of the player, a touch sensor that allows the player to input with a finger or the like is arranged, and the player operates the touch to switch the effect and execute the game machine. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-219617). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a more suitable gaming using an input means such as a touch sensor has been required. It is an object of the present invention to provide a suitable gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means for executing the effect, the detection means capable of detecting the player, and when the operation is detected by the detection means, the effect executing means produces a specific effect. The detection means has at least a first detection area in which a player can be detected and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that can be changed to a prohibited position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position that allows the formation of the shared detection region, and the variable member thereof are prohibited. It has a variable control means for variably controlling a position and a permitted position, and a discriminating means for determining whether the first region or the second detection region is detected by the detection means, and the effect is variable. When the means is variable to the prohibited position, the means is changed to the corresponding specific effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

As a result, the formation of the shared detection region is prohibited by the variable member, so that the region detected by the detection means can be changed by the operation of the variable member, and the detection means can be functionally used. .. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable gaming machine can be provided.

The gaming machine H1 has a display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, and the variable member is arranged so as to be variable on the front side of a display area of the display means, and the detection means is The gaming machine H2 having the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the variable member is variable on the front side of the display means, so that the player can be notified of the detection area at the position of the variable member, which is easier to understand. You can play a game. Further, the player can select the effect displayed on the display means, and there is an effect that various effects can be performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the effect executing means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is in the permitted position, and when the variable member is in the prohibited position. Is a gaming machine H3 characterized in that a second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to the first detection area and the second detection area, respectively.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when the game machine H2 is in the permitted position, and the first detection area and the second detection area are displayed in the prohibited position. Since the second effect is displayed on each of the above, there is an effect that the effective detection area can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect fused with the effect displayed on the display means can be performed.

In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode that allows the player to select either a display mode displayed in the first detection area or a display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the player can select and operate according to the selection display mode, and there is an effect that the player can participate in the game more and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means has at least a first detection means for setting a first detection area and a second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detecting means includes a first detecting means for setting a first detection area and a second detecting means for setting a second detection area. Since it has at least, there is an effect that the first detection region and the second detection region can be independently detected.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection means targets an output unit capable of outputting infrared rays to the first detection region and the second detection region, and the infrared rays output from the output unit. The gaming machine H6 is characterized by having at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared rays reflected on an object.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection region and the second detection region are detected by infrared rays, so that the variable means is variable, so that erroneous detection is performed. It has the effect of suppressing problems.

<Characteristic I group> (Increase in swing width of swinging accessory, suppression control)
An oscillating member configured to be oscillating, an oscillating means for oscillating the oscillating member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the oscillating means. A swing that controls the swing means based on a state discriminating means capable of discriminating in which direction the member is operating in the first direction or the second direction and a discrimination result by the state discriminating means. A gaming machine I1 characterized by having a control means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port into which the gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. , The lottery of the game is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In the effect of showing the lottery result of the lottery, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable accessory provided on the gaming board is moved to perform a notice effect of notifying the player of information about the winning / failing result in advance (for example). , JP-A-2010-09434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there are restrictions on the size of the game board surface, the electric power that can be used, and the like, and the number of movable means such as a motor for moving a movable accessory is limited, and the machines can be moved. There is a problem that the movement and the like are also restricted, the production is limited, and the interest of the game is lowered. This gaming machine is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, a swinging member configured to swing and swinging by operating the effecting member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, respectively. The swing is based on the means, the state discriminating means capable of discriminating in which direction the rocking member is operating in the first direction or the second direction, and the discriminating result by the state discriminating means. It has a swing control means for controlling the means.

Thereby, the swing of the swing member can be easily controlled. Therefore, there is an effect that the control process of the game can be simplified.

In the gaming machine I1, the state setting means capable of setting a first state for swinging the swinging member and a second state for suppressing the swinging of the swinging member, and the state setting means for the state setting means. 1 A device having a means for controlling the swinging means by the swinging control means so as to operate the swinging member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means based on the setting of the state. The gaming machine I2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swinging member is set by the state setting means, the direction is the same as the direction determined by the state determining means. Since the swing member is controlled by the swing control means so as to operate the swing member, there is an effect that the swing member can be continuously swung.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the swing member has a displaceable displacement member and a first member displaceable relative to the displaceable member, and the displacement members are displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3 comprising a pair of possible arm members, wherein the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the first member and the displacement member are displaced relative to each other, the displacement width of the swinging member can be further increased, and the effect is dynamically produced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported by the other end on the opposite side to the one end on which the first member is arranged so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swinging means is applied. The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that it is rotated about the other end thereof.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3, one end on which the first member is rotatably arranged and the other end on the opposite side are rotatably supported by the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated around the other end by the driving force, the swing can be continuously performed, and there is an effect that the effect can be performed for a longer time.

In the gaming machine I3 or I4, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. The pin portion to be formed is arranged, and the sliding groove is formed by one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where at least the arm member is arranged at a reference position. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm members or the first member, and the sliding groove is provided on the other of the arm member or the first member. A pin portion slidably formed is arranged along the groove, and the sliding groove is formed with one end or the other end of the sliding groove at least in a state where the arm member is arranged at a reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin portion and the pin portion, there is an effect that the friction when swinging can be reduced and the damping of swinging can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determining means has an acceleration sensor arranged on the swing member, and determines the state of the swing member based on the information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 characterized by being a machine to play.

According to the gaming machine I6, the state of the swinging member is determined by the state determining means based on the information output from the acceleration sensor arranged on the swinging member in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing control can be executed according to the state of the swing member.

<Characteristic J group> (pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by a driving means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. The figure is a combination of the effect content determining means for determining the effect content and the effect content determined by the effect content determining means by controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided with at least a rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are a first position in which a player can easily see the figure and a first position thereof, respectively. The rotation control means is configured to be variably configured to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and when the rotation control means displays a combination of the figures indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, the first After rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at two positions, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are changed to the first position, respectively. A game machine J1 featuring.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port into which the gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. , The lottery of the game is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect of showing the lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel showing a plurality of symbols is rotated a plurality of times and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004). -No. 160759). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display with a predetermined combination of symbols, the rotation time of the reel (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is positioned in the front position depending on the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.) There was a problem that the time) became longer, the time until the lottery result was displayed became longer, and the interest of the game was lowered. It was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the game machine J1, the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the first, which is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and has a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. The effect content determined by the effect content determining means by controlling the rotation of the rotating body and the second rotating body, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are each provided with at least a rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the above, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body can easily recognize the figure. The rotation control means is a combination of the figures indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, which is variably configured into one position and a second position where the figure is harder to see than the first position. When displaying, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are placed at the first position. Are each variable.

This makes it possible to quickly display any figure. Therefore, there is an effect that the time to wait until the figure is displayed can be reduced.

In the game machine J1, the rotation control means can rotate and control the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Then, based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, whether the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated in the first direction or the second direction, respectively. A gaming machine J2 having a means for determining a rotation direction to be determined.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are divided into the first direction and the second direction based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Since the rotation direction is determined by the rotation direction determining means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the positions corresponding to the effect, and the rotation time can be shortened. There is an effect.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the transmission means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the transmitting means at different rotation ratios, so that the first rotation Since the second rotating body can be rotated with respect to the body at different cycles, there is an effect that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be displayed in various and efficient manners.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3. A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, and J1 to J3. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery of games is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-09434

However, in this type of pachinko machine, more suitable games have been required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a more suitable game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a display means for displaying identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. And the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the privilege of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed. The identification information for showing the specific determination result in the case where the specific effect that has the game execution means and can be executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed is executed is displayed. An expectation degree display means capable of displaying expectation degree information for indicating an expectation degree for being performed on the display means, and a specific effect capable of determining execution of the specific effect based on the determination result. For the determination means and the execution of the specific effect determined by the specific effect determination means, a ratio determined by the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result is set. It has a setting means capable of being capable of, and the ratio set by the setting means can be changed based on the operation of the player in the case of the setting period, and the expectation degree display means is the said. When the ratio is changed during the set period, the expected degree information corresponding to the changed ratio is displayed on the display means in the notification period set corresponding to the set period, and is specified. When the condition is satisfied, the expected degree information corresponding to the ratio in which the ratio is higher than the variably set ratio for the specific effect in the set period is displayed in the notification period. It is configured to be possible .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information for showing a determination result by the determination means, and the identification information. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above-mentioned display means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, and a privilege game execution means. And expectation that the identification information for showing the specific determination result is displayed when the specific effect that can be executed during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed is executed. An expectation degree display means capable of displaying the expectation degree information for indicating a degree on the display means, a specific effect determination means capable of determining the execution of the specific effect based on the determination result, and a specific effect determination means thereof. For the execution of the specific effect determined by the specific effect determining means, it is possible to set a ratio determined between the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result. The means and the ratio set by the setting means are variable based on the operation of the player when the setting period is set, and the expectation degree display means has the means and the ratio during the setting period. When is changed, the expected degree information corresponding to the changed ratio is displayed on the display means in the notification period set corresponding to the set period, and a specific condition is satisfied. If so, it is possible to display the expected degree information corresponding to the ratio higher than the variably set ratio for the specific effect in the setting period. It is what has been done. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable game can be provided .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the containment body. (A) is a side view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the housing in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st member. It is a front view of the left-right rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left-right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit arranged in the descending position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit arranged in the descending position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit, and (c) is an XLIc-XLIc of FIG. 41 (b). It is sectional drawing rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit in a line. (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in line XLIIb-XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of FIG. 43 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in the XLIVb-XLIVb line of FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged top views of the flat glass of the glass unit. (A) is a side view of the containment body in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the containment body in the direction of arrow XLVIIb of FIG. 47 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. (A) is a side view of the containment body in the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the containment body in the direction of arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which shows the transition state when the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body are rotated. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit according to the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit in the direction of arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a), and (c) is a rear view. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit. (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a frame button, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection switch. It is a figure which shows schematically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. be. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value of the special symbol, and (b) is the first hit type counter CS2 and the jackpot type. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 at the time of disconnection (normal) and the variation type, and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of disconnection (probability variation). It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between a variation type and a variation type. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table A in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table B in the first control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern selection table C in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking operation table in the first control example. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the right-and-left selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the shaking control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special SW effect control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the reel control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 3rd control example. It is a timing chart which showed the timing to execute the time effect in the 3rd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing an effect screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the period A1 of FIG. 119. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing an effect screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the period B of FIG. 119. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the effect screen of the shaking effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the rotating body operation table in the 3rd control example schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the dog species selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the shaking operation table 2 in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect change processing at the time of a prize executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead reel display effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the shaking control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the contents of the reel scenario table in the third control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 has won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. And the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easier to win a prize in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 as compared with the case of. Therefore, during the probabilistic change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or is opened during the probability change or the time reduction. In addition to changing the time, the change may be made to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened at one time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is possible to change at least one of the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per time and one time. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, or the first per hit. The electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 may not be opened the number of times, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) of any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing, and a sphere of a first through gate 66 and a second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol with passing as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 overhangs into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It is visible through the part.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device has a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. It is a variable display that lights and alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment). The 1 electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82.

It should be noted that during the probability change or the time reduction, the probability of the hit is increased, and the probability of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are increased for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the time reduction, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol. It is also lit and displayed on the hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). May be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. Further, a third winning opening 82 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. , But the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. May be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the second symbol is displayed. 1 The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

Further, a second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the second symbol is displayed. 2 The electric accessory 82a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a is also longer than during the normal period. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is high even in a low probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is the same in the state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball goes to the first winning opening 64 when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is set higher than when you win a prize. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win a prize. It is in a state.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning opening 64 without an electric accessory (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery and aim to be a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning opening 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to open the second electric accessory 82a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the third winning opening 82.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

In addition, not limited to the above-mentioned form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may draw a winning lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol when the ball passes through. The second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state by the lottery of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the ball passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric accessory that the ball passes through and opens the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. Will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit to the right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, the first electric accessory 640a can be in a gaming state.

Therefore, if the game state is such that the lottery of the second symbol is easy to win during the probability change, and the game state is such that a symbol different from the second symbol is easy to win during the time reduction, right-handed during the probability change to the second through gate 67. In a game state where it is easy to win a ball by opening the second electric accessory 82a, and during a short time, hit left to pass through the first through gate 66 and open the first electric accessory to win the ball. You can make the game state easy to play. Therefore, since the gaming states during normal, time-saving, and probable change can be set to different gaming states, it is possible to entertain the player in each gaming state.

In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit to the right and passed through the second through gate 67, it is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is drawn and a lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol is selected, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and when the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is passed. Is drawn, and when a hit is selected for the second symbol, the second electric accessory 82a can be opened in a gaming state.

In this case, regardless of the probability change or the time reduction, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67 by hitting right, the first electric accessory is released and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 by hitting left, the second electric accessory 82a is opened and the ball can be easily put into the third winning opening 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way of hitting the player at any time, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to any of the winning of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 64, or the third winning opening 82 becomes a big hit, the predetermined time (variable time) is set. After the lapse of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the jackpot. Occurrence is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 has a switch (sensor) for detecting the winning of the ball to each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that the ball has passed through various gates, and a switch (sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity. Various switches such as 208 and the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 is based on the signal output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. And execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a switch (sensor) group used for various effects, and various variable members (movable accessories). Various switches consisting of a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the operation of the above, motors consisting of drive motors 420, 530, 630 and the like for driving various variable members (movable accessories) are connected. The other device 228 includes a drive motor.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

It should be noted that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is arranged in the descending position, the central floating unit 400 in the ascending position, and the left and right rotating unit 500 in the retracting position. The state in which the unit 300 is arranged in the ascending position, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, and the left-right rotating unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operating unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, a rotating body elevating unit 300 and a central floating unit 300 are provided above and below the rear case 210. Each unit 400 is arranged, and a pair of left-right rotating units 500 and left-right sensor device 600 are arranged on the left and right sides of the central floating unit 400.

The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of these wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a box-shaped accommodating body 330 in which a plurality of units (three in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality of units (two in the present embodiment) housed in each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) (1st rotating body 340a and 2nd rotating body 340b) are mainly provided.

The plurality of housings 330 are independently formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, at the ascending position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Will be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the accommodating body 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let me. The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

In the present embodiment, the drive sources of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are shared by the drive motor 350 of 1, and the parts cost can be reduced, while the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body are able to be reduced. The combination of the figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

The central floating unit 400 has a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base end side is rotatably supported by the base body 410, and a tip side opposite to the base end side of the pair of arm bodies 430. Each is provided with a first member 440 that is connected so as to be relatively displaceable (see FIG. 23).

The pair of arm bodies 430 are driven by separate drive motors 450, and are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. As a result, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear ascending / descending direction along the vertical direction but also in a mode in which a linear motion and a rotational motion are combined, and can be moved up and down while incorporating the floating motion. The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). The details will be described later.

The left-right rotation unit 500 is attached to a base (rear base 511 and front base 512) arranged in front of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300 and the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410 thereof. A displacement member 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported is provided (see FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 has a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that retracts to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player, and an overhanging position (overhanging position) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacement member 530 abuts on the first member 440 and is formed so as to be able to regulate its movement by arranging the displacement member 530 at the overhanging position (see FIG. 41). The details will be described later.

The left-right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting portion that irradiates light and a light receiving portion that receives light emitted from the light emitting portion and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). , The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 can be detected.

The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. To. In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward. Therefore, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at a position deeper in the width direction (a position outside the width direction) than the inner edge of the opening, respectively, and can be visually recognized by the player. It can be difficult to do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 46, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400, the left-right rotating unit 500, and the left-right sensor device 600 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central accommodating body 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for elevating and lowering the left and right accommodating bodies 330, respectively. It is formed from 3 units of. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three housings 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C is provided on the front side of the front base 311 having an L-shape in front view, the front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the back base 311 and the front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 to be arranged, the accommodating body 330 which is raised and lowered with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the first rotating body 340a and the first rotating body 340a accommodated in the accommodating body 330. It mainly includes a two-rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and cut on the side surface of a flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 are arranged on one side and an accommodating body 330 is arranged on the other side. It is provided with a connecting member 325 to be provided.

A pair of shafts are projected from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Further, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the slide guides 351 and 352 are used to connect members 325 (rack gear 324). ) And the housing 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion in which the accommodating body 330 is arranged by connecting the lower end sides thereof with the horizontally elongated portion. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the left housing 330 is placed in the lowered position and the central housing 330 is placed in the rising position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the rear base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the accommodating body 330, and the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left accommodating body 330 is juxtaposed on the side of the central accommodating body 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 12) is correspondingly large. ) The dimensions become longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid visibility from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central containment body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central accommodating body 330, the central accommodating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position. However, the extended slide guide 352 regulates the swing in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central accommodation body 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central accommodation body 330 is arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L is a rear base 313 formed vertically in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313 thereof. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 arranged on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing body 330 that is moved up and down with respect to each base 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330, and the housing between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the accommodating body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 thereof, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and having a gear cut on the side surface of the flat plate-shaped member, and a connecting member 326 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and rotatably supported.

A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the accommodating body 330 is provided in the guide groove 353a via the collar C. It is inserted. Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the accommodating body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear motion of the rack gear 324. It is converted, and the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 with the linear motion of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L-shape on the front surface and connected to the right end portion of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and a rear base 316 thereof. The front base 317 overlapped on the front side of the rear base 313, the drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 raises and lowers the rear base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330 is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodating the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly comprises a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R is a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface, and a connecting member 327 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

A shaft is projected from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. .. Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a which is an elongated hole-shaped opening is extended along the vertical direction, and in the guide groove 316a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the accommodating body 330 is collared (FIG. It is inserted via (not shown). Therefore, the housing body 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the housing body 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324 is performed. Along with this, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the lateral width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central accommodating body 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surfaces of the left accommodating body 330 and the right accommodating body 330, the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). (Left and right direction) The dimensions can be shortened to increase the rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the left and right accommodating bodies 330 (to make it difficult to shake in the left-right direction).

Along with this, it is not necessary to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right accommodating bodies 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide plate 353. Therefore, the posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the accommodating body 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the housing body 330. 18 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). Is. In addition, in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the accommodating body 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the substrate 331 are provided, and the respective parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The substrate 331 is a member forming the back surface (back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (upper side and lower side in FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Is formed integrally. A reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is arranged on the front surface of the portion forming the back surface of the housing 330.

The reflecting portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects at least in the vertical direction from the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18 (b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the accommodating body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are bored at two positions, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which the fixed shaft 341 described later of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is inserted, and holds the fixed shaft 341 non-rotatably. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which one of the inner peripheral surfaces thereof is defined by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line from a circular shape.

The partition wall 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall 332, and the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the side wall 332. Further, the partition wall 334 is provided with insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 at two places.

The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in the shape of a front view frame by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The housing body 330 formed in this way is driven by a drive motor 350 arranged on the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and the second rotating body 340b. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 is a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed with the drive gear 351 in this order. It is equipped with a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a representative example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported at both ends in the axial direction (shaft portion 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair thereof. It mainly includes three display plates (first display plate 343A, second display plate 343B, and third display plate 343C) erected between the end face plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and a shaft portion 341b connected to both ends of the body portion 341a in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall body 332, 333 (see FIG. 17) of the accommodating body 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft portions 341a. A body portion 341b is provided.

The shaft portion 341b has a shape in which the cross-sectional shape of the shaft is obtained by removing one of the circular shapes obtained by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered by a plane). The shape is slightly smaller than that of the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332 and 333. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341b into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the accommodating body 330 (side wall body 332,333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

In this case, the body portion 341b has the irradiation direction of the LED 344 in the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (decorative body 335) in a state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held non-rotatably. The opening 335a and FIG. 18B are arranged in a posture (rotational position) toward the front side of the paper surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate arranged on the front surface (“viewing position” described later) of the housing body 330 in the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. can.

Since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends open in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed by utilizing the internal space. It can be pulled out of the housing 330 through the opening at the directional end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 is made non-rotatable with respect to the accommodating body 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force of twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center thereof. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end face plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing body 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end face plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the accommodating body 330 and the body portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. In the second rotating body 340b, the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, but the mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are plate-shaped members having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and are paired by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342. It is erected between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plate 342.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the display plates 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed by being curved in an arc shape which is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotation position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display board 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In the present embodiment, in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise end portions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward. The central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arcuate portion formed by being curved is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display plate 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times). It is set to (below).

Here, in the following, the front surface of the accommodating body 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the housing 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visible position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged in the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular columnar body is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343B or the third display plate is displayed. The other side of the plate 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at a shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transparent portions PN through which light can be transmitted. Is formed in preparation for a part. Further, on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display plate arranged at the visual recognition position among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmission portion PN of each display board 343B, 343C and directly viewed by the player. Can be made to.

On the other hand, in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331 of the accommodating body 330 after being reflected by the reflecting portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 331. It can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotating position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the substrate 331 of the accommodating body 330 is visually recognized. It is possible to remind the player of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. Thereby, it is possible to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the figure of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied by the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical spacing in FIG. 18B), or. The apparent diameters of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (vertical dimensions in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b face each other with respect to the reflecting plate RF. The angle can be changed. That is, the reflected light of the reflected light is visually recognized as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the substrate 441, which is emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN as the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate. The aspect (eg, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 17 and 18. The detection mechanism is a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detected plate 363a projecting outward in the direction and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the substrate 331 with the detection region arranged on the movement locus of the detected plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position) based on the detection result of the sensor device 364.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite directions to those described above.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three sets in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven synchronously by the drive motor of 1, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display plate 343A and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. The first combination for arranging the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340a at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340a at the display position. There were only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a to be arranged at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotated and driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, since two drive motors are required, the component cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while limiting the number of drive motors 350 to only one, it is possible to form nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of 9 sets is promptly displayed by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotation position without requiring perfect matching of the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can get it out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 21 From (a) to FIG. 21 (e), No. 20 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) show No. 20 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 10.

In FIG. 20, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is indicated by the reference numeral "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display board 343B is arranged is represented by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display board 343C is arranged in the viewing position is represented by the code "C" or "C'". Will be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 In the state represented by "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, respectively, and the first rotating body. From 340a, the figure drawn on the first display board 343A and from the second rotating body 340b, the figure drawn on the third display board 343C correspond to a state in which the player can visually recognize them.

Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by reference numerals “A to C” to be second. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotating body 340a are illustrated with reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each is set to different values. In the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a having the number of teeth of the first gear 353 being 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 being 20 is rotated by 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 108 degrees. Is formed to do.

No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 21 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 20 in FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, No. 20 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 21 (b), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees, there is a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees between the two rotating positions, but each rotating body 340a , 340b is difficult for a player who visually recognizes the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees from the direction perpendicular to the axis, and as a result, each second display plate of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are each arranged at the viewing position (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed by being curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial view of the fixed shaft 341. (That is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the rotation direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , It can be difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the No. 20 in FIG. 20 is displayed. As shown in 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, since a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. From the state shown in 4 and FIG. 21 (d), No. 20 in FIG. In the rotation in the section up to the state shown in 9 and FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C in the visible position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body. The 340b is arranged at a position where its rotation position is displaced with respect to the first rotating body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. 9 and from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, FIG. No. 20 As shown in 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even in the section where the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed, the second rotation is performed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure will be combined in the third combination.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21 (a) of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22 (e) of FIG. 20). By repeating the embodiment two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. B "), a fifth combination (No. 12" B', C "in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In addition, No. 20 in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A', in FIG. 20) may be considered. A "C"), an eighth combination (No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20) and a ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a plurality of gears (drive gears 351 to 355). It is formed as a gear train composed of the five gears), and is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

As a result, the rotation cycle of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified to reduce component costs and improve durability and reliability, but each gear is always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction.

Therefore, for example, the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which the table in FIG. 20 is advanced in the positive direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established) is formed. Then, after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C', A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. It is possible to repeat a series of operations of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20), whereby it is possible to make the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. When it is necessary to move the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), in addition to revealing the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is moved in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated once. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, when it is set to "1 / integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (deviation) in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), but in the remaining 6 combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body It is allowed that a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of possible combinations of figures can be set to 9.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the drive motor 350 of 1, the number of possible combinations of the figures is set to 9, so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotating body 340a. And it is not achievable only by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotating body 340b as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, at the rotating position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of the effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) in which a difference (deviation) in a predetermined rotation angle occurs in the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), FIG. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b to make them inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 22 (e), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotation position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotating position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b to make them inconspicuous.

As described above, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, each of the accommodating bodies 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are mounted on the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b can be promptly displayed at a required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the combination of nine sets of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1-rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging each accommodating body 300 in the descending position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. Can be done. As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotation position in advance without being recognized by the player, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing arrives, each accommodating body 300 is placed in an ascending position (see FIG. 8) and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are performed to promptly obtain the desired combination. Can be made to appear in.

It should be noted that the arrangement of each of the housing bodies 300 in the descending position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each of the contained bodies 300 is not arranged in the descending position, and each of them is not arranged. While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the descending position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. This makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated, so even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the descending position and become invisible to the player, at the time of the rotation. There is a possibility that the player may be made to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the time of the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to mix in the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

As the operating means, for example, a payout device 133, a voice output device 226, or a ball launching unit 112a (all of which see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is exemplified. In the state where these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated due to the payout of the ball, the output of voice, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

In addition, instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b You may try to rotate in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, so that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation can be made accordingly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in front of the base body 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210 and the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base end side is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the cover body 420 and the base body 410, and which are arranged in a posture facing the tip side, and them. It mainly includes a first member 440 in which the tip ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

The base body 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the cover body 420 is partially arranged (covered) at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the facing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotational shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are recessed at positions coaxial with each other. Will be set up.

Further, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 453, which will be described later, of the transmission mechanism is projected from the front surface of the base body 410. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming out of the shaft 412. ..

A notch 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 to secure a space for allowing the rotation of the arm body 430. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 over a predetermined angle can be regulated by bringing the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430. Is formed in. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to exert a function as a stopper that restricts the rotation of the arm member 420 by a predetermined angle or more.

A rotating body 413 is arranged at the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotating body 413 is a member rotatably formed by a driving force of a drive motor (not shown), and when the first member 440 is arranged in an ascending position (see FIG. 31 (a)), the first member 440 becomes a member. When the first member 440 is placed in the descending position (FIG. 31 (c)) while being shielded and invisible to the player, the game is arranged vertically above the first member 440. It is visible to the person.

The arm body 430 is a long rod-shaped body formed by bending in a substantially square shape in front view, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotary shaft 431 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and is coaxially projected from the front surface and the back surface of the arm body 430 on the base end side, respectively. Will be done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in a manner in which the tip end side is moved up and down in the vertical direction with the rotation shaft 431 as the rotation center.

The driven groove 432 is a portion through which the eccentric pin 454 described later of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is a linear (front view long hole) extending from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotation shaft 431. Shape) formed as an opening. As will be described later, the eccentric pin 454 is slid along the driven groove 432 with the rotation of the crank gear 453, so that the arm body 430 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431.

The connecting pin 433 is a rod-shaped body projecting from the front on the tip end side of the arm body 430, and is slidably inserted along a sliding groove 441a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. The arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected so as to be relatively movable via the connecting pin 433.

As will be described later, a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430. Is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off from the sliding groove 441a. Further, the arm body 430 is provided with a rotating body 434 in front of the arm body 430 at a position opposite to the driven groove 432 with the bent portion interposed therebetween. The rotating body 434 is rotatably formed by the driving force of the drive motor 435 arranged on the back surface side of the arm body 430.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 located eccentrically from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

The mounting plate 451 is arranged in front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is housed between the facing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 projects from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove. Regulate getting out.

According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment), the rotation driving force is transmitted to the crank gear 453. The eccentric pin 454 eccentric from the center of rotation of the crank gear 453 is displaced in the vertical direction in the front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed upward or downward by the eccentric pin 454 sliding on the driven groove 432, and is rotated around the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is relatively displaceably connected to the arm body 430 via the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independently connected to each other. By being rotated, as will be described later, it is possible to move in a mode in which a linear motion and a rotary motion are combined (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, a detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatable on the base 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back of the base 441, respectively, and the back of the base 441. Mainly, the arm member 444 to be arranged, the drive motor 445 that generates the driving force for rotating the arm member 444, and the crank member 446 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444. Be prepared.

The substrate 441 is a member forming the skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed in the shape of a circular plate when viewed from the front. A pair of sliding grooves 441a are formed in the substrate 441 with openings. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as a front view elongated hole-shaped opening extending linearly, and a pair is arranged non-parallel. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in an inverted C shape in front view, which is upwardly inclined from the center toward both ends in the front view of the substrate 441.

On the back surface of the substrate 441, a cylindrical tubular portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is projected. Will be done.

A connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the tubular portion 441b. That is, since the connecting pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 441b, the supporting area of the connecting pin 433 can be expanded by that amount, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. ..

The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed in a disk shape having a front view circular shape having substantially the same diameter as the substrate 441 and having a predetermined thickness dimension. The front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in this embodiment) are disposed inside the front body 442. Therefore, by making the plurality of light emitting means emit light (lighting or blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be emitted from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface toward the outside. As a result, the player can visually recognize the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) as if it is emitting light.

The front body 442 is arranged (fastened and fixed) on the base 441 after the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base 441 from the back surface side, and at least the tubular portion 441b of the base 441 is inserted into the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is attached (fastened and fixed), and the collar is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off from the substrate 441.

The arm member 444 is a long member having a diameter longer than that of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444a is a hole pivotally supported by the shaft 441a of the front body 441, and is formed at a position centered in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending below the shafted support hole 444a at right angles to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. It is formed as an opening (in the shape of a long hole in the front view).

The arm member 444 is rotatably supported by a shaft 441a between the facing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back surface body 443 in a posture in which both end portions thereof project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23), and will be described later. As the crank member 446 rotates, the eccentric pin 446b slides along the driven groove 444b, so that the eccentric pin 446 is rotated around the shaft support hole 444b.

The crank member 446 is a member arranged between the facing surfaces of the substrate 441 and the back surface body 443, and is a rotation main body 446a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445 and a rotation center of the rotation main body 446a (drive motor 445). It is provided with an eccentric pin 446b located eccentrically from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446b is projected from the front surface of the rotating body 446a and is inserted into the driven groove 444b of the arm member 444.

When the rotating body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus of a predetermined radius. As a result, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled to the left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the rotation of a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment) is alternately repeated in the forward and reverse directions. The arm member 444 is rotated around (axis 441c) as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

As a result, as will be described later, the movement of the arm member 444 can be visually recognized by the player in a manner in which both end portions of the arm member 444 protruding from both sides of the front body 442 to the left and right are alternately reciprocated up and down. .. Further, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, the reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is caused to act on the base body 441 and the front body 442, as described later, with respect to the arm body 430. The movement of the front body 442 to be relatively displaced can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29. A pair of left-right rotation units 500 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6), and the pair of left-right rotation units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for, since they are formed with substantially the same configuration, only one (the one arranged on the left side when viewed from the front) will be described, and the explanation of the other will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a front view of the left-right rotation unit 500. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left-right rotation unit 500 is arranged in front of the front-view rectangular rear base 511, the front base 512 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 511, and the front base 513. A cover body 513 to be provided, a drive motor 520 arranged on the back side of the back base 511, and a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

On the facing surfaces of the rear base 511 and the cover body 513, the shaft support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at positions where they are coaxial. Will be set up. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotation shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted and an opening 512b through which the eccentric pin 542 of the crank gear 540 described later of the transmission mechanism is inserted.

The displacement member 530 is a member with a blade-shaped decoration on the front surface, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotary shaft 531 is a shaft pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511a and 513a of the rear base 511 and the cover body 513, and is the front surface and the back surface on the base end side (lower side of FIG. 29) of the displacement member 530. It is projected coaxially from each. The displacement member 530 can rotate about the rotation axis 531 between the retracted position overlapping the front base 512 and the overhanging position protruding toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210 in the front view. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

The driven hole 432 is a hole in which the connecting pin 552 of the link member 550, which will be described later, of the transmission mechanism is rotatably supported, and is recessed at a position separated from the rotating shaft 531 toward the tip end side by a predetermined distance. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, so that the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. It mainly includes a crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530.

The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is projected toward the front at a position eccentric from the center of rotation thereof. The link member 550 is a rod-shaped body disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530, and the connecting hole 551 is recessed in the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. The connecting pin 552 is projected from the front of the above.

The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably pivotally supported in the connecting hole 551 of the link member 550 via the opening 512b of the front base 512, and the connecting pin 552 of the link member 550 is a driven hole of the displacement member 530. It is rotatably supported by 532. As a result, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550 to form a crank mechanism.

According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), the rotational driving force thereof is transmitted. The eccentric pin 541 eccentric from the center of rotation of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. As a result, the displacement member 530 is rotated between the retracted position and the overhanging position described above with the rotation shaft 431 as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 41. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the pair of arm bodies 430 located on the left side (left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front, respectively. It is referred to as a "left" arm body 430 and a "right" arm body 430.

31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 31 (a) is in the ascending position, and FIG. 31 (b) is the ascending position and the descending position. FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state of being arranged in between and the state of being arranged in the descending position.

32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 32 (a) is FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) is FIG. 31 (b). 32 (c) corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG. 31 (c), respectively.

It should be noted that FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c) correspond to a cross-sectional view in which the back surface of the first member 440 is visually recognized by cutting in a plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. Further, while the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically shown by using a two-dot chain line, the rear body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 35, 36, 38, and 40, which will be described later, and the description thereof will be omitted below.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing up the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) upward. The posture is set and the first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is located close to the end (hereinafter referred to as "outer end") of each sliding groove 441a on the side close to the radial outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

From the states shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), when the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is driven by the driven groove 432. While sliding, push down the left and right arm bodies 430 respectively.

As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated around the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Be displaced. From this state, when each crank gear 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, and are shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). As such, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) downward. The posture is set so that the first member 440 is located at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Further, above the first member 440, the rotating body 413 is visibly exposed to the player.

Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is located close to the end (hereinafter referred to as "inner end") of each sliding groove 441a on the side near the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In this embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end in the descending position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the ascending position.

As a result, as will be described later, when the first member 440 is displaced relative to the arm member 430 by utilizing the action of inertia or the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the descending position is obtained. The relative displacement amount in can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven in the directions opposite to those described above from the states (lowering positions) shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), the rotation of each crank gear 453 is accompanied by the rotation of the pair of drive motors 450. The eccentric pin 454 slides the driven groove 432 and pushes up the left and right arm bodies 430, respectively, thereby finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit. 400 is placed in the ascending position.

In this way, according to the central floating unit 400, the first member 440 can be moved up and down between the ascending position and the lowering position. However, in the above operation described as an example of raising and lowering the first member 440, the first member 440 moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position, and the first member 440 thereof. There is little change in the movement of.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the tip side (connecting pin 433) of each of the left and right arm bodies 430 is first. Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the mode of rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430. can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

33 (a) to 33 (c) and 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) is in a state of being arranged in an ascending position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged between the ascending and descending positions, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged in the descending position. Corresponds to each state.

35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) are views. Corresponding to the rear sectional views of the central floating unit 400 in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c), FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are the centers in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Corresponds to each of the cross-sectional rear views of the floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), from the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven to drive the tip side. (Connecting pin 433) rotates the right arm body 430 toward the downward rotation direction (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as "downward rotation").

Due to the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 (on the left side in FIG. 35 (a)) pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, whereby FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. As shown in 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) into a downward-sloping posture.

Here, the left arm body 430 in the stopped state (right side in FIG. 35A) is located between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the sliding groove 441a at the raised position as shown in FIG. 237 (a). A predetermined gap is formed in. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder (lowering the left shoulder in FIG. 35B), the sliding groove 441a to which the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected is connected. The inclination of the first member 440 becomes steeper, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged in a direction that allows the movement (fall) of the first member 440 due to the action of gravity. ..

Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the ascending position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 is moved to the right arm body 430 up to a predetermined rotation position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 is brought into the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b) by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be placed.

That is, the first member 440, which has been driven downward by the right arm body 430 until the right arm body 430 reaches a predetermined rotation position, is on the right after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of being driven by the downward rotation of the arm body 430, it can be rapidly displaced downward by free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 (on the left side in FIG. 35 (b)) slides. By further pushing the moving groove 441a downward, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), the posture of the first member 40 with the right shoulder lowered can be changed (tilted) to a steeper angle. ..

In this case, since the left arm body 430 (on the right side in FIG. 35B) is in the stopped state and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a, the connecting pin 433 (FIG. 35). In (b), the first member 440 can be rotated around the right side as the center of rotation, and as the right arm body 430 rotates downward, the first member 440 is viewed from the left arm body 430 side (in front view). It is possible to form a state of being pushed into (left side of FIG. 33).

That is, in the process from the ascending position in FIG. 33 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational movement in the direction of downward movement to the right (clockwise in Fig. 33), and a linear movement to the left (to the left in Fig. 33) can be used for displacement. It can change the movement.

When the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c) are reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is also located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the arm body 430 on the left side (left side in FIG. 33C) is then rotated downward.

Due to the downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 (on the right side in FIG. 35 (c)) pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, whereby FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from a downward-sloping posture to a horizontal posture.

In an example of the operation described here, from the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (a), the left arm body 430 is further lowered to a position restricted by the notch portion 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 on the left (right side in FIG. 36 (a)) pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, which is contrary to the case described above (see FIG. 33) in FIG. 34 (see FIG. 33). As shown in b) and FIG. 36 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) into a posture of lowering the left shoulder.

When the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b) are reached, the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowermost position, and further downward rotation is restricted. Next, the arm body 430 on the right side (left side in FIG. 34 (b)) is rotated downward to a position restricted by the notch portion 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the posture of lowering the left shoulder to the horizontal posture and is arranged at the lowermost position. Can be done. That is, it is arranged in the descending position.

As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the tip ends (connected) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently from each other to move linearly to the first member 440. It is possible to give a change to the movement by making it possible to give a movement that is a combination of the motion and the rotational motion.

In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420 on the proximal end side (rotating shaft 431) and are rotated around the proximal end side, so that the left and right arm bodies are rotated. Each of the tip sides (connecting pin 433) of the 430 can be moved along an arcuate locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are linearly slid and displaced, it is possible to impart a motion that is a more complicated combination of linear motion and rotational motion to the first member 440, resulting in a larger change. Can be given to that movement.

Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged in the ascending position or the descending position is inertial with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. It can be displaced relative to (the action of inertia). The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement at the descending position as an example.

37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the descending position, and in FIG. 37 (a), the state where the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. 37 (a). In b) and FIG. 37 (c), the state in which the first member 440 is swayed from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a) to the left and right is shown.

38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) are FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged in the descending position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 has each sliding groove of the first member 440. It is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of 441a. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be allowed by the above-mentioned gap.

For example, by displacing (rotating) one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 at a predetermined speed and then stopping the arm body 430, the inertial force generated by the stoppage is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 has each. It is possible to form a displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by inertia (action of inertia). Can and can change its movement.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed linearly and are arranged in a non-parallel manner, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and the second When one member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (action of inertia), a rotation component can be added to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by a combination of linear motion and rotational motion as well as linear motion, and as a result, the motion of the first member 440 is changed. Can be given.

Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a straight line, resistance is generated when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a due to the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. As a result, the displacement of the first member 440 due to the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load of each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially C shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges and stops, the first member is in the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the first member 440 from rattling with respect to the arm body 430 in a state where the central floating unit 400 is retracted to the ascending position and stands by by performing an effect by another unit or a display device. .. As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right by inertia (action of inertia) after the arm body 430 is stopped, the first member maintains the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position. It is not possible with a structure that only moves linearly while doing so (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be displaced independently), and the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently as in the present embodiment. It was made possible for the first time by making it possible. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

That is, in the structure (conventional product) in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position, even if the arm body is stopped, it acts on the first member with the stop. The inertial force that is applied cannot be a trigger to reciprocate (sway) the first member from side to side.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture, one arm body 430 remains in the stopped state and only the other arm body 430 is displaced (rotated). Since one member 440 can be placed in a reference position (for example, a descending position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force accompanying the stop of the other arm body 430 reciprocates (rolls) the first member 440 from side to side. ) Can be a trigger. As a result, the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be reliably generated, and the amplitude of the reciprocating movement to the left and right can be increased.

Here, the descending position has been described as an example of a position where the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by inertia (inertia) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, but it is understood from the above configuration. As you can, it is possible in other locations. That is, as long as there is a gap between the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of each connecting pin 433 and the first member 440 in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped. It may be in the position of. Therefore, it is possible to generate a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left or right at an arbitrary position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

Next, the operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 to the left and right by utilizing the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, even after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right due to the above-mentioned inertia (inertia action) has converged, the first member 440 is still attached to the left and right arm bodies 430. Can be reciprocated from side to side without rotating.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the descending position, and in FIG. 39 (a), the state where the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. 39 (a). In b) and FIG. 39 (c), a state in which the first member 440 is laterally swayed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) is shown.

40 (a) to 40 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are shown in FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being arranged in the descending position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is the first member 440 as described above. It is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of each of the sliding grooves 441a. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be allowed by the above-mentioned gap.

That is, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base 441 of the first member 440, the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated) by the driving force of the drive motor 445, and the reaction force is transferred to the base 441. It can act, and by the action of the reaction force, each connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members are stopped. From the state where the 444 is located in the neutral position, as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in front view, and the reaction force acts on the arm member 444. As a result, the base 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view, and the arm member 444 is counterclockwise in the front view as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c). Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

As a result, the substrate 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) left and right, and the movement can be changed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the base member 441 and is rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445. Therefore, the arm member 444 is displaced due to the displacement of the arm member 444. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the substrate 441 and the front body 442 in the rotational direction. As a result, it is possible to easily generate a rotation component in the movement of the substrate 441 and the front body 442.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the axis 441c of the base 441) is located at the center of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 in the left-right direction. The force can be easily connected to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (base 441 and front body 442).

Here, the descending position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by the reaction force at the time of rotation of the arm member 444, but as can be understood from the above configuration, other It is also possible in position. That is, as long as there is a gap between the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of each connecting pin 433 and the first member 440 in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped. It may be in the position of. Therefore, it is possible to generate a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left or right at an arbitrary position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

Here, a sensation device for detecting the posture of the first member 440 may be provided, and control may be performed to change the rotational state of the arm member 444 based on the detection result of the sensor device. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged, or the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) from side to side.

For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) to the left and right with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). (See FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocating movement of the base 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). Acts in a direction that cancels the movement of the substrate 441 and the front body 442). As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

Alternatively, from a state in which the movement of the first member 440 converges and stops, or a state in which the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) to the left or right due to inertia (action of inertia), the first member 440 The arm member 444 is rotated so as to reciprocate or reciprocate the base 441 and the front body 442 (the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is used to amplify the movement of the base 441 and the front body 442). To act on). As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right, and the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be changed according to the rotational state of the arm member 444.

The sensor is an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor) that is arranged on a portion (for example, a base 441, a front body 442, a back body 443, etc.) other than the arm member 444 of the first member 440 and detects acceleration in three directions thereof. , Capacitance type, piezo type, etc.), distance sensor for detecting the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440 (for example, triangular ranging type, time of flight type, etc.) and the like are exemplified. The distance sensor is provided at at least two locations and is configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

Next, the cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

41 (a) is a front view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 41 (c) is a top view. It is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 in the XLIc-XLIc line of FIG. 41 (b).

It should be noted that FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c) show a state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position and the left-right rotating unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position. Further, in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512 and the cover bodies 420, 513 are omitted. Only the main configurations required for explanation are shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left-right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position while the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be in contact with a pair of tubular portions 441b erected on the back surface of the substrate 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be regulated.

For example, when the central floating unit 400 arranged in the ascending position is arranged in the descending position by rotating the left and right arm bodies 430 downward, at the same time, the left and right rotating unit 500 is arranged in the overhanging position and the first By abutting the displacement member 530 on the member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right due to inertia (action of inertia) as described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38). It can be regulated to be rolled).

Alternatively, when the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is displaced (rotated), the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the first member is caused by the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444. It is possible to restrict the members (base 441 and front body 442) from reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right, whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm depends on the arrangement position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. , A mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

Next, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, the relationship between the left and right sensor device 600 and the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are the XLIIb-XLIIb line and FIG. 43 (a) of FIG. 42 (a). It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of a). 42 shows a state in which the first member 440 is arranged in an ascending position, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the first member 440 is arranged in a descending position.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only the back case 210, the first member 440, and the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are shown, and the other configurations are omitted. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 42 and 43, the path of the light irradiated from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of the light irradiated to the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by using a two-dot chain line. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45, which will be described later, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left and right sensor device 600 detects the player's fingers in front of the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquires the presence / absence (existence) and position, or the operation direction and operation speed. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Will be set up.

The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of the light irradiated to the plate glass 16a are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42 (a)). (Left and right direction) The light emitting part is arranged in an inclined posture toward the inside so as to have an overlap in the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are placed at positions deeper in the width direction (positions outside the width direction) than the inner edges of the openings of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be arranged so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

In this case, it is in front of the plate glass 16a (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), lower side in FIG. 42 (b)) and diagonally in front of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion). ), The light emitted from the light emitting portion and transmitted through the plate glass 16a is reflected by the player's fingers, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving portion. The presence of a person's fingers is detected.

The left and right sensor device 600 arranges the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 on the left and right, and can perform detection at two places in front of the plate glass 16a (regions corresponding to the irradiation regions S1 and S2, respectively). Therefore, based on the detection results of both sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (whether it is located in front of the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2) and the operation direction (from the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). The direction toward or vice versa) or the operating speed (speed when crossing between the irradiation regions S1 and S2) can be detected.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor devices 600 (first sensor 610 and second sensor 620) is set so as to overlap the moving region of the first member 440. Will be done. That is, the first member 440 is formed so as to be displaceable to a position where it overlaps at least a part of the detection region (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the plate glass 16a) of the left and right sensor devices.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the first member 440 is in front of the plate glass 16a (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 43 (a) and the lower side in FIG. 43 (b)). , A region diagonally forward of the irradiation region S1 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) (hereinafter referred to as “detection region of the first sensor 610”) and the front of the plate glass 16a. Therefore, it is displaced to a position that separates the region (hereinafter referred to as "detection region of the second sensor 620") in the diagonally front of the irradiation region S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

As a result, the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated in front of the flat glass 16a. Therefore, it is surely avoided that the second sensor 620 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the first sensor 610 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the second sensor 620. can.

Therefore, for example, an effect of allowing the player to make an alternative choice (for example, two locations on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (positions corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed in two locations corresponding to the detection area of the player, and the player brings his / her finger close to one of the two regions (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Therefore, when performing an effect of selecting either one, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be improved.

Further, as described above, the central floating unit 400 is formed so that the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 can be relatively displaced to the first member 440 (base 441). The first member 440 can be moved up and down linearly along the vertical direction, and the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) from side to side (see FIG. 39). Further, the stop position of the first member 440 can be biased to either one of the left and right directions (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

Thereby, the size of at least one or both of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the first member 440. Therefore, for example, in response to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is made to move his / her finger to search for a position (detection area) in which the finger is detected. It is possible to perform the production.

Further, for example, since the first member 440 can shield one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 to make it undetectable, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Despite the display instructing the player to select the selection target by hand, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas and interferes with the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, by shielding one of the detection areas by the first member 440, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying an instruction for urging the player to select the other on the third symbol display device 81.

44 (a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 in the XLIVb-XLIVb line of FIG. 44 (a).

As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are disposed therein, and the plurality of light emitting means (lighting or lighting) are emitted. By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated outward from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface. As a result, the player can visually recognize the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) as if it is emitting light.

In this case, when the light emitted outward from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, it is incident. False detection is caused by the interference between the emitted light and the light emitted from the light emitting unit and the direct reception of the incident light by the light receiving unit.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light radiated to the outside from the front body 442 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded (a position crossing a virtual line (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B) connecting the front body 442 and each of the sensors 610 and 620, hereinafter referred to as a “shielding position”). Is formed in. Therefore, when the light emitting means of the front body 442 emits light, the displacement member 530 is displaced to the shielding position, so that the sensors 610 and 620 can be shielded from the light emitted from the light emitting means by the displacement member 530. As a result, erroneous detection of each sensor 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

Further, by making the displacement member 530 also serve as a means for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the permanent shielding member can be used. It is not necessary to provide it, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, so that a space can be secured as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between the ascending position and the descending position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), depending on the displacement position of the first member 440. The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed in a shielded position. That is, the displacement member 530 can be made to follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevation position) of the first member 440.

That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to cover the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for the arrangement of the shielding member. However, if the displacement member 530 is used, Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevation position), the displacement member 530 can be miniaturized. Therefore, since the permanent shielding member can be eliminated, not only the component cost can be reduced and the space can be secured, but also the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530 can be reduced.

Next, the relationship between the left-right sensor device 600 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 45.

45 (a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a).

As shown in FIG. 45, in the left-right rotation unit 500, the left and right displacement members 530 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) between the retracted position (see FIG. 7) and the overhanging position (see FIG. 8). Where a sensor (not shown) for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are arranged at the retracted position and the extended position is provided, the left and right displacement members 530 are located between the retracted position and the extended position. At an intermediate position (predetermined position), they are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620.

The left-right sensor device 600 is formed so that the displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 can be independently detected by the sensors 610 and 620 that the displacement members 530 are arranged at intermediate positions (predetermined positions). Thereby, the means for detecting the presence / absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the flat glass 16a and the means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position are provided in the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is arranged at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The position where each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is detected by the sensors 610 and 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be an overhanging position instead of an intermediate position. It is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method of detecting dirt D on the flat glass 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). In FIG. 46, the path of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated by using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 42 (a), the object F existing in the detection region of the first sensor 610, and in FIG. 42 (b), the stain D adhering to the irradiation region S1 (see FIG. 42 (a)), respectively. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), for example, when the object F (player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), it is irradiated from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610. The light is transmitted through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, then reflected by the object F, and is received by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the outward path. As a result, the presence of the player's fingers is detected by the first sensor 610.

In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, the game board 13 It is possible to dispose of these sensors at positions deeper in the width direction (positions outside the width direction) than the inner edge of the opening with the opening in between (see FIG. 6), and these sensors 610 and 620 can be visually recognized by the player. It can be difficult to do.

However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a become close to parallel). Therefore, if dirt D (for example, oil from a player's hand) is attached to the plate glass 16a, the dirt D reflects light in a direction different from the outward path, and the reflected light is reflected by the first sensor 610. It is not possible to receive light from the light receiving part of. Therefore, the presence or absence of dirt D adhering to the plate glass 16a cannot be detected by the first sensor 610.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward, the irradiation region S1 of the plate glass 16a is contaminated. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, whereby the dirt D on the irradiation region S1 on the plate glass 16a The presence or absence of adhesion can be detected. The presence or absence of dirt D in the irradiation region S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620 is detected by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610.

That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S1 and is received by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620. If this is not the case, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation region S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S2, and the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610 deposits the light. When no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S2.

Here, it is preferable that the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 detect the presence or absence of dirt D on the flat glass 16a in the process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since the player has not entered the store, the object F (player's finger) does not exist in front of the flat glass 16a (detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, a threshold value is set for the time required from light emission to light reception based on the difference between the object F and the dirt D (for example, the path length when the object is reflected and the path length when the object is reflected by the dirt D). This is because it is not necessary to perform (providing), and the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a can be improved accordingly.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow XLVIIb of FIG. 47 (a). Note that FIG. 47 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

In the first embodiment, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism, but the transmission in the second embodiment has been described. The mechanism is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be intermittently transmitted to the second rotating body 340b. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (d), the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is sequentially meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 thereof. It includes a gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

The first gear 2353 differs only in the number of teeth from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. The number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 differs only in the thickness dimension from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and has two gears (the first side intermediate gear 2354a and the second side intermediate gear 2354b) in the axial direction (FIG. 47). (B) Concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction) and formed as an integrated member.

The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can be meshed with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (first rotating body 340a) is being rotated, the intermediate gear 2354 (first side intermediate gear 2354a and second side intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The rotation. The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is set to 21.

The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 2354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is omitted. Specifically, in the second side intermediate gear 2354b, a non-toothed region, which is a region where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and a region remaining in the non-toothed region (that is, 14 teeth are peripheral). A toothed region, which is a region continuous in the direction), is formed.

In the non-engagement region of the second intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth are omitted (removed) and the teeth of the second gear 2355 cannot be meshed with each other. It is blocked. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth of the second gear 2355 can be meshed with each other, and the rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

In this case, the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth with respect to the first side intermediate gear 2354a in which the number of teeth is set to 21. Since the central angle is 120 degrees and the tooth alignment region is the region corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, the central angle is 240 degrees.

Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in the section corresponding to the non-engagement region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-engaged, and is stopped with the second side intermediate gear 2354b. It is rotated in the section corresponding to the starting area where the second gear 2355 is engaged. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 48 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In addition, FIGS. 49 and 50 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 49. From (a) to FIG. 49 (e), No. 48 is shown in FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (d) show No. 48 in FIG. It corresponds to each of the states shown as 6 to 9.

In addition, in FIGS. 48 to 50, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are rotated by the second rotation using the reference numerals “A to C”. The first display board 343A to the third display board 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by using the reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, a state in which the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions (states shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49 (a) of FIG. 48). ) Is hereinafter referred to as "initial state". In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set at the boundary position on one side between the meshed region and the non-engaged region (the end of the meshed region and the beginning of the non-engaged region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 49 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 48 in FIG. 48). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has an intermediate gear 2354 (the first). Due to the action of the non-engaged region in the 2 side intermediate gear 2354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the stopped state is maintained.

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visual position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "A', B" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 48. 2 and in the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and along with this, the intermediate gear 2354 is also 120. Since it is rotated by a degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at the boundary position on the other side between the meshed region and the non-engaged region (the beginning of the meshed region and the end of the non-engaged region). Will be done.

No. 48 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing region (the region of 120 degrees in the first half of the central angle of 240 degrees) in the intermediate gear 2354b).

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 3 and FIG. 49 (c), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 3 "B', C" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

No. 48 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is placed in the visible position from the state shown in 3 and FIG. 49 (c), the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing region (the region of 120 degrees in the latter half of the central angle of 240 degrees) in the intermediate gear 2354b).

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. As shown in 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a fourth combination (No. 4 “C', A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 48. In the state shown in 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and the intermediate gear 2354 is also 360 degrees accordingly. Since it is rotated by a degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at the boundary position on one side between the meshed region and the non-engaged region (the end of the meshed region and the beginning of the non-engaged region). Will be done.

After that, it is substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49 (a) of FIG. 48 to the state shown in No. 3 and FIG. 49 (c) of FIG. 48). By repeating the embodiment two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

In this case, No. 48 in FIG. 4-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .5 "C', B") and a sixth combination (No. 6 "A', C" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

In addition, No. 48 in FIG. 7-No. In the section of the state shown in 9, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) may be replaced with a state in which the phases are different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .7 "B', A"), forming the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) and the ninth combination (No. 9 "C', C" in FIG. 48). be able to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears. The gear 1 (intermediate gear 2354) has a meshing region that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) to transmit rotation, and the gear 1 is non-geared with the mating gear to block the transmission of rotation. A non-gated area is formed.

As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, nine sets of combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, can be formed with only one drive motor 350, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to effectively produce the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the cost of parts.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and the stop of the second rotating body 340b can be released to restart the rotation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the second rotating body 340b.

Further, since the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment has no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction. Therefore, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 48) is formed, the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) appears. In this case, the table of FIG. 48 is advanced in the forward direction (downward of FIG. 48) to reveal the eighth combination, and the table of FIG. 48 is advanced in the reverse direction (upward of FIG. 48). It is also possible to make the ninth combination appear.

As a result, as in the former case, No. 48 in FIG. 48. No. 7 to No. In the transition to 8, only the first rotating body 340a is rotated with the second rotating body 340b stopped, and the eighth combination (No. 8 “B', B” in FIG. 48) appears. (That is, while "B'" has already appeared on one side, the other side is switched from "A" to "B" to make "B', B" appear) and the latter As in the case, No. 48 in FIG. No. 9 to No. In the transition to 8, both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 “B', B” in FIG. 48) (that is, one of them). And both of the other figures are switched to make "B', B" appear), and the effect can be arbitrarily selected and executed according to the game state.

Further, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is repeated twice. As long as it is done, the desired combination of figures can be quickly revealed.

Here, in the present embodiment, a non-engagement region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second side intermediate gear 2354b), and while the first rotating body 340a is rotated, the second rotating body 340b is rotated and stopped. Is switched, and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the spacing of a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each include the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees, they are non-toothed. The region formation range (central angle) is set to 120 degrees.

As a result, the phases of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b do not shift. Therefore, in the table shown in FIG. 48, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b is an element. The length can be shortened (the number of table stages can be reduced). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b required to bring out the desired combination of figures. That is, the time required to bring out the desired combination of figures can be shortened.

However, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set to be non-corresponding to the spacing of a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-engagement region is set to the range of the central angle of 108 degrees, the phase shift of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is caused as in the case of the first embodiment. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of figures (for example, 9 sets), and it is also possible to form a state in which the figures are not combined, so that the player can visually recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination is not established).

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. 51 (a) is a side view of the housing 330 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 51 (b) is a front view of the housing 330 in the direction of arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). Note that FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed is shown.

In the second embodiment, the case where the intermediate gear 2354 has one non-engagement region and one tooth engagement region has been described, but the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment has the non-engagement region and the teeth. Two combined regions are formed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d), the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is sequentially meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 thereof. It includes a gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

The first gear 3353 differs only in the thickness dimension from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment, and other configurations are formed in the same manner. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and has two gears (the first side intermediate gear 3354a and the second side intermediate gear 3354b) in the axial direction (FIG. 51). (B) Concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction) and formed as an integrated member.

The first side intermediate gear 3354a is formed with teeth that can be meshed with the teeth of the first gear 3353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 3353 (first rotating body 340a) is being rotated, the intermediate gear 3354 (first side intermediate gear 3354a and second side intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The rotation. The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is set to 35.

The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 3354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is omitted. Specifically, in the second side intermediate gear 3354b, the first non-engagement region X1 and the second non-engagement region X2, which are regions in which seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth thereof. From the first toothed area Y1 located between the toothed area X1 and the second non-toothed area X2, which is a region in which seven teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction, and the first toothed area Y1. A second toothed area Y2, which is located on the other side between the first toothed area X1 and the second non-toothed area X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees and is a region in which 14 teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction. And are formed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-engaged region X1 and the second non-engaged region X2, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is stopped while the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped. ) Can be rotated 120 degrees each.

Next, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

FIG. 52 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Further, FIGS. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing the transition state when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. 53. (A) to FIG. 53 (d) are shown in FIG. 52. In the state shown as 1 to 4, FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are shown in FIG. 52. Corresponds to the states shown as 5 and 6, respectively.

In addition, in FIGS. 52 to 54, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are rotated by the second rotation using the reference numerals “A to C”. The first display board 343A to the third display board 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by using the reference numerals "A'to C'", respectively.

Here, in the initial state in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are set to the viewing positions, respectively. It is said to be in the placed state. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-matching region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first). (See FIG. 51 (a)).

No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 52 in FIG. 52). 1 "A', A", the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has an intermediate gear 3354 (the first). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the first non-engagement region X1 in the second side intermediate gear 3354b), and the rotation is maintained in the stopped state.

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged in the visual position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 "A', B" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 2 and in the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly, with respect to the second gear 3355. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-engagement region X1 and the second meshing region Y2 (the start end of the second meshing region Y2, the end of the first non-engagement region X1). Be placed.

No. 52 in FIG. 2 and from the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the first half of the 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 3 and FIG. 53 (c), the second rotating body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B in the visible position. As a result, a third combination (No. 3 "B', C" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

No. 52 in FIG. 3 and from the state shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the latter half of the 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the second rotating body 340b arranges the third display plate 343C in the visible position. As a result, a fourth combination (No. 4 “C', A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 4 and in the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly, with respect to the second gear 3355. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-matching region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the beginning of the second non-matching region). Will be done.

No. 52 in FIG. 4 and from the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the second non-engagement region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b), and the rotation is maintained in the stopped state.

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged in the visible position. As a result, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C', B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 5 and in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated by 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly. , The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-engagement region X2 and the first meshing region Y1 (the end of the second non-engagement region X, the first meshing). It is arranged in the starting end of the region Y1).

No. 52 in FIG. 5 and from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visible position, the second rotating body 340b has the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. As shown in 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b arranges the first display plate 343A in the visible position. As a result, the sixth combination (No. 6 "A', C" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

In addition, No. of FIG. 52. 6 and in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-matching region X1 (the first meshing region Y1). It is set at the end (the end, the start of the first non-engagement region X1) (see FIG. 53 (a)).

Therefore, thereafter, it is substantially the same as the above-mentioned embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 53 (a) of FIG. 52 to the state shown in No. 6 and FIG. 54 (b) of FIG. 52). The same embodiment is repeated. As a result, nine sets of combinations can be formed in one cycle (a round from the start point to the end point of the table). In this embodiment, the number of stages of the table in one cycle is 15.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears. The gear 1 (intermediate gear 3354) has a gear meshing region (first and second gear meshing regions Y1 and Y2) that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 3355) to transmit rotation, and the mating gear. Non-engaged regions (first and second non-engaged regions Y1 and Y2) that are non-engaged with respect to the gear and block the transmission of rotation are formed.

As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, nine sets of combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, can be formed with only one drive motor 350, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to effectively produce the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the cost of parts.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-engaged regions (first and second non-engaged regions X1 and X2) that block the transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. It is distributed and arranged, and the dentate region and the non-dental region are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, No. 52 in FIG. No. 4 to No. As shown in 7, the stop of rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be made continuous by two kinds of figures. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Further, since the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment has no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 in the forward or reverse direction. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 52 is referred to as No. No. 4 to No. By switching the traveling direction between forward and reverse, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the rotation speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b differently.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in the direction of arrow LVb of FIG. 55 (a). Further, FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). In addition, in FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only the main configuration necessary for explanation is shown.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described, but the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment have been described. The 4449 is formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the central floating unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment, sliding grooves 4439 are formed on the distal end sides of each of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and they are formed. A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted through each sliding groove 4439 are projected from the back surface of the first member 4440.

The sliding groove 4439 is formed as a linearly extending long hole-shaped opening, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that can slide along the sliding groove 441a. The arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected so as to be relatively movable via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449. A collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a stopper.

As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 in the present embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are provided by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. In the structure for connecting the arms, the connecting pin 4449 is projected from the first member 4440 to form the sliding groove 4439 on the pair of arm bodies 4430. Therefore, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm bodies 4430, The direction (inclination angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left or right by inertia (action of inertia) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). ), When the first member 4440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left or right by the action of the reaction force (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to form a pair. By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially C shape, the rotation component can be applied as described above, so that the first member 440 can be attached to the first member 440. Not only linear motion but also linear motion combined with rotary motion can be reciprocated (rolling) from side to side.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle (opposite angle of the letter “H) between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is adjusted). As a result, the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (reducing the facing angle of the letter "H"), the rotational component is increased, and the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (rolling). The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the facing angle of the letter "H"), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (rolling). The rate of linear motion can be increased.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, so that the rotation component is not generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. It is possible to make the reciprocating movement (rolling) of the above only by linear motion. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the first member 4440 moves horizontally in the left-right direction.

In this way, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right (a mode including a rotation component and a mode including a rotation component). However, it is not possible to achieve both of the aspects of the linear component only) in the first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base 441), and the arm body 4430 This was possible for the first time by forming a sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, the movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

Next, the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are central floating units 400. It is a cross-sectional rear view of the left-right rotation unit 5500.

Note that FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) correspond to FIG. 41 (c). Further, in FIGS. 56 and 57, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512 and the cover bodies 420, 513 are omitted, and the main parts necessary for explanation are omitted. Only the configuration is shown.

The left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged at a lower position than the left-right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left-right rotation unit 5500 is arranged in the overhanging position while the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 5500 causes the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( The pair of tubular portions 441b erected on the back surface of the substrate 441) can be pushed downward.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the overhanging positions while the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position (one is stretched). The first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) from side to side (rolling) by repeating the operation of slightly retracting the other from the overhanging position while arranging the other in the protruding position).

In this case, the operation of alternately arranging the left and right displacement members 530 at the overhanging position, the operation of retreating from the overhanging position, and the operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so as to be interlocked (synchronized) with. The first member 440 and the left and right displacement members 530 can be interlocked to form a movement that swings up, down, left, and right, and the player can recognize a large movement with a sense of unity.

Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 is made to collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision causes the first member 440 to reciprocate (roll) to the left and right, and is predetermined. After the lapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then be made to collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b) so that the first member 440 is continuously reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right. The reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be emphasized and recognized by the player.

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is attached to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped upward or downward. Not only the form of reciprocating to the left and right, but also the form of reciprocating the first member 440 to the left and right by using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without utilizing the inertial force caused by the displacement of the arm body 430. Can also be formed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the figures on the three surfaces are provided. The case where the player is visually recognized by combining the above is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number n of the display surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the number of faces m of the display surface of the second rotating body 340b are different. It may be set to a different value.

In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is a drive gear 351 and a transmission gear 352, and a first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gear 355 are used. , 2355, 3355 may be formed so as to include at least.

For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 are arranged on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 are placed on the second rotating body 340b in a state in which the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 can be meshed with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354. The structure in which the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gear 355, 2355, 3355 is exemplified. According to such a structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the base 331 is provided with the reflecting portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion forming the back surface of the accommodating body 330 (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 18B). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reflecting portion RF may be arranged in other portions. As another portion, the inner surface of the portion of the substrate 331 that forms the upper surface or the lower surface of the housing 330 is exemplified. Since each of these surfaces faces the outer peripheral surfaces (display plates 343A to 343C) when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is sent to the player. It can be reflected so that it can be visually recognized.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflection is accompanied by the rotation. The gap (distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 18B) between each inner surface of the substrate 441 on which the plate RF is arranged and the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b can be increased or decreased, and the reflector RF can be used. The facing angle of each of the display plates 343A to 343C of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b with respect to each inner surface of the arranged substrate 441 can be changed. Thereby, the mode of the reflected light can be changed for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmitting portion PN as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body elevating unit 300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is orthogonal to each other. It may be something to do. Thereby, for example, the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b can be displaced (moved) to the player in the directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, it is preferable that the display plates 344A to 344C are formed on a square in front view. This is because when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged side by side, a sense of unity of the figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces can be formed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b) arranged in one accommodating body 330 in the rotating body elevating unit 300 is two has been described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number may be three or more.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the case where the base end side of the left and right arm bodies 430 is rotatably supported by the base body 410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, left and right. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed so as to be slidably displaceable with respect to the base body 410. Since the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced independently even by the slide displacement, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of each of the above embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) or have an inertial force. The case where the first member 440 is relatively displaceable with respect to the arm member 430 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are relative to each other. The displaceably connected structure may be another structure.

As another structure, for example, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, a rubber-like elastic body, urethane, a metal coil spring / torsion spring, a leaf spring, etc.). A structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are rotatably connected by a shaft and a shaft hole, and the relative displacement is caused by the rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. A structure that enables relative displacement by connecting the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 with a spherical ball and a stud that comes into spherical contact with the ball, and by rotating the ball with respect to the stud. An example is a structure in which the tip of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms to enable relative displacement by deformation of the link mechanism, a structure in which some or all of them are combined, and the like. To.

In each of the above embodiments, the operation method when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position has been described, but each of these operating methods is an example, and it is naturally possible to adopt another operating method. .. Therefore, for example, in the operation methods shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, a part thereof may be replaced with another operation method.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, when the first member 440 is reciprocated (rolled) to the left or right by inertia (inertia), the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 is formed to the left and right without making the player recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocating movement due to inertia is performed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being continued.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the arm member 444 has a symmetrical shape and the center of gravity thereof is located at the center in the left-right direction in the central floating unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm member 444 is not necessarily limited to this. The position of the center of gravity of the above may be eccentric to either side in the left-right direction. According to this, the reaction force acting on the substrate 441 with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocating movement (rolling) of the first member 440 to the left and right can be increased and can be changed.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500, 5500, the displacement member 530 is directly brought into contact with the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the substrate 441), whereby the movement of the first member 440 is caused. Although the case of restricting or causing the movement of the first member 440 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the substrate 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other. A similar operation may be formed so as to be feasible.

Specifically, a magnet is arranged on one of the first member 440 (the cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and on the other of the first member 440 (the cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is arranged and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member to move the first member 440. A structure that regulates or causes movement in the first member 440 is exemplified.

According to this, since the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the substrate 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent them from coming into contact with each other, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. When the iron member is arranged on the other side of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. , And the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440 is balanced so that the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530. Make contact.

<Regarding the control configuration>
Next, a first control example regarding the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 111.

<About the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 111. FIG. 58A is a diagram showing a frame button 22 and a touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a pressing portion pressed by the player, and the limit type switch is turned on when the pressing portion is pressed downward by a predetermined amount. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and even at the next monitoring timing (after 2 ms) determined to be “ON” from the “OFF” state. When it is determined to be "ON", it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the frame button 22 is mistakenly determined to have been pressed when the frame button 22 is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like. Further, when the frame button 22 is not continuously pressed, that is, the state is switched from the "ON" state to the "OFF" state, and it is determined to be "OFF" at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is pressed. Is determined to have been released.

The touch switch 290 is arranged close to the frame button 22 and the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor unit arranged substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and is configured to emit infrared rays from the sensor unit and turn on when the infrared rays hit an object and identify the reflected infrared rays. There is. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing his or her hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. In order to turn on the touch switch 290, the operation of bringing a hand or the like closer to the sensor unit is called operating the touch switch 290.

Further, as with the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and the state determined to be "OFF" is then changed to the "ON" state. Then, when it is further determined to be "ON", it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The characters "touch" are shown on the upper surface of the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 so that the player can easily recognize that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22, and is composed of a push switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 is composed of an upper selection switch 291a formed of an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b formed of a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is pressed and used by the player mainly when adjusting the volume. By pressing the upper selection switch 291a, the volume is set to be loud. Further, by pressing the lower selection switch 291b, the volume is set to be low. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is composed of a main symbol composed of characters and numbers, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol rows are scrolled in the X direction of the arrow (from right to left) with periodicity, and variable display is performed. In particular, in the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order.

Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the left, middle, and right columns for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The left column portion of this display area is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Will be done. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in this control example, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the middle row portion of this display area is the effective line L2, the right column portion is the effective line L3, and the diagonal line from the lower left to the upper right is the effective line L4. , The diagonal line from the upper left to the lower right is the effective line L5, and a total of five effective lines are configured. Even if the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, the jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

Although omitted in FIG. 59, the display area of the third symbol display device is provided with a sub display area in addition to the display area (main display area) on which the third symbol is displayed. The sub-display area is provided horizontally below the main display area, and is further divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area on the left side is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the other small areas. The area is an area for displaying the preview effect image.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in a small area of the sub-display area. In the small area, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is 4. Indicates that it is a sphere. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist.

Further, in this control example, the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 may be variably displayed as a symbol having only numbers attached to the symbol in the case of super reach or the like. The display area may be enlarged and the display area of the small display area may disappear. With this configuration, it is possible to display a fresh display mode to the player.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area, the reserved ball number is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect is executed. When the left / right selection effect is executed, the central floating unit 400 first covers the common area where the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area (detection area) S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap. Descent.

When the central floating unit 400 descends, the light emitted by the left and right sensor devices 600 is shielded by the lowered central floating unit 400, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. As a result, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the portion where the central floating unit 400 is lowered is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor devices, and the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 The irradiation area (detection area) is separated.

The contents to be selected by the player are displayed in the display areas corresponding to the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 divided in this way (in FIG. 60, the sunset background and the irradiation area are displayed in the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1). The starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). With this configuration, the player can see the display content displayed in the display area and make an arbitrary selection simply by touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. Further, the region where the irradiation region S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation region S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the region near the overlapping region are excluded from the irradiation region of the left and right sensor devices 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely separated, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the player's finger.

Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 of this control example and the descent control of the central floating unit 400, when the effect of only detecting whether or not the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, the effect is executed. Since the left and right sensor devices 600 are provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect the player's fingers in a wide area. When the effect of selecting either left or right by the player is executed, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can completely divide the irradiation area S1. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the player's finger. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage by constructing a detection situation suitable for each of the plurality of effects of detecting the player's fingers.

In this control example, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to realize the left / right selection effect by dividing the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 of the left / right sensor device 600, but the left and right are configured by using other configurations. The selection effect may be configured to be feasible. Another example of feasibly configuring the left-right selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

FIG. 60B is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect in another example is executed. In this alternative example, when the left / right selection process is executed, the central floating unit 400 is first lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, information is acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the central floating unit 400, and the position information of the central floating unit 400 is calculated.

Then, from the calculated position information, a predetermined display area not covered by the central floating unit 400 in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the left / right selection display area, and the left / right selection display area is left / right. Display the selection screen. Next, the left / right selection device 600 is changed so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left / right sensor device 600 overlap with the left / right selection screen.

According to the configuration of another example described above, the left and right selection displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 according to the movement of the variable member (central floating unit 400) covering the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to change the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left / right sensor device 600, there is an effect that the player's selection operation in the left / right selection effect can be reliably detected.

In this alternative example, a configuration is used in which the position of the variable member is calculated using an acceleration sensor, but the position is not limited to this, and the position of the variable member may be calculated from the execution status of a program that controls the drive of the variable member, for example. good.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect period (mode C) will be described. When 55 minutes have passed since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, a production that allows you to interact with the dog using the touch switch 290, which is called contact time, is displayed as a time production period (mode C) of 5 minutes. The display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 61 instead of the display mode (see FIG. 59) displayed in the normal effect period (mode A). The main display area where the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed in the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, an effect of urging the player to display an effect of operating the touch center 290 to call the dog closer (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog) is displayed in the lower left display area. The character "call" is displayed, and the player is notified that when the touch switch 290 is operated, the effect of calling the dog is displayed.

FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a “stroking effect” mode as a contact effect. In the "stroking effect", the hand is brought close to the distance where the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and the frame button 22 is rotated around the frame button 22 to urge the touch switch 290 to be turned on (operated). When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the pattern imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed as if stroking the dog's head, and the dog's facial expression is variably displayed.

By doing so, the movement of the player's hand becomes as if he / she is stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he / she is stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed at the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking motion, and a predetermined lottery is performed, and a predetermined lottery is performed on the right side of the display screen according to the result of the lottery. The displayed indicator goes up.

The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the reliability of the school of fish until the next time production period (the production period based on the time information acquired from RTC292) arrives. In other words, the contact effect executed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating many touch switches 290 during the contact effect, the fish school trust until the next time effect period. It is configured to be configurable so that the degree is high.

By configuring in this way, the player can change the reliability of the production by his own operation, so that he / she will actively participate in the game and can prevent him / her from getting bored with the game. Will be.

In this control example, "stroking effect" is described as the contact effect, but a plurality of contents of the contact effect may be provided. When a plurality of effects are provided, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator has a high rate of increase but the indicator decreases when the indicator is operated by mistake so that the player can select the game. For example, "brushing effect" can be considered as such an effect. In the "brushing effect", the indicator can be raised greatly by brushing the displayed dog's torso well, and the indicator can be lowered if the dog's face is brushed by mistake.

Further, the indicator may be lowered by the player performing the contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to intentionally lower the reliability of the school of fish and increase the frequency of appearance.

In addition, a plurality of types of dogs may be prepared so that the degree of rise of the indicator and the types of effects that can be set can be changed depending on the type of dog. When preparing multiple types of dogs, for example, it is advisable to change the types of dogs that appear based on a plurality of missions and game contents in a normal period. With such a configuration, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact production, the game during the normal period is concentrated, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game.

Further, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating around the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms when operated quickly. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set to be most easily raised. Therefore, the player who operates the touch switch 290 quickly with the correct operation can give more benefits. In addition, in this "stroking effect", the player who keeps the touch switch 290 on all the time, that is, the player who just holds his hand over the touch switch 290, is configured so that the level does not rise on the indicator. bottom. This can encourage the player to play with the correct movement.

FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the “contact effect”. It is notified that the reliability of the school of fish has reached 70% by operating the touch switch 290 in the "contact time" (see FIG. 62 (a)), which is the "contact effect". If the judgment result is a big hit hold memory in the hold memory stored at the end of the "contact time", the game result of the "contact time" is ignored and the "reliability of the school of fish is 100". % ”May be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the production, and it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game.

Next, a display mode of the volume setting during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variation display. In this control example, even during the period in which the variation display of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the volume can be set based on the operation of the player as long as the period until the reach is established. It is configured as.

When the frame button 22 is operated while the variation display of the third symbol is being executed, the volume setting screen is displayed on the upper layer than the variation screen of the third symbol. The volume is adjusted by operating the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) while the volume setting screen is displayed. On the volume setting screen, the current volume level, the characters "Volume setting in progress" indicating that the volume can be set, and the mark prompting the operation of the operation switch 291 are displayed.

On this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 was not operated for a predetermined time when the changing third symbol was in the reach state or after the volume setting became possible (after the volume setting screen was displayed). In some cases, or when the operation to complete the volume setting is performed, it is deleted.

As described above, in this control example, the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, so that the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (while listening to the game volume). can. This makes it possible to adjust the volume when the third symbol does not fluctuate, and reduce the problem that the game volume becomes unexpected when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is started.

In this control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen, but in addition to this, the game volume currently output is the maximum value of the game volume output by the pachinko machine 10. A volume value that allows the player to relatively grasp how much it is may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the volume based on the currently output game volume and volume value, further reducing the problem that an unexpected game volume is output during the game. Is possible.

Further, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to display the maximum value of the game volume in the currently executed variable display so that the player can grasp it. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound is generated in the variable display this time, and can adjust the volume in advance. Further, by displaying the maximum value of the game volume in the currently executed variable display, the player can predict the result of the winning / failing determination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a change based on the game result to the volume adjustment operation that is normally performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although FIG. 63 shows the volume setting screen when the third symbol is fluctuating, the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed when the state in which the third symbol is not fluctuating continues for a predetermined time. The volume setting screen is displayed even when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed. In this case, the volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set when a predetermined time has elapsed since the demo screen is displayed or when a predetermined operation is performed on the demo screen.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. These counters and the like include special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device, display setting in the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the above.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing special symbol holding balls, and special symbol holding ball execution. There is an area. In each area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64, respectively.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is passed through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability of special symbol (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability of special symbol (see FIG. 66 (a)) are mainly used. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In this control example, two types of jackpots, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are set, and either "big hit A" or "big hit B" is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is added to the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Next, a mechanism in which the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern and the voice lamp control device 113 determines a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 69 to 70, variation pattern selection tables for determining variation patterns of special symbols are set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the timekeeping data measured by the RTC292, and is normally 54 minutes. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. To. Details of each of these periods will be described later, but depending on the set period, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected will differ depending on the period. Set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the variation time of each effect, the result of determining whether the result is correct, or the rough variation. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With such a configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to determine an individual fluctuation pattern, and can reduce the control addition. Further, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can also be suppressed.

The variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol at which the variation is started and the current effect mode. Here, as the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the rough type and fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern are determined. Various types of "normal reach" and "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns selected when the hit / fail determination result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of reserved pieces. Here, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern that becomes "super reach" is set more easily to be selected than "normal reach". Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the frequency of the "super reach" fluctuation pattern being executed and becoming a big hit increases, and the player can hit the jackpot when the "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected. Easy to have expectations.

In the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach", the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates for a predetermined time through the reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. After the display, it is a variable display mode in which the main symbol of the reach display mode is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "normal reach" is composed of a relatively short fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot of "super reach" described later.

The super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the "super reach", are displayed in the reach display mode as in the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A, and then the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is executed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in. The "super reach" fluctuation pattern is composed of a relatively longer fluctuation time than the "normal reach" fluctuation pattern.

Next, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is out of alignment, as the fluctuation pattern for deviation, "short-time deviation (for short-time use)" and "long-time deviation (for short-time use)" , "Out of normal reach", "Out of super reach" are stipulated. The short-time deviation variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a variation time (7000 ms) shorter than that of other variation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, but is a main symbol for a predetermined time. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the display mode in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-term deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "long-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (10000 ms) longer than that of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach deviation variation pattern, which is the variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern because the middle symbol column Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode. It is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be easier to select than the super reach deviation variation pattern described later when the hit / fail determination result is deviation. Further, the super reach deviation variation pattern, which is “super reach deviation”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation with respect to various super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns.

If the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is incorrect, the variation pattern selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The variation type counter CS1 may be configured to be assigned to each variation pattern so that the proportions of the variables are different.

For example, when the number of reserved pieces is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation" and may not be selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first winning opening 64, and the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which the game is stopped (a period during which the lottery for the game is not executed).

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 3 to 4, it is preferable to set a large ratio in which the fluctuation pattern of "short-time off" is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit of 3 to 4, the short fluctuation pattern is easily selected, so that even if the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the number of invalid balls exceeds the number of reserved balls. It is possible to suppress the problem of becoming.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a probability of hitting a normal symbol from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, as the hit type of the normal symbol, a normal hit and a long-time hit are set, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is 1. It is a hit that is executed once. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the first electric accessory 640a in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired and the second symbol display device (not shown). In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the first electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "21 to 204", the first electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and it is further attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric accessory 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 76). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 84) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 83) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 82) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a time-saving / medium-time counter 203e, a probability change flag 203f, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first hit. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. It is (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning ball (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times (variation display performed in). The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 77 and S405 in FIG. 79). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is a hold ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the through gate 66 or 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (FIG. 81). S703: No).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to be turned on when the gaming state is a probability change.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol hold lamp (not shown), and a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of 65a as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a touch switch 290, a selection switch 291 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a SW notice selection table 222b, a fish school selection table 222c, and a shaking operation table 222d. Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223 g, input time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation degree storage area 223m, effect mode storage area 223n, At least a standby flag 223o, a touch effect effective time storage area 223q, an interval counter 223r, a volume setting storage area 223s, a volume setting flag 223t, a separation flag 223u, an operating flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a is an area in which the winning information is stored corresponding to the reserved ball based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various information such as a winning / failing judgment result, a fluctuation pattern, and a stop type are set.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the special symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating the stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for determining various effects, details of fluctuation patterns, various lottery, and the like. This effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC292 is normal. It is set to on when it is determined that the time information (time information) acquired from RTC292 is within 3 years from the manufacture, and is set to off when it is determined that 3 years have passed.

The input time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the set period of the time production period from the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC292. In the on-time storage area 223, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 86, S1212) in the start-up process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113). In S1224 of the above, information on the time production period is set for 24 hours.

The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period is started. This preparation period flag 223i1 is set to on when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 is the preparation period, and is set to off when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 is the time production period. Will be done.

The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. The start period flag 223i2 is set to on when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 is the time effect period, and is turned off when the time information (time data) acquired from RTC292 has elapsed the time effect period. Set.

The SW effective time storage area 223j is an area for storing the effective time of the SW operation. The SW effective time storage area 223j is subtracted or reset from the stored effective time in the SW effect control process (FIG. 97, S2202).

The level storage area 223k is an area for storing the upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the touch effect effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

The expectation degree storage area 223m is an area for storing the expectation degree based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). ..

The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information related to the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set), respectively. In the production mode, if the current production mode is a normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode A is stored, if it is a time production period, the production mode B is stored, and if it is an extended time production period, the production mode A is stored. Mode C is stored.

The standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog is in a display state of waiting during the time effect period (during the effect mode C) in the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to on when the contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and then turned off by turning on the touch switch 290.

The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the effective time of the touch effect. In the touch effect effective time storage area 223q, the stored effective time is subtracted in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated, and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314).

The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used for the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to on when the volume can be set (FIG. 93, S1905) and turned off when the volume setting is completed. ..

The separation flag 223u is a flag used for the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), and is set to on when the central floating unit 400 is set to descend (FIG. 94, S2004), and either left or right is set. When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

The operating flag 223v is a flag used for the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined that the accessory driving start timing is determined (FIG. 95, S2103). Is set to off when is finished (FIG. 95, S2111).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 88) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 71 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table 222c in the present control example. Here, the fish school notice selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of the touch sensor control process (FIGS. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described with reference to FIG. 62. It's a table.

By using this table, the notice effect is controlled so that the fish school notice appears with the expectation corresponding to the reliability (expectation) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62 (b)). In this control example, the fish school notice selection table 222c is used, but when a plurality of effects whose expectations are set by the contact time (time effect) are provided, a table is provided so as to correspond to each effect.

Further, in the fish school notice selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), the fish school notice is set not to appear when the expectation degree is 0%. It may be set to. With this configuration, the player who wants to give notice of the school of fish regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment participates in the production so as to intentionally lower the expectation during the contact time (time production), so that the game gets tired early. It is possible to suppress that.

FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking operation table 222d in the first control example. The shaking operation table 222d is a table referred to when executing S2108 of the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316) described later.

Here, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by the rotational force of the drive motor 450 via the crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation status of the arm member 444 can be grasped by the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

In this control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 with reference to the swing operation table 222d. Has been decided. Specifically, when increasing the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, set the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation. If the information of the acceleration sensor is the data during clockwise rotation, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is clockwise rotation is set.

That is, since the drive motor 445 is driven and controlled based on the actual rotation state by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation state) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the rotation of the drive motor 445 The force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

In particular, in a variable member such as the arm member 444 in which the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive and control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

Further, in the shaking operation table 222d shown in FIG. 71 (b), only the operation table for increasing the shaking (rotation) of the arm member 444 is described, but the shaking (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. An operation table may be provided. In this case, for example, even if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation may be set and used as an operation table for rotationally driving the drive motor 445. With this configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the driving force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other out, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be efficiently reduced.

Further, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to drive the variable member (arm). It may be configured to control the rotation of the member 444). Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when the frame button 22 is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, which is the worst. When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

With this configuration, the rotation status of the variable member can be changed based on the player's operation, and the effect that the player participates in can be increased, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the 111, NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs translation of known data addresses.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing an image is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 controls the voice lamp. When the character symbol is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 234, but the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the first electric accessory 640a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the first. 2 The number of prize balls increases as it becomes easier to enter the prize opening 640. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified over time.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 73). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 74). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 74).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, in the example of FIG. 74). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 46) (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 102 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S3209 of 102 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 109 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 75) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 102 (b). ), The pointer update process (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 75) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 75, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 102 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3707 in FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4302 of FIG. 111).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 84. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the ball is passed through the through gate 66 or 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204 :. No), this process is terminated. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is performed. A hold ball count command indicating the value of the hold ball count counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of S207 is executed, the special symbol fluctuation start processing for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 78. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In this control example, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1, and the type of jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot and the type of the jackpot based on the value of one random number counter. In this case, for example, the total number of random number values is set to 3000, and the random number counter is used for loop counting. By providing 6 random numbers corresponding to the jackpot A and 4 random numbers corresponding to the jackpot B in the random number values of 3000 in total, it is possible to realize the same distribution as in this control example. By doing so, there is an effect that the counter can be reduced by one.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). After that, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability of the probability variation period (S213). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), then the stop command is set (S300), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the next jackpot game is started by setting the probability variation flag 203f to ON and setting the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability which is the probability variation period. Until the game is played in a short time, and the big hit type is the big hit B, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203e, but a different big hit type may be provided. For example, a jackpot type that sets the game state to a high probability and does not provide a time-saving game, a jackpot type that sets the game state to a high probability and sets 100 to the time-saving medium counter 203e, and a probability changing counter are newly provided. 100 is set for each of the probability change counter and the time reduction counter, and the jackpot type that provides high-probability and time-saving games for a predetermined number of times (100 times) and whether or not the high-probability game state continues is determined by a variable lottery. The type of jackpot to be decided can be considered. In this way, by using various jackpot types or combining them, it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and it is possible to improve the playability.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If it is the above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

Next, the special symbol change start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start processing (S208), first, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination of whether or not the period is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S303. In the processing of S303, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability time ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judged as a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and there are two types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, Among the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability change period from the jackpot game to the next jackpot), and "60 to". If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In this process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 84). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

In this control example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but in addition, the fluctuation type is determined for each holding number stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A counter may be provided to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the number of holdings and the fluctuation type counter.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is won. This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the reserved values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. That is, the winning is detected when the ball is continuously detected three times (6 msec) in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 msec. If the switch read process S101 is configured so that the state in which the switch has been continuously detected for a predetermined period can be determined, it is possible to eliminate the need to execute the timer interrupt process three times in this process. ..

Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter The value (N1) of 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a command for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S407). Here, the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of pending numbers N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter The value (N2) of 203c is added by 1 (S410). Then, a command for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S413, the look-ahead is executed, the winning command is set, and this process is terminated. Here, the look-ahead executed in S413 will be described. The look-ahead is based on the game information (value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is a look-ahead process that determines in advance the determination (hit / fail determination) executed at the start of fluctuation.

In the look-ahead process, a determination is made in advance based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, and the determination result is set as a winning command. Like the other commands, this winning command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 84). Will be done.

The voice lamp control device 113 performs a predetermined notification to the player in advance by using the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the stage before the fluctuation starts. Is possible.

In this control example, the look-ahead process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the process result (determination result) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command. The stored game information (value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or the information corresponding to the game information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. It may be configured to output and execute the read-ahead process described above by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) and the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a accompanying the above. As described above, the opening time of the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is also controlled at the same time, but the control content is the same as that of the first electric accessory 640a, so the description thereof is omitted. do.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON. This is because, in this control example, when the probability change flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 0 and the probability variation flag 203f is not set to ON, the process shifts to the process of S611, and the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e If the value is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the process proceeds to S609.

In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit. As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that it is out of the normal symbol.

In the process of S608, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,21 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is judged that the design is out of the ordinary pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the normal symbol hits, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the first electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device is performed. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed, the first electric accessory is executed. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, and if the ball has passed, the first This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 84, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (used area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets an initial value (S914), and starts payout control of the game ball. It will be possible. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) and the start winning process (see FIG. 79) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 80), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. .. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S620 of FIG. 80 or the processing of S621 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example also performs the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) is completed, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 80). do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 82 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and the used area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see FIG. 83, S901). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 85, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1320 (see FIG. 87) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1320. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1320 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data is transferred to the S1208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1320. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1319 in FIG. 87). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1320 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1211). After that, the time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1208 is performed via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. (S1211). After that, the time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached from S1204 via the processing of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1212, the time setting process is executed (S1212). The time setting process (S1212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), time information is acquired from RTC292, and based on the time information, a process of setting the preparation period and the time production period in the input time storage area 223h is executed.

In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when assembling the pachinko machine 10, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. The RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration that allows the "date" to be discriminated. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1222). Here, the deadline data is set to 3 years within 3 and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292 in this control example. A date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the deadline data, and if it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the start timing of the time production cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a time delay or the like due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

In this control example, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223 g, which will be described later, is set to be turned on. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC292 is determined, and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. May be good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC292 to a voltage value or higher that allows normal operation.

In the process of S1222, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the deadline data, that is, it is determined that 3 years or more have passed (S1222: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the deadline data, that is, within 3 years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the input time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in this control example, the normal game period (effect mode A) is 54 minutes from a predetermined time set in advance with the power of the pachinko machine 10 turned on, and the subsequent 1 minute is the preparation period (effect mode B). ), 5 minutes after the lapse of the preparation period is set as the time production period (effect mode C). After 5 minutes of the time production period has elapsed, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and then each period is similarly set.

In this control example, each period is set as described above, but based on the time information (time information) acquired from RTC292, when the first predetermined time is reached, the normal game period (effect mode A) is supported. When the second predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed, and when the third predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed. It may be set in chronological order based on the time information. By doing so, even if there is an error in the time for turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to execute the same effect at a predetermined time. .. Further, since the RTC292 is used, even if the time for turning on the power is delayed, no error occurs in the time information (time information) to be timed.

The details of each period described above will be described later, but between the normal game period and the time production period, the type of the background image on which the notice content and the special symbol are displayed is switched and displayed. In addition, the preparation period is a period for preparing for switching from the normal game period to the time production period, and before switching to the time production period, the change of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. It is set to do.

In this control example, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the input time storage area 223h. 54 minutes may be set to execute the game, the period may be measured by countdown, count-up, or the like, and the preparation period may be set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to that, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time of the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Further, the player may start the execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time production period based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing so, when friends play a game on the adjacent table, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 execute a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the above-mentioned predetermined operations. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variation display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the process of this command determination process (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, the synchronization effect management processing (S1313) is executed. The details of this synchronous effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. After the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, the volume setting process is executed (S1314). The details of this volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

When the processing of S1314 is completed, the left / right selection processing (S1315) is executed. The details of the left / right selection process (S1315) will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315) is executed, the shake control process is executed (S1316). The details of this shaking control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

When the processing of S1316 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. After that, the advance notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). The details of this advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. When the processing of S1404 is completed, the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S1412), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (S1502).

Here, in this control example, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C are configured to be set respectively. Each effect mode is configured to be set every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the game is started. For 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the effect mode A is set as the normal game period, the effect mode B is set as the preparation period after 54 minutes, and the effect mode B is set as the preparation period. The effect mode C is set as the time effect period for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of the time effect period has elapsed, the effect mode A, which is the normal game period, is set again, and the effect mode B and the effect mode C are repeatedly set.

In this way, after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the effect mode is switched every time a predetermined predetermined time elapses, so that the power is turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to match the timing at which the effect mode is switched between the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (that is, it is a normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol (See FIG. 69), the variation pattern is selected and set based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the number of pending items, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1503), and the present process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1502 that the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) of the corresponding special symbol (see FIG. 70). S1504), this process is terminated. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set and the characters "Soon to start contact time !!" are displayed on the background to indicate that the preparation period is in effect. The contact time indicates the time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which a countdown of 1 minute is displayed on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how soon the time production period will start.

Further, although the details will be described in the advance notice selection process (see FIG. 90) described later, the advance notice effect is not set during the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time effect period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and a notice effect different from the dedicated notice effect set in the time effect period is displayed. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, the details of the advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1404).

In the advance notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). When the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this process ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON so that the advance notice effect is not set when the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 92), which will be described later, determines that the preparation period is in effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when the preparation period flag 223i1 is not set to ON (S1601: No), next, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S1602). If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach (S1602: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S1602: Yes), next, the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). After that, the advance notice lottery is executed based on the set expectation degree and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not to select the fish school notice (S1605). If the fish school notice is not selected (S1605: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the fish school notice is selected (S1605: Yes), a display command indicating the fish school notice is set (S1606), and this process is terminated. The expected degree used in S1604 is set in S2332 of FIG. 99, which will be described later, and the details will be described later.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 88. If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412. Move to the processing of. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the reserved ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and set in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1409). After the processing of S1409 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S1412. In the process of S1408, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1410). Then, when the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). After that, the process proceeds to S1412.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C2 are selected separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the processing of S1410, if the winning command of the special symbol has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1410: No). S1412), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is selected from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. You will also be notified of each notice selected here.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set from the RAM 223. The stop type acquired and instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the display for notifying the display control device 114. A stop type command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1709 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a synchronization effect management process (S1313), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous effect management process (S1313), a process of acquiring time information from RTC292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time effect period based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating it is performed. Run.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223 g is set to ON (S1801). When it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1802), is the start period flag 223i2 turned on? Discrimination (S1803). When it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is off (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804). .. If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), then it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time production period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805).

If it is determined by the process of S1805 that it is not the time production period, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time production period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to off (S1805: Yes). S1806), and then the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode C (time effect period) is set is set (S1809), and this process is terminated. The display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode corresponding to the time effect period based on the reception of this command.

Return to S1804 and continue the explanation. In the process of S1804, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1811). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode B (preparation period) is set is set (S1812), and this process is terminated. The display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the preparation period based on the reception of this command.

Further, in the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "Soon to start contact time !!" indicating that the preparation period is set are displayed on the background. The contact time indicates the time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which a countdown of 1 minute is displayed on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how soon the time production period will start.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 92. When it is determined in the process of S1803 that the start period flag 223i2 is on (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). If it is determined that it is not outside the time production period (S1813: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the time is outside the effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to off (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode A is set is set (S1816). After that, this process ends. The display control device 113 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode of the normal effect period based on the reception of this command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a volume setting process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this volume setting process (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player.

In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). When the effect mode is not mode A (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the effect mode is mode A (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reach is established (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period is the combination of the third symbol that becomes a big hit when two symbol rows are stopped and displayed out of the three symbol rows that are variablely displayed (variably displayed) by the third symbol display device 81. It is the period during which the state (reach state) that remains likely to be displayed is established.

When the determination result of S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), then it is determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). When the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is next determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 is not operated (S1904: No), this process ends. When the selection switch 291 is operated (S1904: Yes), then the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906), and this process is performed. To finish.

In the process of S1903, when the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is raised, the volume setting storage area 223s is set (S1908), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This process ends.

In the process of S1907, when the upper selection switch 291a is not operated (S1907: No), it is subsequently determined whether or not the lower selection switch 291 is operated (S1910). When the lower selection switch 291b is not operated (S1910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the lower selection switch is operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered, the volume setting storage area 223s is set (S1911), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). End the process.

As described above, in the volume setting process (S1314), a specific period (effect mode A is set) even when the third symbol is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the state (during the period when reach is not established), the operation of the operation means (selection switch 291) that can be operated by the player is enabled, and the volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 has conventionally been able to be set only in a state in which the third symbol is not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (so-called demo screen display state or standby screen state). It is possible to set the volume of the third symbol even when the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the game at a desired volume.

Further, in this control example, when the effect mode is set to other than A, the volume cannot be set. This is because in a mode such as the effect mode B or the effect mode C where the effect is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC292, the control to synchronize the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 may be performed. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronous effect with the surrounding pachinko machines 10 (for example, the volume of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 when a car approaches from a distance) This is because the production balance is lost in the controlled production).

Although not shown, when the effect mode is set to B or C, the volume output related to the synchronized effect ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronized effect. The specified volume level is output. With this configuration, even if different volume levels are set for a plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for synchronous production, which is of interest to players in terms of production. It becomes possible to have.

Further, the predetermined volume level output during the above-mentioned synchronization effect is set to be lower than the volume level which is the reference value at the normal time (so that the volume becomes smaller). This is because the same sound is often output from the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time during the synchronous production.

In the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by a digital signal (a pattern in which the output volume is output to a speaker by a digital signal), the volume control related to the synchronization effect is possible by the above-mentioned control, but analog. In the case of control (a pattern that adjusts the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker by controlling the output section of the speaker), it is based on the set volume level so that the volume related to the synchronization effect is an appropriate volume. Then, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronization effect.

In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 is controlled so that the volume output corresponding to the synchronous effect can be output at an appropriate volume regardless of the set volume level, the effect mode is set. The volume may be set even in a state other than the state set in A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a more desired volume.

Further, in this control example, the volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is because, after the reach is established, the movable accessory provided on the game board 13 is driven, and the third symbol display device is also producing a feeling of expectation of a big hit. This is to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and to have the pachinko machine 10 perform the operation as a whole so that the effect can be enjoyed.

In this control example, since the third symbol is configured so that the volume can be set during the variable display, the volume setting can also be used for playability. For example, if the lottery result is a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is a big hit, and a loud effect for notifying the jackpot is set at the end of the variable display of the third symbol, the volume is set. It is conceivable that a notification such as "Be careful because a loud noise is generated in this fluctuation!" By performing such notification, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display can be suggested, and it can also be used as a reference when setting the volume. It is possible to prevent a loud volume from being generated in advance. Further, since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from suddenly making a loud noise, even a person with a weak heart can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, since the third symbol is configured so that the volume can be set during the variable display, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the variable display. Therefore, as a result of setting the volume level during the demo screen display as in the conventional case, there is an effect that the problem that the volume of the BGM during the variable display becomes louder than expected and causes discomfort can be solved.

Further, in this control example, only the volume setting process based on the operation of the player is described, but the volume may be set based on the time information acquired from RTC292. For example, by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 to input business hours (opening time and closing time) into the pachinko machine 10. When the time information acquired from RTC292 reaches the closing time, the volume level is automatically lowered to the specified level, and when the time information acquired from RTC292 reaches the opening time, the volume level is set to the specified reference level or during the business hours of the previous day. It is advisable to automatically restore the set volume level. With this configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output by the pachinko machine 10 during maintenance work performed outside business hours, and it is possible to prevent maintenance workers from feeling uncomfortable. It will be possible.

In addition, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level during the time production period executed based on the time information acquired from RTC292, and the result of the mini game performed during the time production period or the execution during the time production period. The volume level may be controlled to increase based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, the players around the pachinko machine 10 with a loud volume will also pay attention to the pachinko machine 10 with a loud volume during the time production period, and the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 with a loud volume will have a sense of superiority. You can soak.

Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to control the volume level to be increased based on the result of the look-ahead processing based on the winning command. By doing so, by grasping the change in the volume level before the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is started, the game is played in a state where the expectation for the big hit is raised. It becomes possible to pay attention to.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, a left / right selection process (S1315), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this left / right selection process (S1315). This left / right selection process is a process executed when the player is made to select the alternative (left / right) by using the left / right sensor device 600 (first sensor 610, second sensor 620) (Fig.). See 60).

Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. 43. The left / right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting a player's finger in front of the flat glass 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (existence) and position, operation direction, and operation speed of the player, and is a rear case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a.

The irradiation regions (detection regions) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so as to partially overlap each other as shown in the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of FIG. 42. By doing so, the presence of the player's fingers can be detected in a wide continuous area.

In this control example, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation area (detection area) is set is divided into left and right by lowering the central floating unit 400, and the player is given two points. An effect of making an alternative choice is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for allowing the player to make an alternative selection is the left / right selection process.

In the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), first, it is determined whether or not the left / right selection timing is reached (S2001). The left / right selection timing is a case where the left / right selection effect is included in the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It indicates the timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed.

In the process of S2001, if it is not the left / right selection timing (S2001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the left / right selection timing (S2001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). When the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), then the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set to on (S2004), and this process ends.

In the process of S2002, if the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), then it is determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). When the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the left selection is set (S2006), then the separation flag 223u is set to off (S2007), and this process ends. ..

In the process of S2005, when the left sensor is off (S2005: No), then it is determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, a shared detection region is formed so that at least a part of the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620 overlap each other. By using the detection area continuously formed by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 as one detection area, it is possible to reliably detect the player's operation in a wide range, and the alternative is When performing the effect, by intruding a movable accessory (variable member) between the plate glass 16a and the left and right sensor device 600, at least the above-mentioned shared detection area is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the 1 sensor 610 and the detection area of the 2nd sensor 620 are separated.

With this configuration, when the player performs a production game in which the player touches (or brings the fingers closer) the flat glass 16a without changing the left and right sensor devices 600, the player can continuously perform a wide range of touch operations. In the case of performing an effect game in which the player makes an alternative selection, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are separated by the player. It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

Further, in this control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed, and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do so. By doing so, the detection area can be moved.

With this configuration, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the flat glass 16a corresponding to the region of the third symbol display device 81 that is not covered by the movable accessory. Can be the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. As a result, a display called "touch" is performed in the display area not covered by the movable accessory, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area is set as the detection area of each sensor, so that the movable accessory becomes the third. Even in a situation where the display area of the symbol display device is covered, the detection area can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that the effect can be fully enjoyed.

Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 610 and the second sensor 610 are operated by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 that can be operated by the player provided in the pachinko machine 10. It may have a function of adjusting the detection area of the sensor 620. By doing so, the player can execute the effect simply by touching the desired position of the flat glass 16a.

Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that it is not possible to know where the current detection area is. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player hits the detection area of the first sensor 610.

In the case of performing such an effect, it is preferable to touch the area of the second sensor 620 before hitting the detection area of the first sensor 610 so that the area is removed. In addition, as a winning privilege, it is conceivable to display a special video, a privilege that can acquire a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and information that can acquire a large amount of the points. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player can actually participate, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In this control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by the player's fingers and reflected. It is configured to detect the player's fingers by receiving light with the light receiving unit, but other methods may be adopted as long as the sensor can detect the movement of the fingers.

For example, a human sensor that has multiple sensing axes configured in the detection area and detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axis, or a pyroelectric that is a type of polarized material. The current generated by receiving infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) emitted from the human body on the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body (current generated with changes in the charge state) using an electric body. A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects fingers based on this can be considered.

When using a pyroelectric infrared sensor, it is advisable to mount the pyroelectric element on a dome-shaped lens in order to have directivity in the detection direction. Further, the pyroelectric element may be composed of an inorganic ceramic material (lead zirconate titanate (PZT) or the like) or an organic material (polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or the like). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film composed of PVDF, it is possible to configure the infrared sensor as a flexible plastic film, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

Further, by arranging a plurality of such elements, it is possible to detect the high-speed movement and the moving direction of the fingers, and it is possible to detect the gesture operation of moving the fingers. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect in which the player can actually participate, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. As other sensors, a non-contact photoelectric sensor, a capacitance type proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a shaking control process (S1316), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this shaking control process (S1316). This shaking control process is a process executed when the central floating unit 400 is shaken by using the drive motor 450.

Here, the variable control (operation control) of the variable member (central floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed of a stepping motor. The stepping motor rotates in steps of a fixed angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with the input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (steps) and pulse speed (frequency). It is configured so that the rotation amount and rotation speed of the motor can be controlled and the variable member can be movably controlled.

Each variable member is configured to be variable by being driven by a transmission means (gear) interlocked with the rotational drive of the stepping motor described above. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a drive motor control means that outputs a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to the minimum unit in which the variable member can be changed (a unit in which the gear that is the transmission means rotates by one tooth). Has been done.

First, the movable control of the arm body 430 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable via a crank gear 453, which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means), by the rotational force of the drive motor 450. Then, the variable member mounted on the arm body 430 is configured to be variable based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). The position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the rotation speed (number of steps) of the drive motor 450 based on the state in which the origin detection sensor detects the origin.

Next, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by the rotational force of the drive motor 450 via the crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rear body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is mounted is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). Based on the state where the limited detection sensor detects the origin, the position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the rotation speed (number of steps) of the drive motor 445.

That is, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be capable of operating a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motors 450 (two) and the drive motors 445, respectively (FIGS. 31, 33, and FIG. 34, see FIGS. 37 and 39).

Further, in this control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for the variably configured member so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, by comparing the position (assumed position) of the variable member calculated from the rotation speed (number of steps) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor, the variable member can be normally moved and controlled. It becomes possible to determine whether or not it has been done. If the assumed position and the current position are different, it is possible that the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is out of step and the movement is poor.

Returning to FIG. 95, the explanation will be continued. In the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory drive start timing (S2101). The accessory drive start timing is a case where the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes an effect of shaking the accessory. It indicates the timing at which the effect of shaking the character is executed. When it is the accessory drive start timing (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the operating flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this process is terminated.

In addition, although this figure describes the case where the accessory drive start timing performed based on the fluctuation pattern is set, the accessory drive start timing can be set by operating the frame button 22, for example. It may be configured as follows.

In the process of S2101, when it is not the accessory drive start timing (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the operating flag 223v is ON (S2104). When the operating flag 223v is off (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the operating flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not the operation scenario is a shaking operation scenario (S2106). In the case of a shaking motion scenario (S2106: Yes), the information of the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), the shaking motion data is set from the shaking motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the acceleration sensor information is left rotation data, rotation data is set in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation, and when the acceleration sensor information is right rotation data, the arm member Set the rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is clockwise rotation.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is not a scenario of shaking operation (S2106: No), this process is terminated. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether it is the scenario end (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the scenario end (S2109: Yes), the operating flag 223v is set to off (S2110), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is determined based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444. I have decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotational state) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 445 based on the actual rotation state. The rotational force of 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

In particular, in a variable member such as the arm member 444 in which the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive and control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

The swing control of the variable member may be performed by using the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to drive the variable member (arm). It controls the rotation of the member 444). Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when the frame button 22 is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member, and the worst timing is obtained. When pressed with, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

With this configuration, the rotation status of the variable member can be changed based on the player's operation, and the effect that the player participates in can be increased, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 87, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S2201). When it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), the SW effect control process described later is executed (S2202), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S2201: No), the special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and then this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the SW effect control process (S2202), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this SW effect control process (S2202). In this SW effect control process, the process based on the SW operation is executed in the normal period (effect mode A), which is a period other than the period (time effect period) in which the effect based on the time information acquired from RTC292 is performed.

In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time is larger than 0 (S2301). If the SW effective time is 0 (S2301: No), this process ends.

In the process of S2301, if the SW effective time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (other touch switch 290 and selection switch 291) is pressed (S2303). If the frame button 22 or the like is not pressed (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected display advance notice command is set (S2304), and the SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223j is reset (S2304). S2305), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a special SW effect control process (S2203), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this special SW effect control process (S2203). In this special SW effect control process, the process based on the SW operation is executed during the period (time effect period) in which the effect based on the time information acquired from RTC292 is performed.

In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the contact effect is on standby during the time effect period. That is, the standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect is selected in the time effect period. Then, by turning on the touch switch 290, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

When it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display status command indicating that the wait flag 223o is off is set (S2314). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2312, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S2311, when it is determined that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is larger than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 99, the touch sensor control process (S2316), which is one of the processes in the special SW effect control process (see FIG. 98), will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this touch sensor control process (S2316). In the touch sensor control process (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). After that, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322). When the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). After that, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2331.

When it is determined in the process of S2322 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328). ). When the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328: Yes), the level storage area 223k is subtracted by 1 (S2329). After that, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the process proceeds to S2331.

In the process of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). When the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), the expectation level based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation degree storage area 223m (S2332). After that, a display command indicating that the expectation degree has been set is set (S2333), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 111, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S3003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (S2901 in FIG. 101) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the present boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2901) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3002. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S3002 and S3002, the processes of S3003 to S3005 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. However, all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 100. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2903, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2904). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2904, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2905). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 109 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)). The determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the main control device was instructed to start the variable effect. When the voice lamp control device 113 is used from 110, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, which is simple. It is possible to perform variable effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2905, the interrupt permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 75) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal production image. Is executed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105.

In the display setting process (S3203), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3206). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), which are determined in the task process (S3204), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

Next, the update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3209) is executed to process S3204. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 103, S3202), as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S3301: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3303).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), the process returns to S3301.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3305) will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 104 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3401).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3403, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3406), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3405, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3402e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 103. In the processing of S3304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a stop type command for display (S3306: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3307), and the process returns to the process of S3301.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 104 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and the value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S3502).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S3503).

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3306, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3306: No), then it is determined whether there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). If it is determined that the display hold command has been received (S3308: Yes), the hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbol is displayed, and the color of the displayed reserved symbol is set to be variable. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display hold command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display notice command (S3310). When it is determined that there is a display notice command (S3310: Yes), the notice display data based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed to set a display such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S3310: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (S3312). When it is determined that there is a display status command (S3312: Yes), the background display data corresponding to the status based on the command is set (S3313). As a result, the display corresponding to the time effect and the like is set. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display touch command (S3314). When it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), the corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). As a result, the display corresponding to the touch effect such as the contact effect is set. After that, the process returns to the process of S3301.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3316), and if there is an error command (S3316). : Yes), error command processing is executed (S3318), and the process returns to S3301 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3318) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3601). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3602), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3601, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3602 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S3602. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 103. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S3316 (S3316: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3317), and the process returns to the process of S3301.

In the processing of S3301 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes). ), The processing of S3302 to S3317 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3301 to S3307 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3301 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 104 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3401. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3203), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3701: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3702 to S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3702), S3703 to S3704. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3703). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3704).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3801).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 106. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3705.

In S3705, the pointer update process is executed (S3705). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3901, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3903), and if it is a demo display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3905), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3903, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3903: No). S3906), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3902: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 106 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3906 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3709).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3709: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3710), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3714), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3204), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3715, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the definite display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3716). If the demo display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3717) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3718). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3716, if the demo display flag is on (S3716: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S3205), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 109 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4001, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). FIG. 109 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4101: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4102). In the process of S4102, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S4102 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4102: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4103. Further, as a result of the processing of S4101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4103.

In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4103: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 is described in the drawing list. Based on the transferred transfer data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4103 (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, a normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3705) of the display setting process (S3203) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202), and if it is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205.

Further, in the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4202: No), the processes of S4203 and S4204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

In the process of S4206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4206 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4207. Further, as a result of the processing of S4205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4205: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4207.

In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4212: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S4213), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4214). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the storage destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4215), and the process proceeds to S4209.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4214, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4209, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The discrimination in the processing of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S4209, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: No), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (S4210). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206), and the image controller 237 describes the transfer in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4210, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3206), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (S3204) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 75 (S4301). That is, in the processing of S4301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3204). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S4302 (S4303). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the V division executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In the second control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the first control example. The point that the reel control process is added in addition to the process performed in the first control example described above, and the variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control process. The difference is that a new process has been added to the variable display setting process. Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112A is an example showing a display mode in a state where the housing 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 112A, the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as the main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the accommodating body 330, and the first A third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sub-third symbol) that is compositely displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotating body 340b is displayed at the same time. This display mode is executed by raising the housing 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. It is a display mode to be displayed.

In this display mode, three main symbols and three sub-third symbols are displayed in the left-right direction, respectively, and the left column, the middle column, and the right column are configured to be displayed correspondingly to each other. That is, the main third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which 4 and 7 are displayed) and the sub third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which A and A'are combinedly displayed) correspond to each other. The main third symbol in the column (blank symbol) and the sub third symbol in the middle column (the symbol in which C and B'are combinedly displayed) correspond to each other, and the main third symbol in the right column (blank symbol). And the sub-third symbol in the right column (the symbol in which C and A'are combinedly displayed) correspond to each other.

The sub-third symbol has "A and A'", "B and B'", and "C and C'" as specific combinations, and all three sub-third symbols are "A and A'". When it is displayed in a composite manner, it notifies that the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is a big hit. Further, when all three sub-third symbols are combined and displayed as "B and B'" or "C and C'", the player is notified to expect a big hit, for example, "B and B". By arranging three sub-third symbols combined with "'", it is configured to be displayed as "Cha-n-su".

FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which the third symbol on the right is switched after the display of FIG. 112 (a). As shown in this figure, when the main third symbol and the sub third symbol are displayed, the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is displayed according to the combination of the respective symbols. For example, the hit / miss of the special symbol is displayed. If the judgment result is a big hit, the combination in which the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit is displayed in the main 3rd symbol (combination in which 3 shark / turtle symbols are lined up), and the special symbol is correct / miss in the sub 3rd symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols that are combined and displayed by A and A'are lined up) is displayed.

As described above, in the present control example, the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is notified using the third symbol which is variablely displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal gaming state. When shifting to the reel mode, which is a gaming state different from the normal gaming state, the combination of the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-mentioned sub third symbol is special. It is configured so that the result of determining whether the symbol is correct or not can be notified.

As the conditions for shifting to the reel mode described above, the reel mode is used when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a predetermined judgment result (big hit), or when the variation pattern command or winning command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is used. May contain production information corresponding to.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a reel scenario table 222e added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the main process 2. Of the main processes 2, the processes S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 are the same as the processes S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 of the main process (see FIG. 87) in the first control example, respectively. Since the process is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed, and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. Since it is different, it will be explained below.

The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330), which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In this reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). When the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). After that, the setting start flag 223w is set to off (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to on (S2405), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when the setting start flag 223w is off (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). When the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). After that, it is determined whether or not the data is end data (S2408). If it is end data (S2408: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not end data (S2408: No), operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process 2.

In this fluctuation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). When the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). When the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B and set (S1514). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this process ends.

Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table includes a table referenced in the effect control process (look-ahead control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Is provided separately from the table referenced.

In S1515, the reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is divided into a position where the player can see (exposed position) and a position where the player cannot see easily (storage position). A plurality of scenarios in which the reel position where the position is determined and the rotation speed are predetermined as the rotation operation of the reel member are prepared, and are based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount. It is configured to be appropriately selected and set (see FIG. 134 (a)).

In the process of S1512, when the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C (S1516). After that, this process ends.

Next, the variation display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1340). In each of the variable display setting processes 2 of S1711 to S1719, the same processes as those of S1701 to S1709 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example are executed. Detailed explanation will be omitted. This control example differs from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and will be described below.

In the process of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720). In the case of the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this process is terminated. The reel mode entry pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit is included more than the stop type selection command when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is not a big hit. ing.

On the other hand, if it is not a reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a reel mode end pattern (S1722). If it is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to off (S1723), and this process is terminated.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 133. In the third control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the second control example. Specifically, the above-mentioned command determination process is added with the effect change process at the time of winning, the volume setting process 2 is added, the special effect process is added, and the shaking control process 2 is added. , The difference is that other processing is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the description of the other configurations will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 118, a display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described. Here, the special volume setting effect, which explains the special volume setting effect, is an effect generated based on the fact that a ball is inserted, and the volume setting at the normal time is performed during the period when the effect is occurring (Fig. A special volume setting (see FIG. 130) different from that (see 93) is possible. When the volume is set by this special volume setting, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the jackpot expectation of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation in the reserved symbol are special voices, volumes, or display modes. It is configured to be notified using.

According to the special volume setting effect configured in this way, the notification suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is also executed by the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of settings, volume setting and expectation suggestion notification (effect setting), based on one operation performed by the player, and to the frame button 22 (operation means) performed by the player to enjoy the game. It has the effect of making it possible to reduce the number of operations.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special volume setting effect. As shown in this figure, when the special volume setting effect is executed, a part of the sub symbol (blank symbol) is changed to the volume symbol indicating the volume setting and displayed. During this special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor devices 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area where the volume symbol is displayed, and the player can use the glass plate 16a corresponding to the volume symbol. By touching it, you can set a special volume.

When the special volume setting becomes possible, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol displayed on the display screen is changed to a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the magnitude of the volume and displayed.

Further, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the display mode of the volume symbol is changed to a display mode according to the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol whose display mode is changing and the jackpot expectation degree in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the color of the volume pattern is changed from white → blue → yellow → red → rainbow. As a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation, not only the color is changed, but also, for example, the type of the pattern displayed on the volume symbol is changed or the form of the symbol mark displayed as the volume symbol is changed. It is possible to change the method by increasing the number or increasing the number.

Further, as a notification effect based on the jackpot expectation level, not only the display mode of the volume symbol may be changed, but also notification using voice (volume) may be performed. For example, an operation of raising the volume level may be performed. Regardless of this, a contradiction effect such as a decrease in the volume of the pachinko machine 10 or a notification sound effect for notifying that a big hit exists in the hit / fail determination result may be performed. When the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in this way, it is possible to make the different categories of volume setting and notification effect related by performing the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation degree using sound. This makes it possible to make it easier for the player who has set the volume to notice the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation.

In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is described as a special volume setting effect, but the same control may be used for other than the volume setting. For example, it may be used when setting the brightness and the hue of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display device). When such a configuration is adopted, the sub-design (blank design) is changed and displayed as a light design indicating brightness or a color bar design indicating a hue, and the display mode of the above-mentioned design is displayed as a notification effect based on the expectation of a big hit. In addition to the effect of changing, it is preferable to use a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided in the pachinko machine 10 for notification. With this configuration, the expectation of the jackpot is executed by the visual notification effect (lamp brightness, color) based on the operation performed by the player to change the visual setting (brightness, color). It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to notice the notification effect.

Further, the plurality of sub-symbols (blank symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed to volume symbols, light symbols, and color bar symbols, respectively, so that settings corresponding to the symbols selected by the player are made. You may.

In this control example, the sub-symbols that are stopped and displayed and a part of the sub-symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner are configured to be changed to volume symbols, but only the sub-symbols that are stopped and displayed can be changed to volume symbols. It may be configured so that only the sub symbol in the variable display can be changed to the volume symbol. Further, the jackpot expectation may be notified based on the volume setting operation in the normal time.

Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which whether or not the player touches the volume symbol is determined from the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600, but the volume symbol is operated by an operation means other than the left and right sensor device 600. It may be configured to determine that it has been selected.

As described above, in the special volume setting effect in this control example, the player only performs the operation of setting the volume, and the state suggestion notification effect suggesting the jackpot expectation level is also performed by the player. It is possible to prevent the operation of the operating means (frame button 22, selection switch 291) from becoming complicated.

Further, since the mode using sound is used as the mode of the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, it is possible to easily make the player notice the state suggestion notification effect.

Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time effect period. First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is the timekeeping means by the time setting process (see FIG. 86) in the start-up process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC292. Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period (effect mode B) is set when 54 minutes have elapsed. The normal game period (effect mode A) is set until the preparation period is set. Then, one minute after the preparation period (effect mode B) is set, the time effect period (effect mode C) is set. After that, when 5 minutes have passed since the time effect period (effect mode C) was set, the normal game period is set again.

In this control example, the player acquires points during the normal game period (effect mode A1), displays the result of the points acquired during the preparation period (effect mode B), and displays the time effect according to the acquired points. The content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) is changed, and the effect of changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) is performed based on the result of the time effect.

Next, the detailed contents of the effect in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. The description of the same effect as that described in the first control example described above will be omitted.

FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, in order for the player to acquire points. It is a figure which shows the mini-game to be executed. Three treasure chests are lined up in the center of the display screen, and a comment urging the player to select an arbitrary treasure chest is displayed above the treasure chests. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure box, a display mode showing points appears from the treasure box, and the points are added to the points earned by the player.

Further, on this display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum earnable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as "10/100" at the lower left of the screen. It should be noted that the content of the time effect to be executed during the later time effect period is determined according to the points acquired during the normal game period.

Furthermore, in the vicinity of the area where the earned points are displayed, an earned point indicator with the maximum value set to 100 points is displayed, visually indicating how much the current earned points are with respect to the maximum value. You can grasp it. Further, the indicator has a boundary line at a position indicating the number of points earned 40, 70, 90, and the character "GET" is displayed for each boundary line. In this figure, the display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

This boundary line indicates a value at which the table (see FIG. 125 (a)) used when determining the content of the time effect (effect performed in the effect mode C) to be performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required up to the stage where the time effect may be changed while setting the boundary line as the target value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the mini game.

In addition, the display of the number of points earned on the indicator is configured so that the color changes when the boundary line is crossed. In this control example, the above-mentioned two displays are performed for the acquired points, but only one of them may be displayed.

In this control example, points can be obtained not only in the mini-game shown in FIG. 120 (a) but also in a normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b). Therefore, FIG. 120 (b) will be described.

FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect of “fish school reach”. It is a figure which shows. When the "fish school reach" is executed, "fish school GET + 20 points" is displayed on the display screen, and 20 points are added. In this way, even if it is a normal game production, points can be earned when a specific production is executed, so that it is possible to accumulate points even if the mini game cannot be operated well. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect that occurs during the normal game period.

It should be noted that the points that can be obtained in a normal game effect may be configured so that the number of points and a specific effect to which the points are given can be set at random. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to display the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the normal game period on the display screen. In addition, when all the effects set as specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege of maximizing the points earned may be provided.

Further, the number of points acquired by executing a mini game or a specific effect during the normal game period may not be displayed on the display screen, and some points may not be added on the display, for example. , It is better to acquire and display less points than the points actually earned in the mini game, or to display a part of the effect set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display. .. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the specific number of points to be earned, and the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)) can be enjoyed.

FIG. 121A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and is a diagram showing points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which announces the result of a number. A comment is displayed in the upper area of the main display screen to inform that the time effect "contact time" is about to start, and the remaining time until the time effect is started (35) in the right area of the main display screen. A countdown display unit for displaying a countdown (seconds) is provided. When the numerical value (number of seconds) displayed on the countdown display unit becomes 0, the time effect period (effect mode C) is entered and the time effect is started.

Further, in the left area of this display screen, an earned point result display unit for displaying the result of the number of points earned during the normal game period (effect mode A1) is provided, and the points earned during the normal game period are displayed. Will be done. If it is configured not to display all the points earned during the normal game period on the display screen, the result of the number of points displayed in the result display section of this figure can be seen for the first time during the normal game period. You can grasp the number of points you have earned.

FIG. 121B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which displays the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) using a number. In the upper area of this display screen, a comment indicating that the dog breed to be used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) has been determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog breed display unit for displaying the dog breed determined this time is provided, and the dog breed C is displayed as the dog breed to be used during the next time production period. In addition, a display indicating the remaining 9 seconds is displayed on the countdown display unit.

Here, the breeds of dogs used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breeds A to D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time production period, and are selected and determined by a dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) described later. Each dog breed has its own individuality, and the degree of increase in reliability during the contact time (during time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set as "normal", and the effect in which the reliability can be custom-set is set as "fish school reach".

In this control example, the type of effect that allows the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability to be custom-set is set for each dog breed, but the player can custom-set the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability. It may be possible to select the type of possible production. In such a case, for example, when the dog type D is selected, the selectable range may be reduced, and when the dog type A is selected, the selectable range may be increased. With this configuration, the player will play the game so that the dog type A is set in order to make various custom settings.

In addition, a game mode other than the game mode (reach type, reliability) described in this control example may be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of the premier effect in the variable display in which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the appearance rate of the effect that can give a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and the like can be considered.

In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period for acquiring points (effect mode A1) and a period for executing the effect based on the contents set in the time effect (effect mode A2), and the normal game period is executed alternately. However, for example, at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time production period), the player may be able to select which period to execute during the normal game period. With this configuration, if the desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it is possible to select the period for regaining points, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

In addition, the normal game period may be divided into the first half part and the second half part, the first half part may be a period for executing the production based on the contents set during the time production period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points. The period to be acquired and the period to execute the effect based on the content set in the time effect may be overlapped, and both may be performed at the same time.

Further, the points acquired during the normal game period may be accumulated all day long, and the content of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long time. In addition, the acquired points are converted into information that can be read by an external terminal (portable device) (for example, a two-dimensional code) and output, and information created based on the information read by the external device (for example, a password). By inputting to the pachinko machine 10, it may be possible to execute a game in which the previously acquired points are inherited. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who does not have time to play for a long time over a day.

Next, the detailed contents of the effect in the shaking effect 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, wherein the player has an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges to operate a frame button 22 in a timely manner to shake.

Here, the shaking effect 2 will be described. The shaking effect 2 is an effect of moving the slightly shaking arm member 444 based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. More specifically, the timing of calculating the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 and notifying the operation timing to the display screen based on the calculated data. Display notifications. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444 is determined. Is.

In the above-mentioned shaking effect 2, the arm member 444 is controlled to shake greatly by operating the frame button 22 at the right timing, and when the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is bad, the arm member 444 is controlled. It is controlled so that the shaking becomes small. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the operation of the player, the player feels that he / she is participating in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and thus he / she is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

Further, in the shaking effect 2 in this control example, the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual shaking state of the variable member, and is therefore displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual shaking state of the variable member will be synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the right timing according to the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to be greatly shaken, so that it is possible to eliminate the discomfort to the player.

Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. A comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the central area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen. Is provided with a timing display unit in which an indicator is displayed by increasing / decreasing movement in the left-right direction in a predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display unit displays an increase / decrease movement in the left-right direction based on information obtained by digitizing the actual shaking state of the arm member 444 using an acceleration sensor. The speed of increasing / decreasing movement in the left-right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swing width of the arm member 444 increases, or the information obtained from the acceleration sensor may be corrected and controlled to be constantly constant. May be good.

Then, the timing at which the indicator is located at the center position S (range of a) in the predetermined region M is the timing at which the arm member 444 is shaken most efficiently by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. As the timing moves away from the center position S (range b → range c), the arm member 444 is controlled so as not to shake significantly. It should be noted that the timing display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during one shaking effect 2.

In this control example, the player operates the frame button 22 at the right timing as the shaking member effect 2, but the effect shown in FIG. 122 may be used as another effect. FIG. 122B is a diagram showing another example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, and is an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) in which the player is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges to operate the frame button 22 repeatedly in order to shake.

In this alternative example, a comment urging the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 and a figure imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the center area of the display screen, and the right side area of the display screen is repeatedly hit. There is provided a continuous hit count display unit that displays an indicator that moves (rises) upward according to the number of times. In another example described in this figure, the indicator of the number of repeated hits display unit rises according to the number of times the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit. Then, the higher the indicator level of the continuous hit count display unit (as it rises), the more the arm member 444 may be configured to be driven at the timing of large shaking.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
The third control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example, a rotating body operation table 222f and a dog type selection table 222g are added to the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example has a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β added to the second control example. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d are not described, but they are in the other memory area 223z. It is assumed that it is included, and the description thereof is simply omitted, and the same processing as that of the second control example is performed.

Next, the combination of the figures displayed on the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. 124. Regarding the configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the same parts as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body operation table showing an error range used when setting a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the combination of the figures in this control example. Here, the rotational operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, its rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism (detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the first embodiment). do). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355, which is a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b, is set to 20.

Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven and the first gear 353 is rotated by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a is rotated by about 25 degrees. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth, the second gear 355 also rotates by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b perform rotational operations at different angles based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 124. In the rotating body operation table shown in this figure, the vertical axis is No. Is provided from "1" to "141". No. shown on this vertical axis. Is attached corresponding to the unit controlled by the drive motor control means described above, that is, for each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. It is attached corresponding to, for example, No. The state in which the first rotating body 340a is rotated 25 degrees and the second rotating body 340b is rotated 18 degrees from the state shown in No. 1 is No. It is shown as 2. Hereinafter, numbers are assigned in order based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, and No. When becomes "141", No. It returns to the same state as "1". That is, the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 have 140 teeth, that is, the first rotating body 340a rotates 3600 degrees (10 rotations) and the second rotating body 340b rotates 2520 degrees (7 rotations). It is configured to return to the state.

Further, the rotating body operation table is provided with a first error range and a second error range, and each No. It shows whether the display mode of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b corresponding to the above is acceptable as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. The mechanism for generating an error in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the structure for preventing the display mode from being uncomfortable due to the error are the structures described in the above-described first embodiment. Since it is the same as, the description thereof will be omitted.

The first error range shown in the rotating body operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and the second error range is. It is a range wider than the first error range, and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to the player.

For example, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode combined and displayed by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the state of "48" is "B, B'", and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode combined with the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the state of "89" is also "B, B'", and this display mode is set as the second error range.

This is No. 1 which is the first error range from the display mode (display information) of the current rotating body acquired in the look-ahead reel display effect processing (see FIG. 129) described later. When the amount of rotation until moving to "48" is a predetermined amount or more, No. 2 which is the second error range. This is so that the correction can be performed so as to move to "89".

By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time until each rotating body is stopped (the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol) is short, for example, in the winning command generated while the third symbol is variable display. Even if it is a variation effect using a rotating body based on the rotation body or a variation effect using a rotating body based on operating the frame button 22 generated during the variation display of the third symbol, a predetermined stop display mode is displayed. It is possible to make it.

In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the first embodiment described above is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are rotated in the forward rotation direction (ascending order direction of No.) or in the reverse rotation direction (No. ascending order direction). It is possible to rotate in the descending order direction of No.), and it is controlled by the drive motor control means provided in the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, each table used in the special effect processing and the shaking effect process 2 added in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog breed selection table used in the special effect processing (see FIG. 132) described later.

This dog type selection table is a special effect (contact time) that is executed while the effect mode is set to mode C, based on the points (mission achievement result) acquired while the effect mode is set to mode A. ) Is a table for selecting the dog type used in), and is configured so that any one of dog type A to dog type D is selected depending on the mission achievement result.

Dog type A to dog type D are set so that the degree of increase in reliability during the contact time (during time production) production (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set as "normal", and the effect of customizing the reliability is set as "fish school reach". The more points the mission achievement result has, the higher the effect of the effect is set for the player, and the dog breed A is set to have the highest effect.

The high production effect here means, for example, by increasing the frequency of appearance of production (premier production) that rarely appears normally, or by expanding the range of custom settings for reliability, in a normal game. It means making it possible to experience a production that cannot be experienced in the state.

Next, FIG. 125 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the shaking operation table 2 used in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. The shaking operation table 2 acquires the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable status of the variable member (arm member 444) in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when the shaking effect is performed. It is a table which sets a direction to rotate a variable member (arm member 444) based on the acceleration sensor information for this.

In the shaking operation table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timing is divided into three, "81 to 100", "51 to 80", and "0 to 50". This division corresponds to the indicators "a", "b", and "c" displayed in FIG. 122 (a), respectively. For example, the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is in the circle (center position S). In the case of (middle), the direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated is set with reference to the table of "81 to 100" whose button operation timing corresponds to "a".

Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the shaking operation table 2 of FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the variable member, and is classified, for example, the acceleration sensor. If the information obtained from is indicating the situation where the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set with reference to the table to which the button operation timing and the acceleration sensor information described above correspond. In this control example, when the button operation timing is "81 to 100", the data for driving the drive motor is set in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member increases, and when the button operation timing is "51 to 80", the data is set. , Do not set the data to drive the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. Further, when the button operation timing is "0 to 50", the data for driving the drive motor is set in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member becomes smaller.

In this control example, the data for driving the drive motor is not set in order to maintain the rotation width of the variable member, but the data for driving the drive motor so as to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is set. It may be set.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 133. This control example differs from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that some processing of command judgment processing, volume setting processing, and shaking control processing is changed, and special effect processing is newly added. The parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main process. In the main process, first, the processes of S1301 to S1310 are executed as in the second control example. Next, the command determination process 2 that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1351). The details of this command determination process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. After the command determination process 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed in the same manner as in the second control example described above, and then the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Next, the shaking control process 2 (S1354) executed during the shaking effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is executed. The details of the shaking control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Then, the other processes (S1355) described in the first control example or the second control example described above are executed, and the processes from S1317 to S1321 are executed in the same manner as in the second control example described above. In S1355, the synchronization effect management process (S1313), the left / right selection process (S1315), and the reel control process (S1330) are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the details of the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1351). In this command determination process 2 (S1351), a prize-winning effect change process (S1451), which is performed when a special symbol winning command is received, is added to the command determination process (S1311) in the second control example described above. The other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 2, first, the processes of S1401 to S1410 are executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned command determination process (see FIG. 88). Next, when it is determined in S1410 that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received (S1410: No), a process corresponding to another command (S1412) is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned command determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the winning command of the special symbol has been received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area (S1411), and the effect change processing at the time of winning is performed. (S1451) is executed. This winning effect change process (S1451) executes the effect changing process based on the winning command when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110, and the details thereof are shown in FIG. 128. Will be described later. Then, after executing the effect change processing (S1451) at the time of winning, the process proceeds to S1412.

As described above, in this control example, when a winning command of a special symbol is received from the main control device 110, an effect based on the information contained in the winning command (so-called look-ahead effect) can be realized. It is described as. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects by changing the effects at a timing other than the timing at which the variation pattern command is received, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is not easily bored by the player. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the winning effect change process (S1451) performed by the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a winning effect change process (S1451). In this prize-winning effect change process (S1451), a process related to an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) executed based on the information included in the received winning command is executed.

In the process of changing the effect at the time of winning, first, the winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether or not the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include the information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the look-ahead effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403).

This chance eye display effect is an effect executed based on the determination result of the winning command received this time, and is a third symbol executed until the third symbol change based on the winning command received this time is started. In the fluctuation, by setting the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed to a predetermined specific combination other than the combination that becomes the jackpot, it is an effect suggesting the possibility that the jackpot may exist in the determination result of the reserved symbol.

If it is determined in S4403 that the look-ahead effect is not the chance eye display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is the chance eye display effect (S4403: Yes), then it is determined whether the third symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation (S4404).

Here, when it is determined that the third symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation (S4404: Yes), a display stop type command in which the stop symbol is a chance eye is set (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4408.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the third symbol is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation (S4404: No), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405). If the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), the reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining fluctuation time (S4406), and the setting start flag is set. Set to on. Then, it shifts to S4408.

As described above, in the chance eye display effect in this control example, the mode of displaying the chance eye can be changed according to the timing when the winning command including the information for executing the chance target display effect is received. That is, if the timing at which the winning command is received fluctuates on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, a process of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation to the chance eye is executed. However, since it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, a display stop type command is set in which the stop symbol of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes a chance eye. On the other hand, when the timing at which the winning command is received is variable and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is not in high-speed fluctuation (for example, at least one of the plurality of symbol rows is stopped and displayed. At the timing of the movement or at the timing during low-speed display in which the player can visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbol at least one of the plurality of symbol rows), the reel member (first rotating body 340a) provided in the rotating body elevating unit 300 A member that compositely displays the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b and displays a plurality of third symbols in a variable manner by rotating each rotating body) is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled to be raised to a position (exposed position) that covers the third symbol displayed on the screen and to display a chance eye.

With this configuration, even if a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received at the timing when the third symbol is stopped or fluctuated at low speed on the display screen, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to display the chance eye without any need. Therefore, when a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received, the stop display of the changing third symbol can be changed to the chance eye, and the changing third symbol can be changed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. There is an effect that the period during which the stop display can be changed to the chance eye can be lengthened.

In this control example, S4405 determines the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol. This is because the reel member stored in the storage position that is difficult for the player to see in the normal gaming state is driven to the exposed position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by driving the rotating body elevating unit 300. If the time required for raising the reel member to the exposed position is shortened, the remaining variable time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the reel member stored in the storage position is reel-controlled so that the display mode synthetically displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof corresponds to the chance eye of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member is completed and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body elevating unit 300, the above-mentioned reel control is executed. When the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are located at the origin position (initial position), the display mode displayed on the display surface may be configured to correspond to the chance eye. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a reel control in which the display mode of the reel member is an opportunity, and the data capacity can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 128, the explanation will be continued. Next, the look-ahead reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the look-ahead reel display effect is a look-ahead reel in order to reliably display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the symbol change corresponding to the winning command including the information of the look-ahead reel display effect within the fluctuation time. This is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member by the time the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the display effect is started. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Then, after the pre-reading reel display effect processing (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-reading effect is a special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period during which a special volume setting different from the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) is possible, and when the volume is set by this special volume setting, the volume is set. , The volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the expected degree of jackpot of the changing special symbol and the expected degree of jackpot in the reserved symbol are notified by using a special voice, volume, or display mode.

If it is not determined in S4409 that the look-ahead effect is the special volume setting (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is a special volume setting (S4409: Yes), a display stop type command in which the blank symbol (sub symbol) is changed to the volume symbol is set (S4410). Then, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

Next, other processing related to the look-ahead effect is executed (S4412). Here, as another process, for example, there is a process of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information included in the winning command. After executing the other look-ahead processing of S4412, this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, when a winning command of a special symbol is received from the main control device, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the information included in the winning command. This makes it possible to provide the player with an effect that suggests the result of the judgment based on the prize between the time when the ball wins in the prize opening and the time when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the prize starts. This has the effect of making the player interested in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the look-ahead reel display effect processing (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead reel display effect process (S4408). This look-ahead reel display effect processing (S4408) is a process related to the look-ahead effect performed during the above-mentioned winning effect change process (S1451).

When the look-ahead reel display effect processing is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (sub-third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and the look-ahead stop display information (sub-third symbol based on the winning command) are displayed. (Stop display information) and (S4501). The sub-third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by synthetically displaying the symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Further, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally controlled by the rotational drive of the drive motor 350.

Therefore, the current display information can be acquired by detecting the rotational drive status of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (number of pulses) for rotationally driving the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, is detected, and the location corresponding to the current number of steps is acquired as the current display information from the rotating body operation table.

Further, in the acquisition of the look-ahead stop display information, the stop display symbol of the sub-third symbol based on the winning command is determined from the information included in the winning command, and the stop display symbol is the first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range. It is for acquiring information.

Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the look-ahead stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. 1 to which the current display information corresponds. No. to which the look-ahead stop display information corresponds. Calculate the difference with. In this control example, since the drive motor 350 is configured to be able to rotate forward and reverse, the difference to be calculated is when the drive motor 350 is rotated forward (the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which No. increases. When the drive motor 350 is reversed (when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases), the rotation amount having the smaller difference is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated in S4502 is the rotation amount for rotating the first rotating body more than 1080 degrees (S4503). Here, the amount of rotation of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the first rotating body to make one revolution. That is, in S4503, the No. 1 to which the current display information corresponds. No. to which the look-ahead stop display information corresponds It is determined whether the number of seconds required to move (rotate) to is 3 seconds or more.

When it is determined in the process of S4503 that the rotation amount is the rotation amount to be rotated more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), the No. corresponding to the stop display information. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and shifts to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. 124, No. corresponding to the current information. However, in the first error range, the stop display information corresponds to No. No. which needs to be rotated more than 1080 degrees in order to rotate to. In the case of No., the stop display information corresponds to the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less. Since there is, No. corresponding to the stop display information in the processing of S4506. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range, so that the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4503 that the rotation amount is 1080 degrees or less, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, this process is terminated.

Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table includes a table referenced in the effect control process (look-ahead control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Is provided separately from the table referenced.

In S4504, the reel scenario table corresponding to the look-ahead control process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, either the position where the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be visually recognized (exposed position) or the position where the player cannot easily see the reel member (storage position). The reel position is determined to be positioned at, the rotation speed of the reel member, the presence / absence of pre-rotation, and the presence / absence of a notification effect for notifying the player that the look-ahead reel display effect is in progress. A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared, and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on the information included in the winning command, the amount of rotation operation, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

The pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table is No. 1 corresponding to the current display information. No. corresponding to the stop display information from The rotation operation up to is performed not only during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the look-ahead information (information on the look-ahead reel display effect), but also on the winning command including the look-ahead information (information on the look-ahead reel display effect). No. corresponding to the current display information even while other variation display (pre-variation display) executed until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to is started. No. corresponding to the stop display information from It is a control to rotate the reel symbol in advance toward.

This pre-rotation control is based on a pattern in which the rotation movement amount is uniformly rotated for each fluctuation display based on the number of times of the pre-variation display (or the number of reserved symbols), and a rotation movement amount. There is a pattern of rotating at once up to the pre-rotation operation amount set based on, and these are set based on the value acquired from the effect counter and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation display.

By using such a configuration, even if the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the look-ahead information (information of the look-ahead reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the variation display (information on the look-ahead reel display effect). The number of rotations) can be reduced in advance, and the look-ahead reel display effect can be provided to the player without discomfort.

In the case of the above-mentioned pre-rotation, the effect pattern of raising the reel to the exposed position to perform the pre-rotation and lowering the reel to the storage position again and the pre-rotation with the reel positioned to the storage position. It is advisable to provide both an effect pattern to perform the above.

With this configuration, in the former effect pattern, by performing pre-rotation at the exposed position, the player is notified that the look-ahead reel display effect is being performed, and the player is expected. In the latter effect pattern, which allows the player to play a game, by performing the pre-rotation at the storage position, it is possible to carry out the content of the pre-rotation without noticing the player, as if it were an arbitrary pattern. It is possible to make it appear as if (stop display at No. corresponding to stop display information) is displayed quickly.

Further, the notification effect of notifying the player that the look-ahead reel display effect is in progress is an effect of swinging and driving the accommodating body 300, which is a reel member, at the storage position, and a plurality of notification effects are obtained based on the values acquired from the effect counters. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

A game state or a game result may be added as a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the pattern of the production, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as about 1 second per lap, in reality, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low-speed rotation and medium-speed rotation can be performed. It is configured so that high-speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the processing of S4503, the stop display information corresponds to No. 1 based on the rotation speed in the case of low-speed rotation. Is provided with a correction boundary value (1080 degrees) for correcting from the first error range to the second error range.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player stop display the stop display information regardless of the rotation speed set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

In this control example, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the look-ahead stop display information is larger than the predetermined amount, and if it is larger than the predetermined amount, it is set based on the look-ahead stop display information. No. where the stop display symbol is displayed. Is configured to be acquired from within the second error range, but the stop display symbol may be set from within the first error range or within the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the look-ahead reel display effect as the look-ahead effect is started, or until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. It may be possible to set whether to acquire the stop display symbol from the first error range or the second error range based on the time. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably display the stop display information to the player.

Further, in this control example, this process is configured as an effect process based on the reception of a winning command (so-called look-ahead effect process). For example, an effect process based on the reception of a variation pattern command. This process may be used as the above. With this configuration, it is possible to determine which error range the stop display symbol is set based on based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, and there is a problem that the stop display cannot be made in time within the fluctuation time. It becomes possible to suppress it.

In addition to this, it may be used for an effect executed based on the player operating the frame button 22. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the display screen of the third symbol marking device 81 performs variable display of the third symbol, and the player operates the frame button 22. , It is conceivable that the variation display of the third symbol is changed to the mode using the reel member.

Even when such an effect is executed, the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed in the variable display of the third symbol using the reel member during the variable display of the special symbol. When the effect of switching to the variable display is used, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member can be set from the first error range and the second error range as in this control example. If there is a margin in the remaining fluctuation time of the symbol, it can be set from within the first error range, and if there is no margin in the fluctuation time, it can be set from the second error range, so the stop display can be made in time within the fluctuation time. By providing a second error range, it is possible to suppress problems such as not being present, and even when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol is reduced, the display mode of the third symbol can be changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member. It is possible to change to the display using.

Further, in this control example, the symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol (rotating body symbol) compositely displayed by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are the first. Although it is used as three symbols, for example, only the liquid crystal symbol may be used as the third symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as a directing symbol (a symbol that does not directly correspond to the variable display of the special symbol), or the liquid crystal symbol. May be used as the effect symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. Further, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotating body symbol during one variation display. With this configuration, it is possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the details of the volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process 2 (S1352). The volume setting process 2 (S1352) differs from the volume setting process (S1314) described above in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be ON is added, and the other parts are the same. be. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601). When it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not on (S4601: No), the volume setting process (S1314) described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set to on (S4602). When the special volume setting flag 223β is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether the volume symbol is selected by the player (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the volume symbol is not selected (S4603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume symbol is selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). .. Next, the special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

When the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the volume level controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 is switched from the volume level in the normal game to the special volume level during the special volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect ends and the game returns to the normal game, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate troublesome operations such as the player resetting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 to a volume level suitable for a normal game.

Returning to the process of S4602, when it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is on (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). When it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is raised to set the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and a display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a is not pressed (S4607: No), then it is determined whether the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610).

If it is determined in the process of S4610 that the lower selection switch 291b is not pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to the special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered to set the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and the display indicating the special volume level is displayed. Set the command (S4612). Next, the special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

The special volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process for managing the period in which the special volume is set, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. After the process of S4606 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the special volume setting period management process (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management process (S4606).

In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701). Here, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4701: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is determined by receiving the stop command set in S300 of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 110.

In this control example, the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device are given identification information that can be linked, and the winning command is indicated by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the identification information. It is configured to associate the winning information with the stop command, but other configurations may be used. For example, the area in which the prize information including the information of the special volume setting effect is stored is stored in the prize information storage area, and the area in which the prize information including the information of the special volume setting effect is stored is shifted to the execution area. It may be configured to manage things.

Returning to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4702 that there is no stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set (not yet received) (S4702: No), this processing is terminated because the volume setting period is still in effect. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a stop command (received) corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set, the special volume level is cleared (S4703) and the display of the special volume setting screen is cleared. Is set (S4704). Next, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to off (S4705), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect is set as the special volume level, and can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level. Has been done. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect ends and the game returns to the normal game, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect starts (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area). It will be possible to return to the ready.

Next, the details of the special effect processing (S1353) specified by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect processing (S1353).

In the special effect processing, it is first determined whether the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). When it is determined that the current effect mode is not mode A (S4801: No), the process shifts to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is mode A (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the mini game is in progress (S4802). Here, the mini-game is a game effect shown in FIG. 120 (a) in which a player obtains points by operating an operating means (frame button 22, touch switch 290, selection switch 291).

If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the mini game is not in progress (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mini-game is in progress (S4802: Yes), points corresponding to the result of the mini-game are added to the earned points storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the earned points is set (S4804). ). Then, it shifts to S4805.

Next, it is determined whether the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect in which points can be obtained by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). If it is determined in the process of S4805 that it is not a specific effect (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a specific effect (S4805: Yes), points corresponding to the specific effect are added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

As described above, in the special effect processing when the effect mode is mode A, a process of adding points acquired by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect is performed. In addition, another method may be used as a method in which the player can acquire points during the effect mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that a predetermined password can be input and points are added by the player inputting and operating the predetermined password, or the game result (number of big hits or acquisition). It may be configured so that points are added based on the ball).

Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing (S4802 to S4807) when the effect mode is mode A is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode B (S4808). When it is determined that the effect mode is not mode B (S4808: No), the process shifts to S4811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode is mode B (S4808: Yes), then the dog type is selected from the dog type selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating the dog breed is set (S4810), and the process proceeds to S4811.

As described above, in the special effect processing when the effect mode is mode B, a process of selecting a dog type to be used in mode C, which will be described later, is performed based on the points acquired during mode A. In this control example, by selecting a specific dog breed from a plurality of dog breeds, the content of the setting performed during the mode C (the reliability of the production and the type of the production for setting the reliability) is changed. However, even if it is configured so that the player can select the type of setting performed in mode C and the degree of increase in reliability based on the points acquired in mode A in mode B. good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to expand the range that the player can select as the number of points acquired during the mode A increases. By doing so, the player will actively acquire points, and it will be possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing (S4809 to S4810) when the effect mode is mode B is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not mode C (S4811: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is C (S4811: Yes), the effect corresponding to the dog breed set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-mentioned special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is mode C can be changed (custom setting) with respect to the second control example described above (special effect). With regard to, since the type of production that is the target of custom setting and the degree of increase in the reliability of the production can be changed based on the points acquired when the production mode is mode A, which pachinko machine 10 is Even when staying in the production mode, the player can always participate in the game production, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the details of the shaking control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the shaking control process 2 (S1354).

In the shaking control process 2, it is first determined whether or not the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). When it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operating flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902).

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the fluctuation pattern is not a shaking effect (S4902: No), another shaking control process (S4911) is executed, and this process is terminated. The other shaking control process executed in S4911 is the shaking control process (S1316) shown in FIG. 95.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S49028 that the fluctuation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902: Yes), initial operation data for driving the arm member 444 (movable accessory) in a predetermined mode is set (S4902: Yes). S4903), the operating flag is set to on (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the movable accessory is read, and the shaking information of the movable accessory is acquired (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator based on the information of the acceleration sensor is set (S4906). The indicator corresponding to the display command set here becomes the indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a).

When the process of S4906 is executed, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated next (S4907). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the shaking operation data from the shaking operation table (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor. To set. Then, it is determined whether or not the shaking effect is completed (S4909).

If it is determined that the shaking effect has not been completed (S4909: No), this process is terminated, while if it is determined that the shaking effect has been completed (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. Set (S4910) and end this process.

As described above, in the shaking control process 2 in this control example, the operating state of the movable accessory is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable accessory) and operated by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operating means) and the operating status of the movable accessory, the movable accessory can be moved in the direction in which it swings greatly (movable direction), or the movable accessory can be moved in the direction in which it swings slightly (movable). Since it is configured to use the swinging motion (movable motion) table 2 to set whether or not to move in the direction), the variable member is actually controlled to be movable based on the operation of the player. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to positively operate the operating means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for notifying the timing at which the player operates the operating means is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the operating status of the movable accessory acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor. Since it is configured to be displayable on the display screen, the player can operate the operation means while watching the operation timing notification display, so that the movable accessory can perform a desired movable operation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 with the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and the MPU 231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed as one unit of the time when the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the fluctuation display by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning, and the number of reserved balls. The case of including it in the command has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is input to the voice lamp by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first winning opening 64, in which the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13, is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 so that the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 66 or 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or by the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an embodiment (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to set a normal gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low and a probabilistic gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high as the gaming state, and it is easier to hit the normal symbol. A pachinko machine that can set a time-saving state that is a gaming state and a normal state in which a normal symbol is harder to hit than the time-saving state is used, but it may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like that has other gaming states. For example, when the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the probability fluctuation state, acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is advantageous for the player even if the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is wrong. It may be possible to set the second probability variation game state in which the state (so-called small hit) is set with a higher probability than usual. It should be noted that the small hit is a state in which the ball can be won in the variable winning device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is out of the question.

With this configuration, the player who has entered the probabilistic gaming state will play the game aiming at the second probabilistic gaming state, which is a state that is more advantageous for the player, and will get tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, when the second probabilistic gaming state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of hit / fail judgments of the special symbol executed during the probabilistic game state, and when the number of hit / fail judgments exceeds the limit. May be configured to shift from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state. With this configuration, if the probabilistic game state is reached as in the past, the probabilistic game state will not continue until the next big hit, so even during the probable change game state, concentrate on the player. You can play a game.

When the second probabilistic gaming state is set for a pachinko machine or the like in which the number of hit / fail judgments is limited for the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state in this way, the player can obtain more balls during the second probabilistic gaming state. You will be aware of big hits and small hits. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on playing the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when using a gaming machine capable of setting the second probabilistic gaming state, it is preferable to provide a plurality of third symbol display devices and switch the device for displaying the variation of the third symbol according to the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the surrounding players that the game is being played in the most advantageous gaming state for the player, such as the second probabilistic gaming state, and the player is satisfied. Can be provided.

As a plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in this control example and the reel member provided in the rotating body elevating unit 300 (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body). It is preferable to use a member (member) in which the third symbol is synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of 340b, and a plurality of third symbols are variablely displayed by rotating each rotating body. With this configuration, the variable display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the difference in appearance can be clarified.

Further, by controlling the elevating of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the rotating body elevating unit 300 can be moved to an exposed position (a position that covers at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) that can be visually recognized by the player, or the player can move the rotating body elevating unit 300 to an exposed position (a position that covers at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device). Since it is possible to move it to a storage position that is difficult to see (a position that is stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the variation display of the third symbol in the second probability variation game state is reeled. By configuring the members to perform the game, it is possible to make the player aware that the rotating body elevating unit 300 is playing the game in the second probabilistic game state only by being located at the exposed position, and the player is satisfied. Can provide a feeling.

Further, as the elevating control of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the rotating body elevating unit 300 performs an operation of moving back and forth between the storage position and the exposed position, thereby producing an effect of suggesting the current gaming state to the player. Since it can be performed, it is possible to provide a production that gives the player a sense of expectation.

Further, in the second probability variation game state, the reel member displays a variable display suggesting whether or not the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit on the third symbol display device 81, and the hit / miss judgment result of the special symbol is a small hit on the reel member. It is also possible to execute a variable display suggesting whether or not it is. With this configuration, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member on which the variable display suggesting whether or not it is a small hit in the first half period of the second probability variation game state is performed, and the latter half of the second probability variation game state. At the time of the period, attention will be paid to the third symbol display device 81, which performs a variable display suggesting whether or not it is a big hit. This has the effect that the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

It should be noted that, using different display devices, a variable display suggesting whether or not the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit and a variable display suggesting whether the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a small hit are used. When displaying at the same time, one of them may be displayed as a third symbol and the other may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Further, instead of displaying the fluctuation of the symbol, a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, an effect using only a sound or a lamp, or the like may be performed to suggest a pass / fail determination result. Further, the display device that is variablely displayed may be switched based on the determination result of the special symbol.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the left and right sensor device 600 as an example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate arranged on the front side of the game board at intervals through which a game medium can pass, and displacement toward the back side of the game board. It is provided with a displacement member that is possibly arranged and visible to the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position where the displacement member overlaps at least a part of a detection region of the sensor device.

Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the front of the game board (plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from the object is provided, and the optical sensor is used by the player. Those that detect the presence or movement of fingers are known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-09434). In this case, the path of the light (irradiation light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap the moving region of the displaceable member formed so as to be displaceable (for example, paragraph 0045 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-09434). And Fig. 5 etc.). Therefore, the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and there is a problem that the displacement member cannot be effectively used.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device, the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection area of the sensor device. Can be done. That is, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, and is, for example, an optical sensor device (an irradiation means that irradiates light consisting of visible light or invisible light, and an object (object) that is irradiated from the irradiation means. A light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light is provided, and the light received is evaluated). As a method for evaluating the received light, a triangular ranging method that converts the image formation position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence or absence (distance) of the object or the time required from the irradiation of the light to the reception of the light is performed. An example is a time-of-flight formula that converts light into the presence / absence (distance) of an object.

In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at predetermined intervals from each other, and the displacement member includes a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A game machine A2 characterized in that it can be displaced to a position for partitioning.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced at a position separating the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, so that the displacement member can be displaced on the front surface of the transparent plate. , These two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation of causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

On the other hand, by retracting the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the division of these two detection areas by the displacement member can be released. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor, and the first sensor is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection areas of the detection area and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displacement member can be displaced in a region overlapping with at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of at least one of the detection areas of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his / her hand or finger, the player can be made to search for the detection area.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can use both the means for detecting the object on the front surface side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. .. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a light emitting means formed so as to be capable of emitting light is provided, and the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

Since the gaming machine A5 is provided with a light emitting means capable of emitting light, it is possible to produce an effect by emitting light of the light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emission of the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device, it is possible to suppress the light emission of the light emitting means from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, since the displacement member can also be used as a member for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Further, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielded position and a space can be secured. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced. can.

In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member receives light emitted from the light emitting means into the sensor device according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded.

According to the gaming machine A6, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is the sensor device. It is possible to suppress the light reception. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of shielding the light emission of any of the light emitting means from the plurality of light emitting means is provided, a large space is required for the arrangement of the member. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

The game machine A5 or A6 includes a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the game board so as to be visible through the opening of the game board and to which the light emitting means is arranged. The displacement member is characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emission from the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device according to the displacement position of the second displacement member. Displacement machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is arranged on the second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at different positions according to the displacement of the second displacement member. .. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device according to the displacement position of the second displacement member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted from the sensor device. It is possible to suppress the light reception. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A5 or A6, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of shielding the light emission of the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is provided for the arrangement of the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged opposite to each other at predetermined intervals, and the first sensor or the second sensor is provided. Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive the light, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to see. At the same time, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, fat on the player's hand).

For example, in a configuration in which the sensor device 1 is arranged at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is emitted diagonally to the transparent plate, the sensor device is viewed from the front. Can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and an object (for example, the player's hand or finger) existing on the front side of the transparent plate can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the gaming board. It can be difficult for the player to see. In this case, when the light emitted from either the first sensor or the second sensor is reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor, and the transparent plate is dirty. In the absence of, the light emitted from either the first sensor or the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor. This makes it possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate.

It is preferable that the first sensor and the second sensor detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate in the process when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, since the player is not in the store, it is not necessary to distinguish between the object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and the dirt on the transparent plate. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is characterized in that an absorbent material capable of absorbing the irradiated light is disposed on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbent material capable of absorbing the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member, so that the front side of the transparent plate can be used. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified to suppress the control load.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is characterized in that a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light. Machine A10.

According to the game machine A10, in any of the game machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed from a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light at a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. , It is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member, so that the front side of the transparent plate can be used. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified to suppress the control load.

Further, since the above portion of the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to the object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. As a result, the displacement member can be displaced while securing the detection area of the sensor device.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is formed with a reflective surface on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device to reflect the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member reflects the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device in a direction different from that of the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member, so that the front side of the transparent plate can be used. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified to suppress the control load.

<Concept of the invention using the central floating unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displaceable member, a first member displaced relative to the displaceable member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displaced member, the displaced member is The gaming machine B1 is provided with a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

Here, it is known that a displaceable displacement member is provided and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. Further, there is also one in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member and the first member is rotated to enhance the effect of the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above-mentioned one, there is a problem that the first member rotates while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the movement of the first member is hardly changed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement members are provided with a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected to each other. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

Further, since the displacement member is connected so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the arm member, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is displaced relative to the arm member and both are displaced by independent displacements, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. Can be done, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

As the form of displacement of the arm member, for example, a form of rotating around the other end side, a form of sliding displacement on the other end side, and a form of combining these (one of the arm members rotates and the other slide displacement). , The form to be adopted respectively) is exemplified.

Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, a shaft arranged on one of the arm member or the first member is a shaft in a shaft hole arranged on the other. A form in which the supported shaft can be displaced relative to the shaft hole by rotating the shaft, and a pin arranged on one of the arm members or the first member slides along a sliding groove arranged on the other. A form in which relative displacement is possible by doing so, a form in which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member and the elastic member is elastically deformed so that relative displacement is possible, and the arm member and the first member are arranged on one of the arm members or the first member. A form in which the spherical ball is arranged on the other side and can be relatively displaced by rotating in an arbitrary direction with respect to the stud in spherical contact with the ball, and the arm member and the first member have one or more link mechanisms (not deformed). Examples thereof include a form in which the nodes are connected via a joint which is a movable part) and the link mechanism is deformed to enable relative displacement, and a form in which each of these forms is combined.

In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported by the other end opposite to one end on which the first member is dislocated so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the driving means causes the pair of arm members to be rotatably supported. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is rotated around the other end.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are driven by rotatably supporting one end of the pair of arm members and the other end of the opposite side so as to be relatively displaceable. Since it is rotated around the other end by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along an arcuate locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to impart a motion that combines linear motion and rotary motion to the first member, and it is possible to give a change to the motion.

The pair of arm members may have the same distance from one end to the other end, or may have different lengths.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. The pin portion to be formed is arranged, and the sliding groove is formed by one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where at least the arm member is arranged at a reference position. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and the sliding groove has at least the arm member at the reference position. In the arranged state, a gap is formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion, so that even if the arm member is stopped, the first member can be displaced by the gap. It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. This makes it possible to change the movement of the first member.

For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at a reference position, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. It is possible to form a displacement that reciprocates. As a result, after the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the first member can be reciprocated (swayed).

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the sliding groove is formed in the first member and a pair of linear grooves are arranged in a non-parallel manner in the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged in a non-parallel manner, so that the displacement of the arm member is displaced. When the first member is displaced relative to the arm member by the amount of the gap between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin after being stopped at the reference position, that A rotation component can be added to the relative displacement. This makes it possible to change the movement of the first member.

Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. At the same time, the load on the drive means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially C shape.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially C-shape, so that after the reciprocating movement of the first member converges and stops, the stopped state is reached. The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the first member retracted to the retracted position from rattling due to disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported by the other end on the opposite side to the one end on which the first member is arranged so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the driving means causes the pair of arm members to be rotatably supported. Rotated around the other end, the sliding groove is formed linearly and is disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member. Game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are driven by rotatably supporting one end of the pair of arm members and the other end of the opposite side so as to be relatively displaceable. Since it is rotated around the other end by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along an arcuate locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to impart a motion that combines linear motion and rotary motion to the first member, and it is possible to give a change to the motion.

In this case, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and is arranged at one end of the arm member and the pin portion is arranged on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove is determined according to the rotation angle of the arm member ( The tilt direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially C shape or in a straight line. As a result, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of inertial force, when the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape, the first member While making it possible to add a rotational component to the movement, the reciprocating movement can be quickly converged toward the center of the V shape, and when the sliding grooves are arranged in a straight line, the first member The movement can be limited to the linear component.

Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. At the same time, the load on the drive means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion allows the movement of the first member by the action of gravity. The gaming machine B7, which is characterized in that it is arranged in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion is the first member due to the action of gravity. As the movement of the first member, in addition to the movement driven by the displacement of the arm member, the movement of the first member that does not follow the displacement of the arm member and is free-falled by the action of gravity can be formed. .. This makes it possible to change the movement of the first member.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member is attached to a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably arranged in the main body portion, and the driven portion thereof. The gaming machine B8 comprising a second driving means for applying a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of an arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably arranged in the main body portion, and a driven portion. Since the driven portion is provided with the second driving means for applying the driving force, it is possible to perform an effect of relative displacement of the driven portion with respect to the main body portion by the driving force of the second driving means. In this case, a reaction force due to the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, so that the reaction force can form a displacement that reciprocates the pin portion toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. can. As a result, the main body portion (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) while the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

In the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means, so that the arm When the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body to displace the main body in a state where the displacement of the member is stopped, it is possible to easily generate a rotation component in the movement of the main body.

Examples of the shape of the driven portion include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and a long shape. In this case, the center of gravity of the driven portion may be eccentric from the center of rotation (position pivotally supported by the main body portion). As a result, the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit can be increased, and the fluctuation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body unit.

In the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions, so that the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving portion is applied to the rotation of the main body portion. It can be easily connected to movement.

The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first member.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B10, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first member. By such contact, both the regulation of the movement of the first member and the change of the movement of the first member can be achieved. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first member, so that the first member is displaced (reciprocating) by the inertial force generated by the stop of the arm member. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, in a state where the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member and the first member is bounced off, whereby the first member is displaced relative to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced or a mode in which the first member is displaced in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member.

Further, when the first member includes a main body portion and a driven portion, by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the main body portion, the main body portion is maintained in a stopped state and only the driven portion is displaced. Can be made to. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the main body portion is displaced together with the driven portion by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion and a mode in which only the driven portion is displaced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B11, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, a magnet is arranged on one of the first member or the second displacement member, and the first member or the first member or the first member. 2 A magnet or an iron member is arranged on the other side of the displacement member, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A game machine B12 characterized by being displaced.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B11, a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the second displacement member is provided on either the first member or the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force is applied between the magnet and the magnet or the iron member disposed on the other side of the first member or the second displacement member, the action of the magnetic force regulates the movement of the first member or or The first member can be displaced. For example, by stopping the arm member at a reference position and then moving the second displacement member close to the first member, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of a magnetic force. Since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of the magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other, and both can be made non-contact, so that damage can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by a driving means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In a gaming machine that is provided with at least the above and allows the player to visually recognize the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the driving force of the driving means is formed so as to be able to be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to be different from each other.

Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated and drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a figure and a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotating body is independently rotated and driven by the first drive motor (driving means), and the second rotating body is independently rotated by the second drive motor, and the figure of the first rotating body visually recognized by the player. And the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, since the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine requires the same number of drive motors as the rotating body, there is a problem that the cost increases accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission means sets the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body are different. Since it is formed so as to be able to transmit to, even with one driving means, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed. That is, the required number of drive means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The different rotational states of one rotating body and the other rotating body include, for example, a state in which the rotational speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated and the other is rotated. The state in which the rotating body of the above is stopped is exemplified. The rotation speed does not have to be constant and may be increased or decreased.

Further, as a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body, for example, characters, patterns, colors, patterns, or a combination thereof are exemplified. In this case, the figure may be a part of a character or a pattern (a character or a pattern that is combined with another figure to form one character or a pattern), or the whole figure (the figure alone forms one character or a pattern). Things) may be.

In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. The rotation cycle and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body can be made different. Therefore, even with the driving means of 1, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

Further, since the transmission means has a configuration in which the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different, the structure of the transmitting means can be simplified.

Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism that transmits rotation by meshing (gear transmission mechanism and chain transmission mechanism) and a mechanism that transmits rotation by friction (friction transmission mechanism and belt transmission mechanism). The gear transmission mechanism includes spur gears, worms and worm gears, bevel gears, or racks and pinions, the chain transmission mechanism includes chains and sprockets, the friction transmission mechanism includes friction gears, and the belt transmission mechanism. , Pulleys and belts are exemplified respectively.

In this case, a mechanism for transmitting rotation between the rotating shaft of the first rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means and between the rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means by the above-mentioned meshing. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and in one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the rotating shaft thereof is directly connected to the driving shaft of the driving means, and the first rotating body and the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the second rotating body are directly connected to each other. A mechanism for transmitting rotation by meshing or a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided between the other rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means. In the latter case, the number of parts (gears, etc.) for constituting the mechanism for transmitting rotation can be suppressed, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine C2, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are in a state in which the other phase is deviated from one phase at the viewing position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being stopped at.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear can be increased, and it is required to make the desired combination of figures appear. It is possible to suppress the number of rotations and make it appear in a short time.

That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player, it is required that the phases of both of the two rotating bodies match. As the number of possible shapes decreases, the number of revolutions required to reveal the desired combination of shapes increases (the table becomes longer). On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, the other phase is deviated from one phase of both rotating bodies. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and it is possible to suppress the number of rotations required to make the desired combination of figures appear and make them appear in a short time. can.

In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is curved in an arc shape which is convex outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferable. This is because even if there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body stopped at the visible position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

In the game machine C1, the transmission means includes a first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and a second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the drive means to the second rotating body. At least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes at least two gears that are meshable with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. The gaming machine C4 is characterized by comprising a meshing region for transmitting rotation and a non-matching region for blocking the transmission of rotation with the meshing of the other gear as non-gating.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means comprises at least two gears that are geared together and one of those two gears meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation to the meshing region and the other. Since it is provided with a non-engagement region in which the meshing with the gear is non-engaged and the transmission of rotation is blocked, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped and the other is rotated, and the first rotation. A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even with the driving means of 1, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

Further, as described above, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, stop the rotation of one of them, and release the stop to restart the rotation. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body.

Both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshed region and a non-engaged region. It may be provided with. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state in which both stop, a state in which one stops and the other rotates, and a state in which one rotates and the other stops. ..

In the game machine C4, only one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-engagement region, and the formation range of the non-engagement region is the first rotating body or the first rotating body. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is set corresponding to the space between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, since only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means has a gear having a toothed region and a non-toothed region, the driving means is driven. In the present state, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, and the other is maintained in rotation. In this case, the formation range of the non-engaged region is set corresponding to the space between the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other of the first rotating body or the second rotating body, and thus is the same as the figure of the first rotating body. The length of the table whose element is the combination with the figure of the second rotating body can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to bring out the desired combination of figures. That is, the time required to bring out the desired combination of figures can be shortened.

It should be noted that the formation range of the non-mating region is set corresponding to the space between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other, that one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is set by the non-gating region. While stopped, it means that the other is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1). In particular, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because the length of the table described above can be minimized to minimize the number of rotations required to bring out the desired combination of figures.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, the transmission means has a forward transmission means for transmitting the forward rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a positive direction of the driving means. The reverse direction transmitting means for transmitting the rotation in the opposite direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the positive rotation of the driving means when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction. Allows transmission to the directional transmission means, blocks transmission to the reverse transmission means, and when the drive means is rotated in the opposite direction, transmits the rotation of the drive means to the forward transmission means. The gaming machine C6 is provided with a switching means that shuts off and allows transmission to the reverse transmission means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, when the driving means is rotated in the positive direction, the switching means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the positive direction transmitting means. If it is permissible and the transmission to the reverse transmission means is blocked, and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the switching means blocks the transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward transmission means. Since transmission to the reverse direction transmitting means is allowed together with the above, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation that the player visually recognizes depending on whether the driving means is rotated in the forward direction or in the opposite direction. The type of combination with the body shape can be different. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily select two types of tables by changing the rotation direction of the driving means to two types of tables whose elements are the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body. can do.

As the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means, the first structure described in the game machine C2 or C3 (a structure in which the rotation ratios of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are different), the game machine C4 or the game machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by a non-engagement region), and a second structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. It can be arbitrarily selected from the three structures.

For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse transmission means is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means. For example, the case where the first structure is selected or the case where the second structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means are exemplified. In the former case, the rotation ratio is different between the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means, and in the latter case, the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means have a toothed region and a non-toothed region. The formation ratio of is different. Also in this case, there are two types of tables whose elements are the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, the two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected. It can be possible.

Further, the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the opposite direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that the directions are the same. This is because it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the rotation direction of the drive means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, a light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided, and the outer circumference of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided. The gaming machine C7, characterized in that at least a portion of the surface is formed of a light transmissive material.

According to the game machine C7, in any of the game machines C1 to C6, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light transmitting material, so that the first The light emission of the light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body can be visually recognized by the player.

It should be noted that the light emitting means may be made to emit light at all times or under predetermined conditions. As a predetermined condition, for example, when the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body form a specific combination, and when either the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped, the stop is performed. For example, when the rotation is restarted before or after the execution of.

In the game machine C7, the front surface is formed in an open box shape, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is accommodated through the open portion of the front surface. The gaming machine C8 is provided with an accommodating body that allows the player to visually recognize the figure drawn in the above.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the front surface is formed in an open box shape, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the first rotation is performed through the front open portion. Since the housing body is provided so that the player can visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the body and the second rotating body, the light emission of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player by using the housing body. That is, the light emission of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player in a manner different from the case where the light emission is directly visually recognized. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the inner wall surface of the accommodating body to be visually recognized by the player, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall portion of the accommodating body to irradiate a predetermined object. Examples thereof include a mode in which a player visually recognizes a predetermined object together with a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from a light emitting means is incident on the wall portion of the accommodating body to emit light in a predetermined portion of the accommodating body (for example, an end face on the front surface). To.

In each of the above embodiments, for example, a specific figure among a plurality of figures drawn on at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is the back side of the first rotating body or the second rotating body (that is, that is). It is preferably executed when it is placed in a position (invisible to the player). A specific figure placed in a position invisible to the player is associated with the player by the light emission of the light emitting means (the first rotating body or the second rotating body makes the specific figure visible). Because it can be expected to be rotated). In particular, it is preferable that the light emission of the light emitting means is executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped.

In the gaming machines C1 to C8, the accommodating body in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the effect position and the game in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body can visually recognize the accommodating body. The gaming machine C9 is provided with a moving means for moving to and from a retracted position that cannot be seen by a person.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the accommodation body in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are housed, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are the players. Since the moving means for moving between the effect position visible from the player and the retracted position invisible to the player is provided, a desired combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body can be selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body relatively many times in order to bring out the desired combination, and where it takes a long time, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated by the moving means. Since the body can be moved to a retracted position that cannot be seen by the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated to a predetermined rotating position in advance at such a retracted position, whereby. When the required timing arrives, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved to the effect position by the moving means, and the desired combination can be quickly displayed.

The gaming machine C9 is provided with an operating means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at the retracted position and the operating means is operated. Characteristic gaming machine C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C9, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged in the retracted position and the operating means is operated, so that the first rotation is performed. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance at the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the rotation.

That is, since a relatively loud sound is generated when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, even if the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the retracted position and made invisible to the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the second rotating body and the second rotating body are made invisible. The rotation may be recognized by the player due to the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be performed by being mixed with the operation of the operating means, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. can.

As the operating means, for example, a payout device, a voice generator, and the like are exemplified. That is, in a state where the game medium is paid out by the payout device, a relatively loud sound is generated along with the payout operation of the game medium. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like. The same applies to the state in which voice is being generated from the voice generator. Further, instead of or in addition to this, when a predetermined display is performed on the display device, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like.

<Concept of the invention using LED344 as an example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means arranged inside the rotating body, and the rotation thereof. In a gaming machine provided with an accommodating body in which a body is rotatably accommodated and a figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is visually recognized by a player through an open portion on the front surface, light is emitted from the light emitting means of the rotating body. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that the light transmitted from the outer wall is reflected by the housing and is visually recognized by the player.

Here, a rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means arranged inside the rotating body, and a light emitting means. A gaming machine is known that includes an accommodating body in which a rotating body is rotatably accommodated, and allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -220215 (publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the light of the light emitting means passes through the outer wall of the rotating body which is visible from the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, and is only directly visible to the player. There was a problem that the effect of light was not effectively exhibited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the accommodating body and visually recognized by the player, so that the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is transmitted. The light can be visually recognized by the player in a manner different from the case of directly visually recognizing it, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a transmissive portion formed of a light-transmitting material and transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a material capable of reflecting light. A reflective portion is formed to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means into the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion provide an irradiation region of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body is rotated. A game machine D2 characterized by being passable.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body has a transmitting portion for transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body and the light emitted from the light emitting means. A reflecting portion that reflects the inside of the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation region of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body is rotated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means. It is possible to form a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside and a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted to the outside from the transmitting portion, and each of these forms is a rotating body. It can be switched with the rotation of. That is, two light emitting forms can be formed with only one light emitting means, and for example, the position of the light visually recognized by the player is switched to at least two places without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, it is possible to effectively exert the effect of light production while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a posture of irradiating light toward the open portion of the front surface of the housing.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture of irradiating the light toward the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. In the embodiment in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, the light can be visually recognized by the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In the form in which the light is reflected by the portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, the light cannot be visually recognized from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open portion on the front surface of the accommodating body, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the accommodating body is transmitted. It can be visually recognized by the player around the rotating body. As a result, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched as the rotating body rotates, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be significantly different. As a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited. can.

A gaming machine D4, wherein in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the accommodating body is visually recognized by the player around the rotating body, the light is emitted. The size of the area to be visually recognized can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively. The gaming machine D5 characterized in that it is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged substantially parallel to the first rotating body, and the first of them. Since the rotating body and the second rotating body are each formed as a triangular columnar body having a triangular cross section, the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body (as the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body occurs). The facing interval) can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the accommodating body is transmitted from the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When the player visually recognizes the light, the size of the area where the light can be visually recognized can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided with the reflective portion on the inner surface of the outer wall forming the outer surface of one of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. The gaming machine D6, wherein the transmission portion is disposed on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is on the inner surface of the outer wall forming the outer surface of one of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflecting portion is arranged and the transmitting portion is arranged on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In the case of making it, light can be transmitted to the outside from two outer surfaces (transmitting portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different points on the inner wall surface of the accommodating body to be visually recognized by the player, or the light transmitted from one of the transmissive portions is directly visible to the player and transmitted from the other transmissive portion. The generated light can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the housing so that the player can visually recognize it, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D6, the accommodating body is formed in a box-shaped body having an open front surface, and a reflective portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is formed on the inner wall surface on the back surface side of the box-shaped body. The gaming machine D7, characterized in that it is arranged in a range beyond the outer shape of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the accommodating body is formed in a box-shaped body having an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is made of a material capable of reflecting light. Since the reflecting portion to be formed is arranged in a range exceeding the outer shape of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In addition, the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is visually recognized by the player in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. At the same time, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exerted.

In the game machine D7, the accommodating body is an inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body, and can reflect light on the inner wall surface facing parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflective portion formed of various materials is arranged.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7, the accommodating body is an inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body and faces parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Since a reflective portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is arranged on the inner wall surface, the light reflected by the inner wall surface on the back side of the accommodating body is further reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface side and visually recognized by the player. At the same time, the light transmitted from the transmitting portion can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface side of the accommodating body to be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

<Characteristic E group> (AQ mode)
It is possible to dynamically display the identification information on the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information. The identification information is configured to show the determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and the first rotating body thereof. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the rotating body, a rotation control means for rotating and controlling the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a first gaming state and the first game state thereof. When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the second gaming state different from the gaming state and the state setting means, the identification information is used in combination. The determination result by the determination means is shown, and when the second game state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are the determination results by the determination means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having a switching setting means for switching and setting as shown in the above.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of displaying a symbol by combining a plurality of symbols by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbol on a liquid crystal screen. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-23040). However, even in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player is bored because only the game of constantly rotating the rotating body to display the symbol is performed. The gaming machine E1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine E1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display means for displaying the identification information. A dynamic display means capable of displaying a target, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information. The identification information is configured to show the determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface thereof. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the first rotating body, a rotation controlling means for rotating and controlling the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a first gaming state. And a state setting means capable of setting at least one of a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and when the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, the identification. The determination result by the determination means is shown by the combination of information, and when the second gaming state is set, the determination is made by the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means. It has a switching setting means for switching and setting so as to show a determination result by the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 has a variable means for varying the first rotating body and the second rotating body into a visible first position and a second position that is more difficult to see than the first position, and the variable means thereof. When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, the means has the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the second position as compared with the case where the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by being easy to change.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the variable means based on the gaming state.

As a result, it is possible to assume the game state depending on the positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body becomes a specific combination, the display means has an effect executing means for executing a specific effect. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to perform an effect based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. , It becomes possible to associate the effect with the symbol display means and the display means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the driving transmission means for transmitting the driving force for rotating the first rotation and the second rotating body is provided, and the driving transmitting means includes the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The gaming machine E4 characterized in that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the driving transmission means. Therefore, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, the acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition means, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied. When the storage means for storing the information, the pre-determination means for executing the determination of the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the second gaming state are set. The gaming machine is characterized by having a determination means for determining a combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body based on the determination result of the prior determination means. E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are played. That is, since the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is determined based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the time until the determined combination of the symbols is displayed is secured. can do.

This makes it possible to provide the player with an effect by using, for example, the time until it is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E5, when the combination of symbols determined by the determination means is determined, the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the advance determination means is dynamically displayed in advance. The gaming machine E6 is characterized by having a pre-rotating means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, by a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are used by the time the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the pre-determining means is started. Since it is possible to rotate the slingshot by a predetermined amount, there is an effect that the combination of symbols determined by the determining means can be reliably displayed.

<Feature F group> (Volume is displayed at the time of demonstration)
A determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and a sound based on the effect executed by the effect execution means are output. In a gaming machine having a voice output means to be operated, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a volume setting means that sets a volume based on the operation of the operation means, the effect execution means is used. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a setting means for effectively setting an operation by the operation means in a specific period of the period in which the effect is executed.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine equipped with an audio output device and capable of setting the volume of audio for producing a game or the like has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-237647). .. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only when the game-based effect is not executed, and when the game-based effect is executed, an unintended volume of sound is output. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the gaming machine F1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game at a volume desired by the player.

According to the gaming machine F1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means for executing the effect. A gaming machine having a voice output means for outputting a voice based on an effect, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a volume setting means for setting a volume based on the operation of the operation means. In the period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing means, the setting means for effectively setting the operation by the operation means in a specific period is provided. As a result, the volume can be adjusted as appropriate. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play at a desired volume.

In the gaming machine F1, the effect determining means for determining the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, the specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F2, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, a specific period can be set based on the content of the production, so that the volume can be set within a range that does not interfere with the production, and the production effect can be achieved. It has the effect of suppressing damage.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period for effectively setting an operation by the operating means when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined period. Machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the volume can be set even when the effect is not executed for a predetermined period by the effect executing means, so that the player can set the volume at a desired timing. Has the effect of being able to set.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the display means is displayed with a display means for displaying the effect mode by the effect execution means and a setting mode for indicating that the specific period is set by the setting means. A gaming machine F4 comprising: a setting mode display control means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the period during which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period during which the player can set the volume can be easily set. It has the effect that it can be grasped and the player can easily set the volume.

Discrimination information notifying means for notifying discrimination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting means when the effect is not executed for the predetermined period by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. The gaming machine F5, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed for a predetermined time by the effect executing means, the set volume can be discriminated, so that the player can be notified. Has the effect that it can be easily determined whether or not the volume should be changed.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is a prohibition means for prohibiting the operation means from being effectively set by the setting means based on the determination of a specific determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, it is prohibited to effectively set the operation means, so that the volume is increased. It is possible to grasp the judgment result of the judgment means by the operation for setting, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information is the specific determination. It is composed of at least a first symbol indicating that it is a result and a second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the setting mode is a variable display of the second symbol. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are played. That is, the effect of dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect execution means, and at least the first symbol indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result and the determination result different from the specific determination result. Of the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating the above, the second symbol is variably displayed according to the setting mode.

Thereby, the second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result can be used for setting the volume. Therefore, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means can be effectively used.

One of the gaming machines F4 to F7 is characterized by having a luminance variable means for varying the luminance of the display means based on the operation of the operating means when the specific period is set. The gaming machine F8.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when a specific period is set, the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness changing means based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play with the desired brightness.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the acquisition means for acquiring the information used for the determination of the determination condition based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means at least until the determination condition is satisfied. A predetermined condition is determined based on a storage means for storing the information, a pre-determination means for determining the information stored by the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and a determination result by the pre-determination means. The setting means has a determination means for determining the establishment, and the setting means determines the information for at least the specific period by the prior determination means when the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the operation of the operating means is effectively set until the effect corresponding to the above is executed.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are played. That is, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means acquires the information used for the determination of the determination means. The storage means stores the acquired information at least until the determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is determined by the pre-determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, the determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation of the operating means is effectively set by the setting means until the effect corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination means is executed.

As a result, the period from the determination of the information by the pre-determination means to the execution of the effect corresponding to the information can be set as the period in which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a favorite volume according to the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Customized setting of fish school)
A determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and an operation for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a target display means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, by the operation of the player. An operating means capable of inputting game information, a storage means capable of storing game information input by the operating means, and a determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A pre-display means for displaying prior information based on a determination result on the display means, a pre-information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the pre-display means based on the determination result, and the prior information thereof. A setting means for setting a ratio of the specific prior information determined by the determination means selected between the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result, and the setting thereof. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a ratio determining means for determining a ratio set by the means based on the game information stored in the storage means.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery of games is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-09434). However, in this type of pachinko machine, it is not possible to set the degree of expectation of the production according to the preference of each player, and it is difficult to provide the gaming machine according to the preference of the player. was there. The gaming machine G1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suits the taste of the player.

According to the gaming machine G1, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means. It has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed. An operating means capable of inputting game information by the operation of a person, a storage means capable of storing the game information input by the operating means, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A pre-display means for displaying prior information based on a determination result by the determination means on the display means, and a prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the pre-display means based on the determination result. , Setting means for setting the probability that the specific prior information that can be determined is determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the prior information determination means, and setting by the setting means. It has a probability determining means for determining the probability to be played based on the game information stored in the storage means. As a result, the degree of expectation indicated by the prior information can be changed according to the player's preference. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine can be provided according to the preference of the player.

In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 indicates that the specific prior information informs the player of the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific advance information, so that the player can match the preference of the player. There is an effect that the production can be set in more detail.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is the information indicating the degree of expectation of the gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation, so that the information is produced in more detail according to the player's preference. Has the effect of being able to set.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a counter means capable of repeatedly updating the counter value within a predetermined range, and acquisition of the counter value counted by the counter means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The specific prior information includes means, and the determination is set within the range of the counter value in the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A value is set, and the prior information determination means is the specific prior information when the counter value acquired by the acquisition means is any of the determination values set in the specific prior information. The gaming machine G4, which is characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are played. That is, the counter value is repeatedly updated within a predetermined range by the counter means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the counter value counted by the counter means is acquired by the acquisition means. The specific prior information is acquired by the acquisition means after the determination value set within the range of the counter value is set depending on whether the determination result is a specific determination result or other than the specific determination result. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the specific prior information is determined. This has the effect of simplifying control.

The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the ratio setting means sets a range of the determination values to be set based on the gaming information.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G4, the range of the determination value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, so that there is an effect that the determination value can be set more easily.

<Characteristic H group> (Control to divide the area of the touch detection position)
An effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of non-contactly detecting an operation operation of a player, and a specific effect by the effect executing means when the operation operation is detected by the detection means. In a gaming machine having an effect variable means for executing the above, the detection means includes a first detection area capable of detecting the operation operation and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member having at least a region and capable of being variable to a prohibited position for prohibiting the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position for allowing the shared detection region to be formed, and a variable member thereof. A variable control means for variably controlling the variable member to the prohibited position and the permitted position, and a discriminating means for determining whether the variable member is detected by the detection means in the first detection area or the second detection area. When the variable member is variable at the prohibited position, the effect variable means determines that either one of the first detection region and the second detection region is detected by the discrimination means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is variable to the specific effect corresponding to each of the results.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port into which the gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. , The lottery of the game is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a means to change the effect by the operation of the player, a touch sensor that allows the player to input with a finger or the like is arranged, and the player operates the touch to switch the effect and execute the game machine. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-219617). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a more suitable gaming using an input means such as a touch sensor has been required. It is an object of the present invention to provide a suitable gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means for executing the effect, the detection means capable of detecting the player, and when the operation is detected by the detection means, the effect executing means produces a specific effect. The detection means has at least a first detection area in which a player can be detected and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that can be changed to a prohibited position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position that allows the formation of the shared detection region, and the variable member thereof are prohibited. It has a variable control means for variably controlling a position and a permitted position, and a discriminating means for determining whether the first region or the second detection region is detected by the detection means, and the effect is variable. When the means is variable to the prohibited position, the means is changed to the corresponding specific effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

As a result, the formation of the shared detection region is prohibited by the variable member, so that the region detected by the detection means can be changed by the operation of the variable member, and the detection means can be functionally used. .. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable gaming machine can be provided.

The gaming machine H1 has a display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, and the variable member is arranged so as to be variable on the front side of a display area of the display means, and the detection means is The gaming machine H2 having the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the variable member is variable on the front side of the display means, so that the player can be notified of the detection area at the position of the variable member, which is easier to understand. You can play a game. Further, the player can select the effect displayed on the display means, and there is an effect that various effects can be performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the effect executing means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is in the permitted position, and when the variable member is in the prohibited position. Is a gaming machine H3 characterized in that a second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to the first detection area and the second detection area, respectively.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when the game machine H2 is in the permitted position, and the first detection area and the second detection area are displayed in the prohibited position. Since the second effect is displayed on each of the above, there is an effect that the effective detection area can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect fused with the effect displayed on the display means can be performed.

In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode that allows the player to select either a display mode displayed in the first detection area or a display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the player can select and operate according to the selection display mode, and there is an effect that the player can participate in the game more and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means has at least a first detection means for setting a first detection area and a second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detecting means includes a first detecting means for setting a first detection area and a second detecting means for setting a second detection area. Since it has at least, there is an effect that the first detection region and the second detection region can be independently detected.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection means targets an output unit capable of outputting infrared rays to the first detection region and the second detection region, and the infrared rays output from the output unit. The gaming machine H6 is characterized by having at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared rays reflected on an object.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection region and the second detection region are detected by infrared rays, so that the variable means is variable, so that erroneous detection is performed. It has the effect of suppressing problems.

<Characteristic I group> (Increase in swing width of swinging accessory, suppression control)
An oscillating member configured to be oscillating, an oscillating means for oscillating the oscillating member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the oscillating means. A swing that controls the swing means based on a state discriminating means capable of discriminating in which direction the member is operating in the first direction or the second direction and a discrimination result by the state discriminating means. A gaming machine I1 characterized by having a control means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port into which the gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. , The lottery of the game is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In the effect of showing the lottery result of the lottery, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable accessory provided on the gaming board is moved to perform a notice effect of notifying the player of information about the winning / failing result in advance (for example). , JP-A-2010-09434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there are restrictions on the size of the game board surface, the electric power that can be used, and the like, and the number of movable means such as a motor for moving a movable accessory is limited, and the machines can be moved. There is a problem that the movement and the like are also restricted, the production is limited, and the interest of the game is lowered. This gaming machine is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, a swinging member configured to swing and swinging by operating the effecting member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, respectively. The swing is based on the means, the state discriminating means capable of discriminating in which direction the rocking member is operating in the first direction or the second direction, and the discriminating result by the state discriminating means. It has a swing control means for controlling the means.

Thereby, the swing of the swing member can be easily controlled. Therefore, there is an effect that the control process of the game can be simplified.

In the gaming machine I1, the state setting means capable of setting a first state for swinging the swinging member and a second state for suppressing the swinging of the swinging member, and the state setting means for the state setting means. 1 A device having a means for controlling the swinging means by the swinging control means so as to operate the swinging member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means based on the setting of the state. The gaming machine I2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swinging member is set by the state setting means, the direction is the same as the direction determined by the state determining means. Since the swing member is controlled by the swing control means so as to operate the swing member, there is an effect that the swing member can be continued to swing.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the swing member has a displaceable displacement member and a first member displaceable relative to the displaceable member, and the displacement members are displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3 comprising a pair of possible arm members, wherein the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the first member and the displacement member are displaced relative to each other, the displacement width of the swinging member can be further increased, and the effect is dynamically produced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported by the other end on the opposite side to the one end on which the first member is arranged so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swinging means is applied. The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that it is rotated about the other end thereof.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3, one end on which the first member is rotatably arranged and the other end on the opposite side are rotatably supported by the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated around the other end by the driving force, the swing can be continuously performed, and there is an effect that the effect can be performed for a longer time.

In the gaming machine I3 or I4, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. The pin portion to be formed is arranged, and the sliding groove is formed by one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where at least the arm member is arranged at a reference position. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm members or the first member, and the sliding groove is provided on the other of the arm member or the first member. A pin portion slidably formed is arranged along the groove, and the sliding groove is formed with one end or the other end of the sliding groove at least in a state where the arm member is arranged at a reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin portion and the pin portion, there is an effect that the friction when swinging can be reduced and the damping of swinging can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determining means has an acceleration sensor arranged on the swing member, and determines the state of the swing member based on the information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 characterized by being a machine to play.

According to the gaming machine I6, the state of the swinging member is determined by the state determining means based on the information output from the acceleration sensor arranged on the swinging member in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing control can be executed according to the state of the swing member.

<Characteristic J group> (pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by a driving means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. The figure is a combination of the effect content determining means for determining the effect content and the effect content determined by the effect content determining means by controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided with at least a rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are a first position in which a player can easily see the figure and a first position thereof, respectively. The rotation control means is configured to be variably configured to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and when the rotation control means displays a combination of the figures indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, the first After rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at two positions, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are changed to the first position, respectively. A game machine J1 featuring.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port into which the gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. , The lottery of the game is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect of showing the lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel showing a plurality of symbols is rotated a plurality of times and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004). -No. 160759). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display with a predetermined combination of symbols, the rotation time of the reel (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is positioned in the front position depending on the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.) There was a problem that the time) became longer, the time until the lottery result was displayed became longer, and the interest of the game was lowered. It was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the game machine J1, the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the first, which is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and has a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. The effect content determined by the effect content determining means by controlling the rotation of the rotating body and the second rotating body, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are each provided with at least a rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the above, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body can easily recognize the figure. The rotation control means is a combination of the figures indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, which is variably configured into one position and a second position where the figure is harder to see than the first position. When displaying, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are placed at the first position. Are each variable.

This makes it possible to quickly display any figure. Therefore, there is an effect that the time to wait until the figure is displayed can be reduced.

In the game machine J1, the rotation control means can rotate and control the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Then, based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, whether the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated in the first direction or the second direction, respectively. A gaming machine J2 having a means for determining a rotation direction to be determined.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are divided into the first direction and the second direction based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Since the rotation direction is determined by the rotation direction determining means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the positions corresponding to the effect, and the rotation time can be shortened. There is an effect.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the transmission means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the transmitting means at different rotation ratios, so that the first rotation Since the second rotating body can be rotated with respect to the body at different cycles, there is an effect that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be displayed in various and efficient manners.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3. A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, and J1 to J3. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port on which a gaming ball can enter is provided on a gaming board having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening, the game is played. A lottery is executed, and an effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect of showing the lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel showing a plurality of symbols is rotated a plurality of times and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Patent Document 1). : Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-160759).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display with a predetermined combination of symbols, the rotation time of the reel (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is positioned in the front position depending on the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.) There was a problem that the time) became longer, the time until the lottery result was displayed became longer, and the interest of the game was lowered.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is rotated by the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and is rotated on the outer peripheral surface. The effect is achieved by controlling the rotation of the first and second rotating bodies on which a plurality of figures are drawn, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first and second rotating bodies, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are each provided with at least a rotation control means for controlling the rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the content determining means. Is variably configured into a first position where the figure is easy to see and a second position where the figure is harder to see than the first position, and the rotation control means is determined by the effect content determining means. When displaying the combination of the figures showing the contents of the effect, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to a predetermined amount at the second position, and then the first rotation is performed at the first position. The body and the second rotating body are each variable.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1. In the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the rotation control means has the first rotating body and the second rotating body opposite to the first direction and the first direction, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are set to the first direction, respectively, based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. It has a rotation direction determining means for determining which of the second direction and the second direction to rotate.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the transmission means rotates the driving means at different rotation ratios to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. It is something to convey.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means are rotated and a plurality of figures are formed on the outer peripheral surface. By controlling the rotation of the drawn first and second rotating bodies, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first and second rotating bodies, respectively, by the effect content determining means. At least a rotation control means for controlling the rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the determined effect content is provided, and the player can display the figure in the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. It is variably configured into a first position that is easy to see and a second position that makes it harder to see the figure than the first position, and the rotation control means indicates the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. When displaying the combination of the figures, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the first rotating body are displayed at the first position. The two rotating bodies are variable. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the rotation control means is configured to be capable of controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Rotation that determines whether to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction or the second direction, respectively, based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. It has a direction-determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the rotation time can be shortened.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. Therefore, there is an effect that the combination of the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be displayed in various and efficient manners.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 frame button (part of operation means)
290 touch switch (part of operation means)
291 selection switch (part of operating means)
222c fish school selection table (part of ratio determination means)
223k level storage area (memory means)
S2304 Pre-display means
S2332 setting means

Claims (3)

Drive means and
A transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means,
The first rotating body and the second rotating body, which are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface,
The means of determining the content of the production and the means of determining the content of the production
A rotation control means that controls the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and controls the rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. At least prepare
The first rotating body and the second rotating body have a first position in which the player can easily see the figure, and the second rotating body, respectively.
When the rotation control means displays a combination of the figures indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, which is variably configured to be a second position where the figure is harder to see than the first position. In addition, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are changed to the first position, respectively. A game machine characterized by being a thing. The rotation control means is configured to be capable of controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively.
Based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, it is determined whether the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated in the first direction or the second direction, respectively. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine has a means for determining a rotation direction. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios.

Images